Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisPresents a comprehensive examination of LCD backlights including up-to-date developments in both academia and industry. Covers the design considerations and technical requirements for the multiple applications of LCD backlights.Trade Review"LCD Backlights is an invaluable resource for researchers and general readers alike. . . includes an impressive spectrum of topics. Having specialized for nearly 10 years in this field, I can attest to the fact that it would be hard to find anywhere else the range of backlighting technology and information covered in this book." (SID ID Magazine, 2010) "LCD Backlights is an invaluable resource for researchers and general readers alike.... [It] would be hard to find any where else the ‘fullness’ of backlighting technology and information covered in this book." (Information Display, May 2009)Table of ContentsSeries Editor’s Foreword. About the Editors. List of Contributors. Preface. PART ONE BACKLIGHTS BY USE. 1 Technical Trends and Requirements/Specifications for LCD TV Backlights (S. Y. Lee, SAMSUNG Electronics). 1.1 Introduction. 1.2 Structure of LCD TV Backlights. 1.3 Trends in LCD TV Backlights. 1.4 Requirements/Specifications for LCD TV Backlights. 1.5 Conclusions. References. 2 Improvement of Moving Picture Quality by Means of Backlight Control (T. Yamamoto, Hitachi, Ltd). 2.1 Introduction. 2.2 Blur of Moving Images on LC Displays. 2.3 Methods of Reducing Motion Blur. 2.4 Backlight Blinking. 2.5 Conclusions. References. 3 Multiple Primary Color Backlights (H. Sugiura, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation). 3.1 Present Status. 3.2 Technological Impacts. 3.3 Operation of Prototype, Six-primary-color Monitor. 3.4 Details of a Six-primary-color Backlight Unit. 3.5 Signal Processing of Transforming from Three Primaries to Six Primaries. 3.6 Color Gamut of the Prototype Monitor. 3.7 Other Techniques for Multiple Primary Color LC-TVs. 3.8 Remaining Issues. References. 4 Reduction of Backlight Power Consumption of LCD-TVs (T. Shiga, The University of Electro-Communications). 4.1 Introduction. 4.2 Display Method of LCD and Power Reduction. 4.3 Principle of the Adaptive Dimming Technique. 4.4 Adaptive Dimming Control and Power Consumption. 4.5 Other Features of the Adaptive Dimming Technique. References. 5 Notebook PC/Monitor Backlights (B. H. Hong, Kwangwoon University). 5.1 Introduction. 5.2 Characteristics Required for Backlights. 5.3 Optical Systems for Backlights. 5.4 Light Sources for Backlights. 5.5 Optical Components of Backlights. References. 6 Backlights for Handheld Data Terminals (S. Aoyama, Omron Corporation). 6.1 Introduction. 6.2 Basic Structure and Principles of LED Backlights. 6.3 Constituents of LED BLUs. 6.4 Various LED Backlight Configurations. 6.5 Conclusions. References. PART TWO LIGHT SOURCE DEVICES. 7 CCFL Backlights (K. Yamaguchi, Panasonic Photo & Lighting). 7.1 Introduction. 7.2 Structure and Operating Principle of CCFLs. 7.3 Basic Characteristics of CCFLs. 7.4 Future Trends in CCFLs. 7.5 Conclusions. 8 CCFL Inverters (T. Uematsu, TDK). 8.1 Introduction. 8.2 Various Drive Schemes of CCFL Inverters. 8.3 Equivalent Circuit of CCFLs. 8.4 Inverter Circuits. 8.5 Driving of CCFLs with Inverters. 8.6 Lamp Current Balancers for Driving Multiple Lamps. 8.7 Conclusions. References. 9 HCFL Backlights (A. A. S. Sluyterman, Philips Lighting). 9.1 HCFL Light Source as a Member of the Fluorescent Lamp Family. 9.2 Introduction of the Hot Cathode in Fluorescent Lamps. 9.3 Driving the HCFL. 9.4 Cathode Life Properties of HCFL. 9.5 Lumen Maintenance and Color Point Shift during Life. 9.6 Designing a Backlight with HCFL. 9.7 The Scanning Feature, Cost-effectively Enabled by HCFL. 9.8 The Dimming Feature. 9.9 Conclusions. References. 10 EEFL Backlights (J.-H. Ko, Hallym University). 10.1 Introduction. 10.2 Basic Characteristics of EEFLs. 10.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of EEFL Backlights. 10.4 Technological Trends of EEFL Backlights. 10.5 Development Targets. 10.6 Conclusions. References. 11 FFL Backlights (G. Kim, GLD Co., Ltd. and Mirae Corporation, and S. Lim, Dankook University). 11.1 Introduction. 11.2 The History of FFL Development. 11.3 Characteristics of FFLs. 11.4 Features of the FFL. References. 12 Magnetically Coupled Electrodeless Lamps (F. Okamoto, Matsushita Electric Works). 12.1 Introduction. 12.2 The Operating Principle of Electrodeless Lamps. 12.3 Environmental Protection. 12.4 Features of Electrodeless Lamps. 12.5 Commercial Products with Electrodeless Lamps. 12.6 Trends in Research and Development. 12.7 Application to LCD Backlights. 12.8 Conclusions. References. 13 Mercury-free Fluorescent Lamp Backlights (T. Shiga, The University of Electro-Communications). 13.1 Introduction. 13.2 Basic Characteristics of Mercury Discharge. 13.3 Basic Characteristics of Xenon Discharge. 13.4 Mercury-free Xe Discharge Fluorescent Lamps. 13.5 Mercury-free Xe Flat Discharge Lamp. 13.6 Conclusions. References. 14 LED Backlights (M. Zeiler and J. Hüttner, OSRAM Opto Semiconductors GmbH). 14.1 Introduction. 14.2 LED Device Principle. 14.3 LED Backlight Solutions for Different LCD Sizes. 14.4 Conclusions. References. 15 Technological Trends of LED Backlight Units (Y. Kondo, NEC LCD Technologies). 15.1 Introduction. 15.2 Structure of LED Backlight Units. 15.3 Design of LED Backlight Units. 15.4 Requirements for Backlight Units. 15.5 Technical Trends of LED Backlights. 15.6 Applications of LED Backlights. 15.7 Conclusions. 16 White OLED Backlights (J. Jang, Kyung Hee University). 16.1 Introduction. 16.2 White OLED with a Single-layer Emission. 16.3 White OLED with Multi-layer Emission. 16.4 WOLED with Color Conversion. 16.5 Stacked WOLED Devices. 16.6 Applications of WOLEDs. 16.7 Research and Development Status. References. 17 Inorganic EL Backlights (S. Okamoto, NHK Science & Technical Research Laboratories). 17.1 Introduction. 17.2 Classification of Inorganic EL Devices. 17.3 Device Structures and Characteristics. 17.4 High-luminance Inorganic EL Devices. 17.5 Practical Examples of Backlight Use. References. 18 Field Emission Backlights (M. Ushirozawa, NHK Science & Technical Research Laboratories). 18.1 Introduction. 18.2 Field Electron Emitter. 18.3 Lamp Container and Vacuum Seal. 18.4 Cathodoluminescent Phosphor. 18.5 Issues Relating to Practical Field Emission Backlights. References. PART THREE OPTICAL COMPONENTS. 19 Light-guide Plates (Y. Ishiwatari, Asahi Kasei Chemicals). 19.1 Introduction. 19.2 Market Demands for PMMA. 19.3 Characteristics of PMMA. 19.4 Manufacturing Method for PMMA Plates. 19.5 Applications to LCD Backlight Units. 19.6 Characteristics Required for Materials of Light-guide Plates. 19.7 Materials for Extrusion Molding and Injection Molding. 19.8 Conclusions. References. 20 Optical Diffuser Plates (Y. Ishiwatari, Asahi Kasei Chemicals). 20.1 Introduction. 20.2 PMMA Light Diffuser Plates. 20.3 MS and PS Light Diffuser Plates. 20.4 Trends in Light Diffuser Plates. 20.5 LED Light Sources and Diffusing Plates. 21 Lens Films and Reflective Polarization Films (F. Hanzawa, Sumitomo 3M). 21.1 Introduction. 21.2 Fundamentals of Reflection and Refraction. 21.3 Lens Films (Upward Direction). 21.4 Lens Films (Downward Direction). 21.5 Reflective Polarization Films. 21.6 Resin-type Specular Reflection Films. 21.7 Applications of Films. 21.8 Standards. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe human element is the principle cause of incidents and accidents in all technology industries; hence it is evident that an understanding of the interaction between humans and technology is crucial to the effective management of risk. Despite this, no tested model that explicitly and quantitatively includes the human element in risk prediction is currently available. Managing Risk: the Human Element combines descriptive and explanatory text with theoretical and mathematical analysis, offering important new concepts that can be used to improve the management of risk, trend analysis and prediction, and hence affect the accident rate in technological industries. It uses examples of major accidents to identify common causal factors, or echoes, and argues that the use of specific experience parameters for each particular industry is vital to achieving a minimum error rate as defined by mathematical prediction. New ideas for the perception, calculation and prediction of risk areTrade Review"An excellently produced book with over 500 pages of detailed information on the management of risk and the avoidance of accidents." (AMEC, November 2008)Table of ContentsContents About the Authors Preface Acknowledgements Defi nitions of Risk and Risk Management Introduction: The Art of Prediction and the Creation of Order Risk and Risk Management Defi ning Risk Managing Risk: Our Purpose, Plan and Goals Recent Tragic Outcomes Power Blackouts, Space Shuttle Losses, Concorde Crashes, Chernobyl, Three Mile Island and More . . . How Events and Disasters Evolve in a Phased Development: The Human Element Our Values at Risk: The Probable Improvement Probably or Improbably Not How this Book is Organised References Technical Summary Defi ning the Past Probability Predicting Future Risk: Sampling from the Jar of Life A Possible Future: Defi ning the Posterior Probability The Engineers Have an Answer: Reliability Drawing from the Jar of Life: The Hazard Function and Species Extinction Experiencing Failure: Engineering and Human Risk and Reliability Experience Space Managing Safely: Creating Order out of Disorder Using Safety Management Systems Describing the Indescribable: Top-Down and Bottom-Up What an Observer will Observe and the Depth of our Experience References 1 The Universal Learning Curve Predicting Tragedies, Accidents and Failures: Using the Learning Hypothesis The Learning Hypothesis: The Market Place of Life Learning in HTSs: The Way a Human Learns Evidence of Risk Reduction by Learning Evidence of Learning from Experience: Case Studies Evidence of Learning in Economics Evidence of Learning in Engineering and Architecture: The Costs of Mistakes Learning in Technology: the Economics of Reducing Costs Evidence of Learning Skill and Risk Reduction in the Medical Profession: Practice Makes Almost Perfect Learning in HTSs: The Recent Data Still Agrees The Equations That Describe the Learning Curve Zero Defects and Reality Predicting Failures: The Human Bathtub Experience Space: The Statistics of Managing Safety and of Observing Accidents Predicting the Future Based on Past Experience: The Prior Ignorance Future Events: the Way Forward Using Learning Probabilities The Wisdom of Experience and Inevitability The Last, First or Rare Event Conclusions and Observations: Predicting Accidents References 2 The Four Echoes Power Blackouts, Space Shuttle Losses, Concorde Crashes, and the Chernobyl and Three Mile Island Accidents The Combination of Events The Problem Is the Human Element The Four Echoes Share the Same Four Phases The First Echo: Blackout of the Power Grid Management’s Role The First Echo: Findings Error State Elimination The Second Echo: Columbia/Challenger The Results of the Inquiry: Prior Knowledge The Second Echo: The Four Phases Management’s Responsibility Error State Elimination The Third Echo: Concorde Tires and SUVs Tire Failures: the Prior Knowledge The Third Echo: The Four Phases Management’s Responsibility Error State Elimination The Fourth Echo: Chernobyl The Chernobyl Accident: An Echo of Three Mile Island The Consequences Echoes of Three Mile Island The Causes Error State Elimination The Fourth Echo: The Four Phases Regulatory Environment and Practices Case study: Regulation in Commercial Aviation a) Regulations Development b) Compliance Standards c) Accident Investigation Addressing Human Error Management Responsibilities Designing to Reduce Risk and the Role of Standards Conclusion and Echoes: Predicting the Unpredictable References 3 Predicting Rocket Risks and Refi nery Explosions: Near Misses, Shuttles, Safety and Anti-Missile Defence Systems Effectiveness Learning from Near Misses and Prior Knowledge Problems in Quantifying Risk: Predicting the Risk for the Next Shuttle Mission Estimating a Possible Range of Likelihoods Learning from Experience: Maturity Models for Future Space Mission Risk Technology versus Technology Missiles Risks over London: The German Doodlebug Launching Missile Risk The Number of Tests Required Estimating the Risk of a Successful Attack and How Many Missiles We Must Fire Uncertainty in the Risk of Failing to Intercept What Risk Is There of a Missile Getting Through: Missing the Missile Predicting the Risk of Industrial Accidents: The Texas City Refinery Explosion From Lagging to Leading: Safety Analysis and Safety Culture Missing Near Misses What these Risk Estimates Tell Us: The Common Sense Echo References 4 The Probability of Human Error: Learning in Technological Systems What We Must Predict The Probability Linked to the Rate of Errors The Defi nition of Risk Exposure and the Level of Attainable Perfection Comparison to Conventional Social Science and Engineering Failure and Outcome Rate Formulations The Learning Probabilities and the PDFs The Initial Failure Rate and its Variation with Experience The ‘Best’ MERE Risk Values Maximum and Minimum Likely Outcome Rates Standard Engineering Reliability Models Compared to the MERE Result Future Event Estimates: The Past Predicts the Future Statistical Bayesian-Type Estimates: The Impact of Learning Maximum and Minimum Likelihood Comparison to Data: The Probability of Failure and Human Error Comparison of the MERE Result to Human Reliability Analysis Implications for Generalised Risk Prediction Conclusions: The Probable Human Risk References 5 Eliminating Mistakes: The Concept of Error States A General Accident Theory: Error States and Safety Management The Physics of Errors The Learning Hypothesis and the General Accident Theory Observing Outcomes A Homage to Boltzmann: Information from the Grave The Concept of Depth of Experience and the Theory of Error States The Fundamental Postulates of Error State Theory The Information in Error States: Establishing the Risk Distribution The Exponential Distribution of Outcomes, Risk and Error States The Total Number of Outcomes The Observed Rate and the Minimum Number of Outcomes Accumulated Experience Measures and Learning Rates The Average Rate Analogy and Predictions: Statistical Error Theory and Learning Model Equivalence The Infl uence of Safety Management and Regulations: Imposing Order on Disorder The Risk of Losing a Ship Distribution Functions The Most Probable and Minimum Error Rate Learning Rates and Experience Intervals: The Universal Learning Curve Reducing the Risk of a Fatal Aircraft Accident: the Infl uence of Skill and Experience Conclusions: A New Approach References 6 Risk Assessment: Dynamic Events and Financial Risks Future Loss Rate Prediction: Ships and Tsunamis Predicted Insurance Rates for Shipping Losses: Historical Losses The Premium Equations Financial Risk: Dynamic Loss and Premium Investments Numerical Example Overall Estimates of Shipping Loss Fraction and Insurance Inspections The Loss Ratio: Deriving the Industrial Damage Curves Making Investment Decisions: Information Drawing from the Jar of Life Information Entropy and Minimum Risk Progress and Learning in Manufacturing Innovation in Technology for the Least Product Price and Cost: Reductions During Technological Learning Cost Reduction in Manufacturing and Production: Empirical Elasticity ‘Power Laws’ and Learning Rates A New General Formulation for Unit Cost Reduction in Competitive Markets: the Minimum Cost According to a Black-Scholes Formulation Universal Learning Curve: Comparison to the Usual Economic Power Laws The Learning Rate b-Value ‘Elasticity’ Exponent Evaluated Equivalent Average Total Cost b-Value Elasticity Profi t Optimisation to Exceed Development Cost The Data Validate the Learning Theory a) Aircraft Manufacturing Costs Estimate Case b) Photovoltaic Case c) Air Conditioners Case d) Ethanol Prices Case e) Windpower Case f) Gas Turbine Power Case g) The Progress Curve for Manufacturing Non-Dimensional UPC and Market Share Conclusions: Learning to Improve and Turning Risks into Profits References 7 Safety and Risk Management Systems: the Fifth Echoes Safety Management Systems: Creating Order Out of Disorder Workplace Safety: The Four Rights, Four Wrongs and Four Musts Acceptable Risk: Designing for Failure and Managing for Success Managing and Risk Matrices Organisational Factors and Learning A Practical ‘Safety Culture’ Example: The Fifth Echo Safety Culture and Safety Surveys: The Learning Paradox Never Happening Again: Perfect Learning Half a World Apart: Copying the Same Factors Using a Bucket: Errors in Mixing at the JCO Plant Using a Bucket: Errors in Mixing at the Kean Canyon Explosives Plant The Prediction and Management of Major Hazards: Learning from SMS Failures Learning Environments and Safety Cultures: The Desiderata of Desires Safety Performance Measures: Indicators and Balanced Scorecards Safety and Performance Indicators: Measuring the Good Human Error Rates Passing Red Lights, Runway Incursions and Near Misses Risk Informed Regulation and Degrees of Goodness: How Green is Green? Modelling and Predicting Event Rates and Learning Curves Using Accumulated Experience Using the Past to Predict the Future: How Good is Good? Reportable Events Scrams and Unplanned Shutdowns Common Cause Events and Latent Errors Performance Improvement: Case-by-Case Lack of Risk Reduction: Medical Adverse Events and Deaths New Data: Sentinel Events, Deaths and Blood Work Medication Errors in Health Care Organisational Learning and Safety Culture: the ‘H-Factor’ Risk Indicator Data Analysis: A Case Study Meeting the Need to Measure Safety Culture: the Hard and the Soft Elements Creating Order from Disorder References 8 Risk Perception: Searching for the Truth Among all the Numbers Perceptions and Predicting the Future: Risk Acceptance and Risk Avoidance Fear of the Unknown: The Success Journey into What We Do or Do Not Accept A Possible Explanation of Risk Perception: Comparisons of Road and Rail Transport How Do We Judge the Risk? Linking Complexity, Order, Information Entropy and Human Actions Response Times, Learning Data and the Universal Laws of Practice The Number and Distribution of Outcomes: Comparison to Data Risk Perception: Railways Risk Perception: Coal Mining Risk Perception: Nuclear Power in Japan Risk Perception: Rare Events and Risk Rankings Predicting the Future Number of Outcomes A Worked Example: Searching out and Analysing Data for Oil Spills Typical Worksheet Plotting the Data Fitting a Learning Curve Challenging Zero Defects Comparison of Oil Spills to other Industries Predicting the Future: the Probability and Number of Spills Observations on this Oil Spill Case Knowing What We Do Not Know: Fear and Managing the Risk of the Unknown White and Black Paradoxes: Known Knowns and Unknown Unknowns The Probability of the Unknowns: Learning from What We Know The Existence of the Unknown: Failures in High Reliability Systems The Power of Experience: Facing Down the Fear of the Unknown Terrorism, Disasters and Pandemics: Real, Acceptable and Imaginary Risks Estimating Personal Risk of Death: Pandemics and Infectious Diseases Sabotage: Vulnerabilities, Critical Systems and the Reliability of Security Systems What Is the Risk? The Four Quadrants: Implications of Risk for Safety Management Systems References 9 I Must Be Learning Where We Have Come From What We Have Learned What We Have Shown Legal, Professional and Corporate Implications for the Individual Just Give Me the Facts Where We Are Going Reference Nomenclature Appendices: Appendix A: The ‘Human Bathtub’: Predicting the Future Risk The Differential Formulation for the Number of Outcomes The Future Probability Insuffi cient Learning Appendix B: The Most Risk, or Maximum Likelihood, for the Outcome (Failure or Error) Rate while Learning The Most or Least Likely Outcome Rate The Maximum and Minimum Risk: The Two Solutions Low Rates and Rare Events The Limits of Maximum and Minimum Risk: The Two Solutions Common Sense: The Most Risk at the Least Experience and the Least Risk as the First Outcome Decreases with Experience Typical Trends in Our Most Likely Risk The Distribution with Depth of Experience References Appendix C: Transcripts of the Four Echoes Power Blackout, Columbia Space Shuttle loss, Concorde Crash and Chernobyl Accident The Combination of Events The Four Echoes Share the Same Four Phases Appendix. Blackout Chronology and the Dialog from Midday 14 August 2003 The Second Echo: Columbia/Challenger Appendix: Shuttle Dialog and Transcripts The Third Echo: Concorde Tires and SUVs Appendix: Dialog for the Concorde Crash The Fourth Echo: TMI/Chernobyl Appendix: Chronology and Transcripts of the Chernobyl Reactor Unit 4 Accident Conclusion and Echoes: Predicting the Unpredictable Appendix D: The Four Phases: Fuel Leak Leading to Gliding a Jet in to Land without any Engine Power The Bare Facts and the Sequence The Four Phases Flight Crew Actions Initial Recognition of the Fuel Loss Crew Reaction to the Fuel Imbalance Advisory (05:33–05:45) Crew Reaction to the Continued Fuel Loss (05:45–06:10) Crew Reaction to the (Two) Engine Failures References Appendix E: The Four Phases of a Midair Collision The Bare Facts The Four Phases References Appendix F: Risk From the Number of Outcomes We Observe: How Many Are There? The Number of Outcomes: The Hypergeometric Distribution Few Outcomes and many Non-Outcomes: The Binomial and Poisson Distributions The Number of Outcomes: In the Limit The Perfect Learning Limit: Learning from Non-Outcomes The Relative Change in Risk When Operating Multiple Sites References Appendix G: Mixing in a Tank: The D.D. Williamson Vessel Explosion Errors in Mixing in a Tank at the Caramel Factory: The Facts The Prior Knowledge Another Echo References Appendix H: Never Happening Again The Risk of an Echo, or of a Repeat Event The Matching Probability for an Echo The Impact of Learning and Experience on Managing the Risk of Repeat Events The Theory of Evidence: Belief and Risk Equivalence References Appendix I: A Heuristic Organisational Risk Stability Criterion Order and Disorder in Physical and Management Systems Stability Criterion References Appendix J: New Laws of Practice for Learning and Error Correction Individual Learning and Practice Comparison to Error Reduction Data Comparison to Response Time Data and the Consistent Law of Practice Reconciling the Laws Conclusions References Appendix K: Predicting Rocket Launch Reliability – Case Study Summary Theory of Rocket Reliability a) Unknown Total Number of Launches and Failures b) Known Total Number of Launches and Failures Results Measures of Experience Comparsion to World Data Predicting the Probability of Failure Statistical Estimates of the Failure Probability for the Very ‘next’ launch Independent Validation of the MERE Launch Failure Curve Observations References Illustrations Pipeline Spill and Fire Train Crash Due to SPAD Space Shuttle Columbia Chemical Explosion Bayes, Laplace and Bernouli Kean Canyon Explosion Boltzmann’s Grave Quebec Overpass Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisPower Electronics and Energy Conversion Systems is a definitive five-volume reference spanning classical theory through practical applications and consolidating the latest advancements in energy conversion technology. Comprehensive yet highly accessible, each volume is organised in a basic-to-sophisticated crescendo, providing a single-source reference for undergraduate and graduate students, researchers and designers. Volume 1 Fundamentals and Hard-switching Converters introduces the key challenges in power electronics from basic components to operation principles and presents classical hard- and soft-switching DC to DC converters, rectifiers and inverters. At a more advanced level, it provides comprehensive analysis of DC and AC models comparing the available approaches for their derivation and results. A full treatment of DC to DC hard-switching converters is given, from fundamentals to modern industrial solutions and practical engineering insight. The author Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Why Energy Conversion Electronics Circuits? 1 1.1.1 Applications in the Information and Telecommunication Industry 2 1.1.2 Applications in Renewable Energy Conversion 4 1.1.3 Future Energy Conversion – Fuel Cells 6 1.1.4 Electric Vehicles 6 1.1.5 Applications in Electronic Display Devices 8 1.1.6 Audio Amplifiers 9 1.1.7 Applications in Portable Electronic Devices 9 1.1.8 Applications in High Voltage Physics Experiments and Atomic Accelerators 10 1.1.9 Lighting Technology 11 1.1.10 Aerospace Applications 11 1.1.11 Power System Conditioning 12 1.1.12 Energy Recycling in Manufacturing Industry 12 1.1.13 Applications in Space Exploration 12 1.1.14 Defense Applications 14 1.1.15 Drives and High-Power Industrial Applications 15 1.1.16 Classification of Power Electronic Circuits 15 1.2 Basic Principles of Operation of a Power Electronics Circuit 17 1.3 Basic Components of the Power Circuit: Power Semiconductor Switches and Passive Reactive Elements 28 1.3.1 Uncontrollable Switches – Power Diodes 28 1.3.2 Semicontrollable Switches (Thyristors) 32 1.3.3 Controllable Switches 35 1.3.4 Gallium Nitride (GaN) Switch Technology 51 1.3.5 Energy Losses Associated with Power Switches 52 1.3.6 Passive Reactive Elements 65 1.3.7 Ultracapacitors 80 1.4 Basic Steady-State Analysis of Duty Cycle Controlled Converters with Constant Switching Frequency 81 1.4.1 Input-to-Output Voltage Ratio for Basic DC-DC Converters 81 1.4.2 Continuous and Discontinuous Conduction Operation Modes 85 1.4.3 Design of the Elements of the Basic Converters 85 1.4.4 Controller for Duty Cycle Control (PWM) 88 1.4.5 Conversion Efficiency, Hard-switching and Soft-switching 92 1.5 Introduction to Switched-Capacitor (SC) Converters 96 1.6 Frequency-Controlled Converters 101 1.6.1 Resonant Converters 101 1.6.2 Quasi-Resonant Converters (QRC) 110 1.7 Overview on AC-DC Rectifiers and DC-AC Inverters 119 1.7.1 Rectifiers 119 1.7.2 Inverters 132 1.8 Case Studies 140 1.8.1 Case Study 1 140 1.8.2 Case Study 2 146 1.8.3 Case Study 3 150 1.9 Highlights of the Chapter 154 Problems 155 Bibliography 157 2 Modeling DC-DC Converters 161 2.1 What is the Purpose of Modeling the Power Stage? 162 2.2 Average State-Space Equations, Small-Ripple Approximation (Time-Linearization) 164 2.3 DC Voltage Gain and AC Small-Signal Open-Loop Transfer Functions Based on Average State-Space Equations for Converters Operating in Continuous Conduction Mode 169 2.3.1 DC Voltage Gain and AC Open-Loop Line-to-Load Voltage Transfer Function 169 2.3.2 Duty Cycle-to-Output Voltage AC Transfer Function. Small-Signal Approximation 171 2.3.3 DC Gain and AC Small-Signal Open-Loop Transfer Functions of the Boost, Buck and Buck-Boost Converters Operating in CCM 173 2.3.4* Graphical Averaged Models of the Boost, Buck and Buck-Boost Converters Operating in CCM 191 2.3.5* Canonical Graphical Averaged Models of DC-DC Converters Operating in CCM 211 2.4 DC Voltage Gain and AC Small-Signal Open-Loop Transfer Functions Based on Average State-Space Equations for Converters Operating in Discontinuous Conduction Mode 217 2.4.1 Reduced-Order Averaged Models 217 2.4.2* Full-Order Averaged Models 237 2.5* Average PWM Switch Model 253 2.5.1 Average PWM Switch Model for Converters Operating in Continuous Conduction Mode 253 2.5.2 Average PWM Switch Model for Converters Operating in Discontinuous Conduction Mode 263 2.6 Average Model of the Switches Resistances and Diode Forward Voltage. Average Model of the PWM 288 2.6.1 Average Model of the Switches DC Resistances and Diode Forward Voltage 288 2.6.2 Average Model of the PWM 291 2.7* Average Resonant Switch Model for the DC and Small-Signal Analysis of QRC Converters 292 2.7.1 Average Model of the Zero-Current (ZC) Resonant Switch 293 2.7.2 Average Model of the Zero-Voltage (ZV) Resonant Switch 300 2.7.3 DC Analysis and Open-Loop Small-Signal Transfer Functions of ZCS Quasi-Resonant Converters 305 2.7.4 DC Analysis and Open-Loop Small-Signal Transfer Functions of ZVS Quasi-Resonant Converters 325 2.8 Simulation and Computer-Aided Design of Power Electronics Circuits 339 2.9 Case Study 355 2.10 Highlights of the Chapter 362 Problems 365 Bibliography 368 3 Classical DC-DC PWM Hard-switching Converters 369 3.1 Buck DC-DC PWM Hard-switching Converter 369 3.1.1 Influence of the DC Resistance of the Inductor 369 3.1.2 Boundary Control 375 3.1.3 Calculation of Losses in a Buck Converter Operating in CCM by Considering the Inductor Current Ripple and the ESR of the Capacitor 377 3.1.4 Design of a Buck Converter in CCM Operation 382 3.1.5 Buck Converter with Input Filter 386 3.1.6 Review of the Steady-State Analysis of the Buck Converter in DCM Operation 390 3.1.7 Design of a Buck Converter in DCM Operation 395 3.1.8* Aspects of Dynamic Response of Buck Converter 399 3.2 Boost DC-DC PWM Hard-switching Converter 402 3.2.1 Boost Converter in Steady-State CCM Operation 402 3.2.2 Boost Converter in Steady-State DCM Operation 410 3.2.3* Aspects of Dynamic Response of Boost Converter 417 3.3 Buck-Boost DC-DC PWM Hard-switching Converter 420 3.3.1 Buck-Boost Converter in Steady-State CCM Operation 421 3.3.2 Buck-Boost Converter in Steady-State DCM Operation 429 3.3.3* Aspects of Dynamic Response of Buck-Boost Converter 437 3.4 Cuk (Boost-Buck) PWM Hard-switching Converter 437 3.4.1 Derivation and Switching Operation of the Cuk Converter 438 3.4.2 Steady-State Analysis of Cuk Converter in CCM Operation and its Design 438 3.4.3* DC Voltage Gain and AC Small-Signal Characteristics of theCuk Converter in the Presence of Parasitic Resistances 447 3.4.4 Design Example and Commercially Available Cuk Converters 455 3.4.5* Discontinuous Conduction Mode for the Cuk Converter 456 3.4.6* Cuk Converter with Coupled Inductor 468 3.5 SEPIC PWM Hard-switching Converter 470 3.5.1 SEPIC Converter in CCM Operation 471 3.5.2 Steady-State Analysis of SEPIC Converter in CCM Operation 473 3.5.3* Small-Signal Analysis of the SEPIC Converter in CCM Operation 479 3.5.4 Commercially Available SEPIC Converters: Case Studies 483 3.5.5* SEPIC Converter in DCM Operation 489 3.5.6* AC Analysis of SEPIC Converter in DICM 500 3.5.7* Isolated SEPIC Converter 503 3.6 Zeta (Inverse SEPIC) PWM Hard-switching Converter 503 3.6.1 Zeta Converter in CCM Operation 504 3.6.2 Steady-State Analysis of a Zeta Converter in CCM Operation 505 3.6.3* Small-Signal Analysis of the Zeta Converter in CCM Operation 514 3.6.4 Design Example and Case Study 515 3.6.5* Zeta Converter in DCM Operation 520 3.6.6* Isolated Zeta Converter 529 3.7 Forward Converter 530 3.7.1 The Role of a High-Frequency Transformer in the Structure of DC-DC Converters 530 3.7.2 Derivation of Forward Converter 531 3.7.3 Operation of Forward Converter in CCM 534 3.7.4 Operation of a Forward Converter in DCM and Design Considerations for CCM and DCM 545 3.7.5* Multiple-Output Forward Converter 551 3.7.6* Other Core Reset Strategies 551 3.7.7 Examples of Practical Designs: Case Studies 564 3.8* Isolated Cuk Converter 568 3.9 Flyback Converter 574 3.9.1 Derivation of the Flyback Converter 574 3.9.2 Operation of Flyback Converter in CCM and DCM 577 3.9.3 Effects of the Coupled Inductor Leakage Inductance 587 3.9.4* Small-Signal Model of the Flyback Converter 598 3.9.5 Designs of the Flyback Converter: Case Studies – Practical Considerations 600 3.10 Push–Pull Converter 607 3.10.1 Push–Pull Converter of Buck Type (Voltage Driven) 607 3.10.2 CCM Operation of the Push–Pull Converter 608 3.10.3 Non-Idealities in the Push–Pull Converter 616 3.10.4 DCM Operation 619 3.10.5* Push–Pull Converter of the Boost Type (Current Driven) 625 3.10.6 Design Example 631 3.11 Half-Bridge Converter 634 3.11.1 The Buck-Type Half-Bridge Topology 634 3.11.2 CCM Operation 636 3.11.3 Input-to-Output Voltage Conversion Ratio and Design of a Half-Bridge Converter in CCM Operation 645 3.11.4 Practical Aspects 647 3.11.5 DCM Operation 648 3.11.6* Current-Driven Half-Bridge Converter 652 3.12 Full-Bridge Converter 657 3.12.1 Full-Bridge Topology 657 3.12.2 CCM Operation of the Buck-Type Full-Bridge Converter 660 3.12.3 Input-to-Output Voltage Conversion Ratio and Design of a Buck-Type Full-Bridge Converter in CCM Operation 672 3.12.4 Practical Aspects 676 3.12.5* Other Transistor Control Schemes: Phase-Shift Control 676 3.12.6* Current-Driven Full-Bridge Converter 680 3.13 Highlights of the Chapter 687 Problems 696 Bibliography 702 4 Derived Structures of DC-DC Converters 705 4.1 Current Doubler Rectifier (CDR) for Push–Pull, Half-Bridge and Full-Bridge Converters 705 4.1.1 Cyclical Operation of Current Doubler Rectifier 706 4.1.2 Voltage Conversion Ratio of Converters with CDR 711 4.1.3 Ripple Cancellation in the Output Current 711 4.1.4* Other Structures of CDR 713 4.1.5 Penalties of CDR 719 4.1.6* Current Tripler and Current Multiplier 719 4.2 Voltage Doubler and Voltage Multiplier Rectifier 721 4.2.1 Full-Wave Bridge Voltage Doubler 721 4.2.2 Greinacher Multiplier 723 4.2.3 Voltage Tripler and General Cockcroft–Walton Multiplier 727 4.2.4* Voltage Doubler with One Capacitor 729 4.2.5 Fibonacci Voltage Multiplier 730 4.2.6 Voltage Dividers 735 4.2.7* “Economy” Power Supply and the 48 Power Supply 736 4.3 Quadratic Converters 742 4.3.1 Quadratic Buck Converters 743 4.3.2* Buck-Boost Quadratic Converters (D<0.5) 746 4.4* Two-Switch Buck-Boost Converter 748 4.4.1 Buck-Boost Converters Obtained by Interleaving a Boost and a Buck Switching Cell 749 4.4.2 Z-Source Buck-Boost Converter with Positive Output Voltage 753 4.5* Switched-Capacitor/Switched-Inductor Integrated Basic Converters 757 4.5.1 Family of Converters Based on Switched-Capacitor/Switched-Inductor Structures 757 4.5.2 KY Converter 776 4.5.3 Watkins–Johnson Converter 782 4.6* The Sheppard–Taylor Converter 783 4.6.1 CCM Operation 783 4.6.2 Discontinuous Conduction Mode Operation 785 4.6.3 Isolated Sheppard–Taylor Converter 791 4.7* Converters with Low Voltage Stress on the Active Switches 793 4.7.1 Four-Switch Full-Bridge-Type Converter with Vin/2 Primary-Side Switches Voltage Stress 794 4.7.2 Converter with Vin/3 Voltage Stress on the Primary-Side Switches 797 4.7.3 Three-Level Boost Converter 797 4.8* Tapped Inductor-Based Converters 805 4.8.1 Tapped Inductor Buck Converter and VRMs (Voltage Regulator Module) 805 4.8.2 Tapped Inductor Boost Converter 812 4.9* Current-Driven Dual-Bridge Converter with Center-Tapped Inductor 812 4.10 Highlights of the Chapter 824 Problems 829 Bibliography 830 Index 833

Read more less

Book SynopsisADVANCED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTERNET THIRD EDITION ADVANCED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTERNET Future Evolving Technologies The new edition of Advanced Wireless Communications: 4G Cognitive and Cooperative Broadband Technology, 2nd Edition, including the latest developments In the evolution of wireless communications, the dominant challenges are in the areas of networking and their integration with the Future Internet. Even the classical concept of cellular networks is changing and new technologies are evolving to replace it. To reflect these new trends, Advanced Wireless Communications & INTERNET builds upon the previous volumes, enhancing the existing chapters, and including a number of new topics. Systematically guiding readers from the fundamentals through to advanced areas, each chapter begins with an introductory explanation of the basic problems and solutions followed with an analytical treatment in greateTable of ContentsPreface to the Third Edition xix 1 Fundamentals 1 1.1 4G and the Book Layout 1 1.2 General Structure of 4G Signals 5 1.3 Next Generation Internet 16 1.4 Cloud Computing and Network Virtualization 18 1.5 Economics of Utility Computing 20 1.6 Drawbacks of Cloud Computing 22 1.7 Wireless Grids and Clouds 24 References 30 2 Adaptive Coding 35 2.1 Adaptive and Reconfigurable Block Coding 35 2.2 Adaptive and Reconfigurable Convolutional Codes 40 2.3 Concatenated Codes with Interleavers 51 2.4 Adaptive Coding, Practice and Prospects 57 2.5 Distributed Source Coding 59 Appendix 2.1 Maximum a Posteriori Detection 69 References 71 3 Adaptive and Reconfigurable Modulation 77 3.1 Coded Modulation 77 3.2 Adaptive Coded Modulation for Fading Channels 86 References 89 4 Space–Time Coding 93 4.1 Diversity Gain 93 4.2 Space–Time Coding 98 4.3 Space–Time Block Codes from Orthogonal Designs 112 4.4 Channel Estimation Imperfections 122 4.5 Quasi-Orthogonal Space–Time Block Codes 123 4.6 Space–Time Convolutional Codes 127 4.7 Algebraic Space–Time Codes 128 4.8 Differential Space–Time Modulation 133 4.9 Multiple Transmit Antenna Differential Detection from Generalized Orthogonal Designs 142 4.10 Layered Space–Time Coding 148 4.11 Concatenated Space–Time Block Coding 157 4.12 Estimation of MIMO Channel 165 4.13 Space–Time Codes for Frequency Selective Channels 168 4.14 Optimization of a MIMO System 174 4.15 MIMO Systems with Constellation Rotation 182 4.16 Diagonal Algebraic Space–Time Block Codes 187 Appendix 4.1 QR Factorization 192 Appendix 4.2 Lattice Code Decoder for Space–Time Codes 194 Appendix 4.3 MIMO Channel Capacity 195 References 200 5 Multiuser Communication 209 5.1 Pseudorandom Sequences 209 5.2 Multiuser CDMA Receivers 220 5.3 Minimum Mean Square Error (MMSE) Linear Multiuser Detection 237 5.4 Single User LMMSE Receivers for Frequency Selective Fading Channels 246 5.5 Signal Subspace-Based Channel Estimation for CDMA Systems 253 5.6 Iterative Receivers for Layered Space–Time Coding 259 Appendix 5.1 Linear and Matrix Algebra 277 References 283 6 Channel Estimation and Equalization 291 6.1 Equalization in the Digital Data Transmission System 291 6.2 LMS Equalizer 297 6.3 Detection for a Statistically Known, Time Varying Channel 301 6.4 LMS-Adaptive MLSE Equalization on Multipath Fading Channels 306 6.5 Adaptive Channel Identification and Data Demodulation 311 6.6 Turbo Equalization 324 6.7 Kalman Filter Based Joint Channel Estimation and Data Detection Over Fading Channels 330 6.8 Equalization Using Higher Order Signal Statistics 335 References 345 7 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing – OFDM and Multicarrier CDMA 351 7.1 Timing and Frequency Offset in OFDM 351 7.2 Fading Channel Estimation for OFDM Systems 357 7.3 64 DAPSK and 64 QAM Modulated OFDM Signals 363 7.4 Space–Time Coding with OFDM Signals 367 7.5 Layered Space–Time Coding for MIMO OFDM 375 7.6 Space–Time Coded TDMA/OFDM Reconfiguration Efficiency 379 7.7 Multicarrier CDMA System 392 7.8 Multicarrier DS-CDMA Broadcast Systems 396 7.9 Frame By Frame Adaptive Rate Coded Multicarrier DS-CDMA System 399 7.10 Intermodulation Interference Suppression in Multicarrier CDMA Systems 405 7.11 Successive Interference Cancellation in Multicarrier DS-CDMA Systems 409 7.12 MMSE Detection of Multicarrier CDMA 413 7.13 Approximation of Optimum Multiuser Receiver for Space–Time Coded Multicarrier CDMA Systems 419 7.14 Parallel Interference Cancellation in OFDM Systems in Time-Varying Multipath Fading Channels 430 7.15 Zero Forcing OFDM Equalizer in Time-Varying Multipath Fading Channels 437 7.16 Channel Estimation for OFDM Systems Using Multiple Receive Antennas 442 7.17 Turbo Processing for an OFDM-Based MIMO System 445 7.18 PAPR Reduction of OFDM Signals 447 Appendix 7.1 451 References 452 8 UltraWide Band Radio 459 8.1 UWB Multiple Access in a Gaussian Channel 459 8.2 The UWB Channel 462 8.3 UWB System with M-ary Modulation 468 8.4 M-ary PPM UWB Multiple Access 476 8.5 Coded UWB Schemes 483 8.6 Multiuser Detection in UWB Radio 486 8.7 UWB with Space–Time Processing 487 8.8 Beamforming for UWB Radio 492 References 519 9 Linear Precoding for MIMO Channels 523 9.1 Space–Time Precoders and Equalizers for MIMO Channels 523 9.2 Linear Precoding Based on Convex Optimization Theory 530 9.3 Convex Optimization-Theory-Based Beamforming 540 References 561 10 Cognitive Networks 565 10.1 Optimal Channel Sensing in Cognitive Wireless Networks 565 10.2 Optimal Sequential Channel Sensing 568 10.3 Optimal Parallel Multiband Channel Sensing 569 10.4 Collaborative Spectrum Sensing 573 10.5 Multichannel Cognitive MAC 578 References 583 11 Relay-AssistedWireless Networks 585A. Agustin, J. Vidal,O.Muñoz, and S. Glisic 11.1 Introduction 585 11.2 Background and Related Work 586 11.3 Cooperative Communications 593 11.4 Relay-Assisted Communications 616 11.5 Two-Way Relay-Assisted Communications 646 11.6 Relay-Assisted Communications With Reuse of Resources 651 Appendices 668 12 Biologically Inspired Paradigms inWireless Networks 683 12.1 Biologically Inspired Model for Securing Hybrid Mobile Ad Hoc Networks 683 12.2 Biologically Inspired Routing in Ad Hoc Networks 687 12.3 Analytical Modeling of AntNet as Adaptive Mobile Agent Based Routing 691 12.4 Biologically Inspired Algorithm for Optimum Multicasting 697 12.5 Biologically Inspired (BI) Distributed Topology Control 703 12.6 Optimization of Mobile Agent Routing in Sensor Networks 708 12.7 Epidemic Routing 710 12.8 Nano-Networks 715 12.9 Genetic Algorithm Based Dynamic Topology Reconfiguration in Cellular Multihop Wireless Networks 718 References 739 13 Positioning in Wireless Networks 743 13.1 Mobile Station Location in Cellular Networks 743 13.2 Relative Positioning in Wireless Sensor Networks 753 13.3 Average Performance of Circular and Hyperbolic Geolocation 762 References 771 14 Wireless Networks Connectivity 773 14.1 Survivable Wireless Networks Design 773 14.2 Survivability of Wireless Ad Hoc Networks 776 14.3 Network Dimensioning 777 14.4 Survivable Network Under General Traffic 785 14.5 Stochastic Geometry and Random Graphs Theory 791 References 798 15 Advanced Routing and Network Coding 801 15.1 Conventional Routing Versus Network Coding 801 15.2 A Max-Flow Min-Cut Theorem 803 15.3 Algebraic Formulation of Network Coding 807 15.4 Random Network Coding 811 15.5 Gossip Based Protocol and Network Coding 813 15.6 Network Coding With Reduced Complexity 816 15.7 Multisource Multicast Network Switching 820 15.8 Optimization of Wireless Multicast Ad-Hoc Networks 831 15.9 Optimization of Multicast Wireless Ad-Hoc Network Using Soft Graph Coloring and Non-Linear Cubic Games 843 15.10 Joint Optimization of Routing and Medium Contention in Multihop Multicast Wireless Network 855 15.11 Routing and Network Stability 861 15.12 Lagrangian Decomposition of the Multicomodity Flow Optimization Problem 867 15.13 Flow Optimization in Heterogeneous Networks 868 15.14 Dynamic Resource Allocation in Computing Clouds 879 16 Network Formation Games 887 16.1 General Model of Network Formation Games 887 16.2 Knowledge Based Network Formation Games 893 16.3 Coalition Games in Wireless Ad Hoc Networks 897 16.4 HD Game Based TCP Selection 912 16.4.1 Evolutionary Stable Strategy 914 16.4.2 TCP Protocol Competition in Wireless Networks 918 References 919 Index 923

Read more less

Book SynopsisBased on deep theoretical as well as practical experience in Reliability and Quality Sciences, Robust Design Methodology for Reliability constructively addresses practical reliability problems. It offers a comprehensive design theory for reliability, utilizing robust design methodology and six sigma frameworks. In particular, the relation between un-reliability and variation and uncertainty is explored and reliability improvement measures in early product development stages are suggested. Many companies today utilise design for Six Sigma (DfSS) for strategic improvement of the design process, but often without explicitly describing the reliability perspective; this book explains how reliability design can relate to and work with DfSS and illustrates this with realworld problems. The contributors advocate designing for robustness, i.e. insensitivity to variation in the early stages of product design development. Methods for rational treatment of uncertainties in model assumptTable of ContentsPreface Acknowledgements About the Editors Contributors PART One METHODOLOGY 1 Introduction Bo Bergman and Martin Arvidsson 1.1 Background 1.2 Failure Mode Avoidance 1.3 Robust Design 1.4 Comments and Suggestions for Further Reading References 2 Evolution of Reliability Thinking – Countermeasures for Some Technical Issues Åke Lönnqvist 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Method 2.3 An Overview of the Initial Development of Reliability Engineering 2.4 Examples of Technical Issues and Reliability Countermeasures 2.5 Discussion and Future Research 2.6 Summary and Conclusions References 3 Principles of Robust Design Methodology Martin Arvidsson and Ida Gremyr 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Method 3.3 Results and Analysis 3.4 Discussion 3.5 Conclusions References PART Two METHODS 4 Including Noise Factors in Design Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (D-FMEA) – A Case Study at Volvo Car Corporation Åke Lönnqvist 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Background 4.3 Method 4.4 Result 4.5 Discussion and Further Research 4.6 Summary References 5 Robust Product Development Using Variation Mode and Effect Analysis Alexander Chakhunashvili, Stefano Barone, Per Johansson and Bo Bergman 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Overview of the VMEA Method 5.3 The Basic VMEA 5.4 The Enhanced VMEA 5.5 The Probabilistic VMEA 5.6 An Illustrative Example 5.7 Discussion and Concluding Remarks Appendix: Formal Justification of the VMEA Method References 6 Variation Mode and Effect Analysis: An Application to Fatigue Life Prediction Pär Johannesson, Thomas Svensson, Leif Samuelsson, Bo Bergman and Jacques de Maré 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Scatter and Uncertainty 6.3 A Simple Approach to Probabilistic VMEA 6.4 Estimation of Prediction Uncertainty 6.5 Reliability Assessment 6.6 Updating the Reliability Calculation 6.7 Conclusions and Discussion References 7 Predictive Safety Index for Variable Amplitude Fatigue Life Thomas Svensson, Jacques de Maré and Pär Johannesson 7.1 Introduction 7.2 The Load–Strength Reliability Method 7.3 The Equivalent Load and Strength Variables 7.4 Reliability Indices 7.5 The Gauss Approximation Formula 7.6 The Uncertainty Due to the Estimated Exponent β 7.7 The Uncertainty Measure of Strength 7.8 The Uncertainty Measure of Load 7.9 The Predictive Safety Index 7.10 Discussion Appendix References 8 Monte Carlo Simulation versus Sensitivity Analysis Sara Lorén, Pär Johannesson and Jacques de Mar´e 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Transfer Function 8.3 Example from an Industrial Context 8.4 Highly Nonlinear Transfer Function 8.5 Total Variation for Logarithmic Life 8.6 Conclusions References PART Three MODELLING 9 Model Complexity Versus Scatter in Fatigue Thomas Svensson 9.1 Introduction 9.2 A Statistical Model 9.3 Design Concepts 9.4 A Crack Growth Model 9.5 Partly Measurable Variables 9.6 Conclusions References 10 Choice of Complexity in Constitutive Modelling of Fatigue Mechanisms Erland Johnson and Thomas Svensson 10.1 Background 10.2 Questions 10.3 Method 10.4 Empirical Modelling 10.5 A Polynomial Example 10.6 A General Linear Formulation 10.7 A Fatigue Example References 11 Interpretation of Dispersion Effects in a Robust Design Context Martin Arvidsson, Ida Gremyr and Bo Bergman 11.1 Introduction 11.2 Dispersion Effects 11.3 Discussion References 12 Fatigue Damage Uncertainty Anders Bengtsson, Klas Bogsjöand Igor Rychlik 12.1 Introduction 12.2 Fatigue Review 12.3 Probability for Fatigue Failure – Safety Index 12.4 Computation of E [D(T )|k] and V [D(T )|k] 12.5 Non Gaussian Loads – Examples References 13 Widening the Perspectives Bo Bergman and Jacques de Maré 13.1 Background 13.2 Additional Engineering Perspectives on Reliability 13.3 Organizational Perspectives on Reliability 13.4 Industrialization of Robust Design Methodology 13.5 Adoptions of Fatigue Reliability Methodology 13.6 Learning for the Future References List of Abbreviations Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive review of analytical signal processing techniques applied to power systems and power quality applications. This reference book is unique in addressing time-varying waveform and harmonic distortions. It details many different approaches, pooling cutting edge material from university lecturers and practising power engineers to provide a wide spectrum of expertise. Divided into clear sections, the book discusses a range of topics including current and voltage variations; standards and measurement issues; advanced techniques such as spectral, time-frequency, probabilistic; and further methods, such as independent component analysis, and fuzzy logic. Case studies, real world data and examples (including basic application examples and sample waves from industrial sites) supplement the theory and demonstrate the methods shown. With extensive appendices in addition, this book is of great value to power syTable of ContentsContributors xi Preface xiii Website Information xvii Acknowledgments xix Part I General Concepts and Definitions 1 1 Probabilistic aspects of time-varying harmonics 3 R. E. Morrison, Y. Baghzouz, P. F. Ribeiro and C. A. Duque 2 Probability distribution and spectral analysis of nonstationary random processes 19 P. F. Ribeiro and C. A. Duque 3 Transients and harmonics 25 T. H. Ortmeyer 4 Electric power definitions under random conditions 29 A. E. Emanuel 5 Visualizing Joseph Fourier's imaginative discovery via FEA 39 P. J. Masson, P. M. Silveira, C. A. Duque and P. F. Ribeiro Part II Current Variations 51 6 Summation of random harmonic currents 53 R. Langella and A. Testa 7 Probabilistic modeling of single high-power loads 73 R. Langella and A. Testa Part III Voltage Variations 93 8 Probabilistic modeling for network analysis 95 P. Caramia, P. Verde, P. Varilone and G. Carpinelli 9 Probabilistic modeling of harmonic impedances 115 R. Langella and A. Testa Part IV Standards and Measurement Issues 129 10 Time-varying and probabilistic considerations: setting limits 131 T. H. Ortmeyer, W. Xu and Y. Baghzouz 11 Probabilistic harmonic indices 137 P. Caramia, G. Carpinelli, A. Russo, P. Verde and P. Varilone 12 Measurement techniques and benchmarking 149 J. Driesen and J. Van den Keybus Part V Applications and Case Studies 159 13 Harmonic summation for multiple arc furnaces 161 J. Wikston 14 Treatment of measured harmonic currents in filters of an HVDC system 167 S. Carneiro Jr and A. C. de Freitas Marotti Part VI Advanced Techniques 173 15 Visualization of time-varying waveform distortions with wavelets 175 P. M. Silveira and P. F. Ribeiro 16 Wavelets for the measurement of electrical power signals 187 J. Driesen 17 Fuzzy logic application for time-varying harmonics 197 B. R. Klingenberg and P. F. Ribeiro 18 Real-time simulation of time-varying harmonics 211 Y. Liu, M. Steurer and P. F. Ribeiro 19 Independent component analysis for harmonic studies 217 E. Gursoy and D. Niebur 20 Enhanced empirical mode decomposition applied to waveform distortions 233 N. Senroy, S. Suryanarayanan and P. F. Ribeiro 21 Harmonic and interharmonic on adjustable speed drives 253 R. Langella and A. Testa 22 Tracking time-varying power harmonic distortions 277 C. A. Duque, P. M. Silveira, T. Baldwin and P. F. Ribeiro 23 Enhanced DFT for time-varying harmonic decomposition 289 P. M. Silveira, C. A. Duque, T. Baldwin and P. F. Ribeiro 24 Enhanced PLL based filter for time-varying harmonic decomposition 303 J. R. Carvalho, C. A. Duque, M. V. Ribeiro, A. S. Cerqueira and P. F. Ribeiro 25 Prony analysis for time-varying harmonics 317 L. Qi, S. Woodruff, L. Qian and D. Cartes Appendix A: Time-varying harmonic currents from large penetration electronic equipment 331 A. Capasso, R. Lamedica and A. Prudenzi Appendix B: Sample of waveforms and decompositions 357 C. A. Duque, M. V. Ribeiro and P. F. Ribeiro Index 367

Read more less

Book SynopsisWIND ENERGY GENERATION WIND ENERGY GENERATIONMODELLING AND CONTROL With increasing concern over climate change and the security of energy supplies, wind power is emerging as an important source of electrical energy throughout the world. Modern wind turbines use advanced power electronics to provide efficient generator control and to ensure compatible operation with the power system. Wind Energy Generation describes the fundamental principles and modelling of the electrical generator and power electronic systems used in large wind turbines. It also discusses how they interact with the power system and the influence of wind turbines on power system operation and stability. Key features: Includes a comprehensive account of power electronic equipment used in wind turbines and for their grid connection. Describes enabling technologies which facilitate the connection of large-scale onshore and offshore wind farms. Provides detaiTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Preface xiii Acronyms and Symbols xv 1 Electricity Generation from Wind Energy 1 1.1 Wind Farms 2 1.2 Wind Energy-generating Systems 3 1.2.1 Wind Turbines 3 1.2.2 Wind Turbine Architectures 7 1.3 Wind Generators Compared with Conventional Power Plant 10 1.3.1 Local Impacts 11 1.3.2 System-wide Impacts 13 1.4 Grid Code Regulations for the Integration of Wind Generation 14 References 17 2 Power Electronics for Wind Turbines 19 2.1 Soft-starter for FSIG Wind Turbines 21 2.2 Voltage Source Converters (VSCs) 21 2.2.1 The Two-level VSC 21 2.2.2 Square-wave Operation 24 2.2.3 Carrier-based PWM (CB-PWM) 25 2.2.4 Switching Frequency Optimal PWM (SFO-PWM) 27 2.2.5 Regular and Non-regular Sampled PWM (RS-PWM and NRS-PWM) 28 2.2.6 Selective Harmonic Elimination PWM (SHEM) 29 2.2.7 Voltage Space Vector Switching (SV-PWM) 30 2.2.8 Hysteresis Switching 33 2.3 Application of VSCs for Variable-speed Systems 33 2.3.1 VSC with a Diode Bridge 34 2.3.2 Back-to-Back VSCs 34 References 36 3 Modelling of Synchronous Generators 39 3.1 Synchronous Generator Construction 39 3.2 The Air-gap Magnetic Field of the Synchronous Generator 39 3.3 Coil Representation of the Synchronous Generator 42 3.4 Generator Equations in the dq Frame 44 3.4.1 Generator Electromagnetic Torque 47 3.5 Steady-state Operation 47 3.6 Synchronous Generator with Damper Windings 49 3.7 Non-reduced Order Model 51 3.8 Reduced-order Model 52 3.9 Control of Large Synchronous Generators 53 3.9.1 Excitation Control 53 3.9.2 Prime Mover Control 55 References 56 4 Fixed-speed Induction Generator (FSIG)-based Wind Turbines 57 4.1 Induction Machine Construction 57 4.1.1 Squirrel-cage Rotor 58 4.1.2 Wound Rotor 58 4.2 Steady-state Characteristics 58 4.2.1 Variations in Generator Terminal Voltage 61 4.3 FSIG Configurations for Wind Generation 61 4.3.1 Two-speed Operation 62 4.3.2 Variable-slip Operation 63 4.3.3 Reactive Power Compensation Equipment 64 4.4 Induction Machine Modelling 64 4.4.1 FSIG Model as a Voltage Behind a Transient Reactance 65 4.5 Dynamic Performance of FSIG Wind Turbines 70 4.5.1 Small Disturbances 70 4.5.2 Performance During Network Faults 73 References 76 5 Doubly Fed Induction Generator (DFIG)-based Wind Turbines 77 5.1 Typical DFIG Configuration 77 5.2 Steady-state Characteristics 77 5.2.1 Active Power Relationships in the Steady State 80 5.2.2 Vector Diagram of Operating Conditions 81 5.3 Control for Optimum Wind Power Extraction 83 5.4 Control Strategies for a DFIG 84 5.4.1 Current-mode Control (PVdq) 84 5.4.2 Rotor Flux Magnitude and Angle Control 89 5.5 Dynamic Performance Assessment 90 5.5.1 Small Disturbances 91 5.5.2 Performance During Network Faults 94 References 96 6 Fully Rated Converter-based (FRC) Wind Turbines 99 6.1 FRC Synchronous Generator-based (FRC-SG) Wind Turbine 100 6.1.1 Direct-driven Wind Turbine Generators 100 6.1.2 Permanent Magnets Versus Electrically Excited Synchronous Generators 101 6.1.3 Permanent Magnet Synchronous Generator 101 6.1.4 Wind Turbine Control and Dynamic Performance Assessment 103 6.2 FRC Induction Generator-based (FRC-IG) Wind Turbine 113 6.2.1 Steady-state Performance 113 6.2.2 Control of the FRC-IG Wind Turbine 114 6.2.3 Performance Characteristics of the FRC-IG Wind Turbine 119 References 119 7 Influence of Rotor Dynamics on Wind Turbine Operation 121 7.1 Blade Bending Dynamics 122 7.2 Derivation of Three-mass Model 123 7.2.1 Example: 300 kW FSIG Wind Turbine 124 7.3 Effective Two-mass Model 126 7.4 Assessment of FSIG and DFIG Wind Turbine Performance 128 Acknowledgement 132 References 132 8 Influence of Wind Farms on Network Dynamic Performance 135 8.1 Dynamic Stability and its Assessment 135 8.2 Dynamic Characteristics of Synchronous Generation 136 8.3 A Synchronizing Power and Damping Power Model of a Synchronous Generator 137 8.4 Influence of Automatic Voltage Regulator on Damping 139 8.5 Influence on Damping of Generator Operating Conditions 141 8.6 Influence of Turbine Governor on Generator Operation 143 8.7 Transient Stability 145 8.8 Voltage Stability 147 8.9 Generic Test Network 149 8.10 Influence of Generation Type on Network Dynamic Stability 150 8.10.1 Generator 2 – Synchronous Generator 151 8.10.2 Generator 2 – FSIG-based Wind Farm 152 8.10.3 Generator 2 – DFIG-based Wind Farm (PVdq Control) 152 8.10.4 Generator 2 – DFIG-based Wind Farm (FMAC Control) 152 8.10.5 Generator 2 – FRC-based Wind Farm 152 8.11 Dynamic Interaction of Wind Farms with the Network 153 8.11.1 FSIG Influence on Network Damping 153 8.11.2 DFIG Influence on Network Damping 158 8.12 Influence of Wind Generation on Network Transient Performance 161 8.12.1 Generator 2 – Synchronous Generator 161 8.12.2 Generator 2 – FSIG Wind Farm 162 8.12.3 Generator 2 – DFIG Wind Farm 163 8.12.4 Generator 2 – FRC Wind Farm 165 References 165 9 Power Systems Stabilizers and Network Damping Capability of Wind Farms 167 9.1 A Power System Stabilizer for a Synchronous Generator 167 9.1.1 Requirements and Function 167 9.1.2 Synchronous Generator PSS and its Performance Contributions 169 9.2 A Power System Stabilizer for a DFIG 172 9.2.1 Requirements and Function 172 9.2.2 DFIG-PSS and its Performance Contributions 178 9.3 A Power System Stabilizer for an FRC Wind Farm 182 9.3.1 Requirements and Functions 182 9.3.2 FRC–PSS and its Performance Contributions 186 References 191 10 The Integration of Wind Farms into the Power System 193 10.1 Reactive Power Compensation 193 10.1.1 Static Var Compensator (SVC) 194 10.1.2 Static Synchronous Compensator (STATCOM) 195 10.1.3 STATCOM and FSIG Stability 197 10.2 HVAC Connections 198 10.3 HVDC Connections 198 10.3.1 LCC–HVDC 200 10.3.2 VSC–HVDC 201 10.3.3 Multi-terminal HVDC 203 10.3.4 HVDC Transmission – Opportunities and Challenges 204 10.4 Example of the Design of a Submarine Network 207 10.4.1 Beatrice Offshore Wind Farm 207 10.4.2 Onshore Grid Connection Points 208 10.4.3 Technical Analysis 210 10.4.4 Cost Analysis 212 10.4.5 Recommended Point of Connection 213 Acknowledgement 214 References 214 11 Wind Turbine Control for System Contingencies 217 11.1 Contribution of Wind Generation to Frequency Regulation 217 11.1.1 Frequency Control 217 11.1.2 Wind Turbine Inertia 218 11.1.3 Fast Primary Response 219 11.1.4 Slow Primary Response 222 11.2 Fault Ride-through (FRT) 228 11.2.1 FSIGs 228 11.2.2 DFIGs 229 11.2.3 FRCs 231 11.2.4 VSC–HVDC with FSIG Wind Farm 233 11.2.5 FRC Wind Turbines Connected Via a VSC–HVDC 234 References 237 Appendix A: State–Space Concepts and Models 241 Appendix B: Introduction to Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 249 Appendix C: Linearization of State Equations 255 Appendix D: Generic Network Model Parameters 259 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisNew edition of highly successful text Includes a number of new chapters while remaining chapters are fully revised and updated New companion website to include Protocols Places special emphasis on services, featuring more detailed descriptions of presence, messaging, group management and push-to-talk over cellular (conferencing).Table of ContentsForeword. Preface. Acknowledgements. List of Figures. List of Tables. PART I IMS ARCHITECTURE AND CONCEPTS. 1 Introduction. 1.1 What is the Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)? 1.2 Fixed and Mobile Convergence. 1.3 Example of IMS Services. 1.4 Where did it come from? 1.5 Why a SIP Solution Based on 3GPP Standards? 2 IP Multimedia Subsystem Architecture. 2.1 Architectural Requirements. 2.2 Description of IMS-related Entities and Functionalities. 2.3 IMS Reference Points. 3 IMS Concepts. 3.1 Overview. 3.2 Registration. 3.3 Mechanism to Register Multiple User Identities at a Go. 3.4 Session Initiation. 3.5 Identification. 3.6 IP Multimedia Services Identity Module (ISIM). 3.7 Sharing a Single User Identity between Multiple Devices. 3.8 Discovering the IMS Entry Point. 3.9 S-CSCF Assignment. 3.10 Mechanism for Controlling Bearer Traffic. 3.11 Charging. 3.12 User Profile. 3.13 Service Provision. 3.14 Connectivity between Traditional CS Users and IMS Users. 3.15 IMS Transit. 3.16 Support for Local Dialling Plans. 3.17 IMS Emergency Sessions. 3.18 SIP Compression. 3.19 Combination of CS and IMS Services – Combinational Services. 3.20 Voice Call Continuity. 3.21 Security Services in the IMS. 3.22 Interworking between IPv4 and IPv6 in the IMS. PART II IMS SERVICES. 4 Presence. 4.1 Who will use the Presence Service? 4.2 Presence-Enhanced Services. 4.3 Presence Contributing to Business. 4.4 What is Presence? 4.5 Presence Service in IMS. 4.6 Publishing Presence. 4.7 Subscribing Presence. 4.8 Watcher Information. 4.9 Setting Presence Authorization. 5 Group Management. 5.1 Group Management’s Contribution to Business. 5.2 What is Group Management? 5.3 What is XML Configuration Access Protocol? 5.4 What is Common Policy? 5.5 Resource List. 5.6 XCAP Usage for Resource Lists. 5.7 Open Mobile Alliance Solution for Group Management. 5.8 Multimedia Telephony and Service Management. 6 Push to Talk Over Cellular. 6.1 PoC Architecture. 6.2 PoC Features. 6.3 User Plane. 6.4 PoC Service Settings. 7 Messaging. 7.1 Overview of IMS Messaging. 7.2 Immediate Messaging. 7.3 Session-Based Messaging. 7.4 Messaging Interworking. 7.5 Instant Messaging by Open Mobile Alliance. 8 Conferencing. 8.1 IMS Conferencing Architecture and Principles. 8.2 IMS Conferencing Procedures. 9 Multimedia Telephony. 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 Multimedia Telephony Communication. 9.3 Supplementary Services. PART III DETAILED PROCEDURES. 10 Introduction to Detailed Procedures. 10.1 The Example Scenario. 10.2 Base Standards. 11 An Example of IMS Registration. 11.1 Overview. 11.2 Initial Parameters and IMS Management Object. 11.3 Signalling PDP Context Establishment. 11.4 P-CSCF Discovery. 11.5 SIP Registration and Registration Routing Aspects. 11.6 Authentication. 11.7 Access Security – IPsec SAs. 11.8 SIP Security Mechanism Agreement. 11.9 IMS Communication Service Identification and other Callee Capabilities. 11.10 Compression Negotiation. 11.11 Access and Location Information. 11.12 Charging-Related Information During Registration. 11.13 User Identities. 11.14 Re-Registration and Re-Authentication. 11.15 De-Registration. 11.16 GPRS-IMS-Bundled Authentication (GIBA). 12 An Example IMS Multimedia Telephony Session. 12.1 Overview. 12.2 Caller and Callee Identities. 12.3 Routing. 12.4 Compression Negotiation. 12.5 Media Negotiation. 12.6 Resource Reservation. 12.7 Charging-Related Procedures During Session Establishment for Sessions. 12.8 Release of a Session. 12.9 Alternative IMS Session Establishment Procedures. 12.10 Routing of GRUUs. 12.11 Routing of PSIs. 12.12 A Short Introduction to GPRS. 13 An example IMS Voice Call Continuity Procedures. 13.1 Overview. 13.2 Configuring the Clients with Communication Continuity Configuration Parameters. 13.3 Setting up the Initial Call and Call Anchoring. 13.4 Domain Transfer: CS to IMS. 13.5 Theresa adds Video to the Call. 13.6 Domain Transfer: IMS to CS. 13.7 Related Standards. References. List of Abbreviations. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisGraphical models are of increasing importance in applied statistics, and in particular in data mining. Providing a self-contained introduction and overview to learning relational, probabilistic, and possibilistic networks from data, this second edition of Graphical Models is thoroughly updated to include the latest research in this burgeoning field, including a new chapter on visualization. The text provides graduate students, and researchers with all the necessary background material, including modelling under uncertainty, decomposition of distributions, graphical representation of distributions, and applications relating to graphical models and problems for further research.Trade Review“The text provides graduate students, and researchers with all the necessary background material, including modelling under uncertainty, decomposition of distributions, graphical representation of distributions, and applications relating to graphical models and problems for further research.” (Zentralblatt Math, 1 August 2013) "All of the necessary background is provided, with material on modeling under uncertainty and imprecision modeling, decomposition of distributions, graphical representation of distributions, applications relating to graphical models, and problems for further research." (Book News, December 2009)Table of ContentsPreface. 1 Introduction. 1.1 Data and Knowledge. 1.2 Knowledge Discovery and Data Mining. 1.3 Graphical Models. 1.4 Outline of this Book. 2 Imprecision and Uncertainty. 2.1 Modeling Inferences. 2.2 Imprecision and Relational Algebra. 2.3 Uncertainty and Probability Theory. 2.4 Possibility Theory and the Context Model. 3 Decomposition. 3.1 Decomposition and Reasoning. 3.2 Relational Decomposition. 3.3 Probabilistic Decomposition. 3.4 Possibilistic Decomposition. 3.5 Possibility versus Probability. 4 Graphical Representation. 4.1 Conditional Independence Graphs. 4.2 Evidence Propagation in Graphs. 5 Computing Projections. 5.1 Databases of Sample Cases. 5.2 Relational and Sum Projections. 5.3 Expectation Maximization. 5.4 Maximum Projections. 6 Naive Classifiers. 6.1 Naive Bayes Classifiers. 6.2 A Naive Possibilistic Classifier. 6.3 Classifier Simplification. 6.4 Experimental Evaluation. 7 Learning Global Structure. 7.1 Principles of Learning Global Structure. 7.2 Evaluation Measures. 7.3 Search Methods. 7.4 Experimental Evaluation. 8 Learning Local Structure. 8.1 Local Network Structure. 8.2 Learning Local Structure. 8.3 Experimental Evaluation. 9 Inductive Causation. 9.1 Correlation and Causation. 9.2 Causal and Probabilistic Structure. 9.3 Faithfulness and Latent Variables. 9.4 The Inductive Causation Algorithm. 9.5 Critique of the Underlying Assumptions. 9.6 Evaluation. 10 Visualization. 10.1 Potentials. 10.2 Association Rules. 11 Applications. 11.1 Diagnosis of Electrical Circuits. 11.2 Application in Telecommunications. 11.3 Application at Volkswagen. 11.4 Application at DaimlerChrysler. A Proofs of Theorems. A.1 Proof of Theorem 4.1.2. A.2 Proof of Theorem 4.1.18. A.3 Proof of Theorem 4.1.20. A.4 Proof of Theorem 4.1.26. A.5 Proof of Theorem 4.1.28. A.6 Proof of Theorem 4.1.30. A.7 Proof of Theorem 4.1.31. A.8 Proof of Theorem 5.4.8. A.9 Proof of Lemma .2.2. A.10 Proof of Lemma .2.4. A.11 Proof of Lemma .2.6. A.12 Proof of Theorem 7.3.1. A.13 Proof of Theorem 7.3.2. A.14 Proof of Theorem 7.3.3. A.15 Proof of Theorem 7.3.5. A.16 Proof of Theorem 7.3.7. B Software Tools. Bibliography. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisElectromagnetic Foundations of Electrical Engineering begins with an explanation of Maxwell's equations, from which the fundamental laws and principles governing the static and time-varying electric and magnetic fields are derived. Results for both slowly- and rapidly-varying electromagnetic field problems are discussed in detail.Trade Review“Electromagnetic Foundations of Electrical Engineering certainly lives up to its name by providing a very useful treatment of Maxwell’s equations which should help students understand why they need to learn field theory and how it impacts their jobs and daily life.” (IEEE Microwave Magazine, June 2009)Table of ContentsPREFACE. To the Electrical Engineer Practitioner. To the Student. To the Instructor. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS. PROJECT PORTFOLIO. Analysis of a power delivery system. Cylindrical type transmission lines. DC current transducer. Determination of the conductivity of a circular conducting disk. Directional coupler analysis. Ill-defined grounding problems. Induction machine analysis. Line matching technique using an exponential transmission-line section. Linear variable differential transformer. Magnetic actuator and sensor device. Overhead-line protection by ground-wires. Power line carrier communication. Pseudo-balanced three-phase lines. Screened high-voltage three-phase installation. Shielded three-phase cable analysis. Three-route microwave splitter. Transmission-line system with balun transformer for even to odd-mode conversion. Transmission-line system with transformer-stage matching. Two-way loudspeaker analysis. Variable reluctance transformer. PART I: A BRIEF OVERVIEW. INTRODUCTION. CHAPTER 1: BASIC FIELD VECTORS. 1.1: The Electric and Magnetic Field Vectors. 1.2: Constitutive Relations. 1.3: Units and Notation. 1.4: Fundamental Concepts of Voltage and Current Intensity. PART II: STATIONARY FIELD PHENOMENA. INTRODUCTION. CHAPTER 2: ELECTROSTATICS. 2.1 Fundamental Equations. 2.2 Gradient Electric Field, Electric Potential, Voltage, Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law. 2.3 Electric Charge, Electric Displacement Vector. 2.4 Dielectric Media, Permittivity, Polarization, Dielectric Strength. 2.5 Conductors in Electrostatic Equilibrium. 2.6 Application Example (Filament of charge). 2.7 Capacitor, Capacitance, Electric Energy. 2.8 Application Example (Two-wire transmission line). 2.9 Multiple Conductor Systems. 2.10 Application Example (Electric coupling in printed circuit boards). 2.11 Electric Forces and Torques. 2.12 Homework Proposed Problems. CHAPTER 3: STATIONARY CURRENTS. 3.1 Fundamental Equations. 3.2 Conductivity, Current Density, Electric Circuits. 3.3 Current Intensity, Kirchhoff’s Current Law. 3.4 Resistor, Conductance, Resistance, Ohm's Law. 3.5 Application Example (The potentiometer). 3.6 Application Example (The Wheatstone bridge). 3.7 Joule Losses, Generator Applied Field. 3.8 Generator Electromotive Force, Power Balance. 3.9 Homework Proposed Problems. CHAPTER 4: MAGNETIC FIELD OF STATIONARY CURRENTS. 4.1 Fundamental Equations. 4.2 Ampère’s Law, Magnetomotive Force, Magnetic Voltage. 4.3 Magnetic Induction Field, Magnetic Induction Flux. 4.4 Application Example (Power line magnetic fields). 4.5 Magnetic Materials, Ferromagnetic Media, Saturation and Hysteresis. 4.6 Magnetic Circuits. 4.7 Application Example (Three-legged transformer). 4.8 Magnetic Reluctance. 4.9 Inductor, Inductance, Magnetic Flux Linkage, Magnetic Energy. 4.10 Application Example (Coaxial cable). 4.11 Hysteresis Losses. 4.12 Multiple Circuit Systems. 4.13 Magnetic Forces and Torques. 4.14 Application Example (U-shaped electromagnet). 4.15 Homework Proposed Problems. PART III: SLOW TIME-VARYING FIELDS. INTRODUCTION. CHAPTER 5: MAGNETIC INDUCTION PHENOMENA. 5.1 Fundamental Equations. 5.2 Gradient and Induction Electric Fields, Potential Vector. 5.3 Revisiting the Voltage Concept. 5.4 Induction Law. 5.5 Application Example (Magnetic noise effects). 5.6 Voltages and Currents in Magnetically Multicoupled Systems. 5.7 Application Example (Magnetic coupling in printed circuit boards). 5.8 Eddy Currents. 5.9 Generalization of the Induction Law to Moving Circuit Systems. 5.10 Application Example (Electromechanical energy conversion). 5.11 DC Voltage Generation. 5.12 AC Voltage Generation. 5.13 Homework Proposed Problems. CHAPTER 6: ELECTRIC INDUCTION PHENOMENA. 6.1 Fundamental Equations. 6.2 Displacement Current, Generalized Ampère’s Law. 6.3 Charge Continuity Equation. 6.4 Revisiting the Current Intensity Concept. 6.5 Application Example (Capacitor self-discharge). 6.6 Voltages and Currents in Electrically Multicoupled Systems. 6.7 Homework Proposed Problems. CHAPTER 7: LUMPED PARAMETERS CIRCUIT ANALYSIS. 7.1 Introduction. 7.2 Steady-State Harmonic Regimes. 7.3 Transformer Analysis. 7.4 Transient Regimes. 7.5 Homework Proposed Problems. PART IV: RAPID TIME-VARYING FIELDS. INTRODUCTION. CHAPTER 8: ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD PHENOMENA. 8.1 Electromagnetic Waves. 8.2 Poynting’s Theorem, Poynting’s Vector, Power Flow. 8.3 Time-Harmonic Fields, Field Polarization, RMS Field Values. 8.4 Phasor-Domain Maxwell Equations, Material Media Constitutive Relations. 8.5 Application Example (Uniform plane waves). 8.6 Complex Poynting’s Vector. 8.7 Application Example (Skin effect). 8.8 Homework Proposed Problems. CHAPTER 9: TRANSMISSION LINE ANALYSIS. 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 Time-Domain Transmission-Line Equations for Lossless Lines. 9.3 Application Example (Parallel-plate transmission line). 9.4 Frequency-Domain Transmission-Line Equations for Lossy Lines. 9.5 Frequency-Domain Transmission-Line Equations for Lossless Lines. 9.6 Application Example (Line matching techniques). 9.7 Multiconductor Transmission Lines. 9.8 Application Example (Even and odd modes). 9.9 Homework Proposed Problems. APPENDICES. Appendix 1: Formulas from Vector Analysis. Appendix 2: Lorentz Transformation. Appendix 3: Elements of Complex Algebra. Appendix 4: Elements of Fourier Analysis. BIBLIOGRAPHY. INDEX.

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical tool for propagation channel modeling with MATLAB simulations. Many books on wireless propagation channel provide a highly theoretical coverage, which for some interested readers, may be difficult to follow. This book takes a very practical approach by introducing the theory in each chapter first, and then carrying out simulations showing how exactly put the theory into practice. The resulting plots are analyzed and commented for clarity, and conclusions are drawn and explained from the obtained results. Key features include: A unique approach to propagation channel modeling with accompanying MATLAB simulations to demonstrate the theory in practice Contains step by step commentary and analysis of the obtained simulation results in order to provide a comprehensive and structured learning tool Covers a wide range of topics including shadowing effects, coverage and interference, Multipath Narrowband channel, Multipath Wideband cTable of ContentsContents About the Series Editors Preface Acknowledgments 1 Introduction to Wireless Propagation 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Wireless Propagation Basics 1.3 Link Budgets 1.4 Projects 1.5 Summary References Software Supplied 2 Shadowing Effects 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Projects 2.3 Summary References Software Supplied 3 Coverage and Interference 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Hata Model 3.3 Projects 3.4 Summary References Software Supplied 4 Introduction to Multipath 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Projects 4.3 Summary References Software Supplied 5 Multipath: Narrowband Channel 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Projects 5.3 Summary References Software Supplied 6 Shadowing and Multipath 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Projects 6.3 Summary References Software Supplied 7 Multipath: Wideband Channel 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Deterministic Multiple Point-Scatterer Model 7.3 Channel System Functions 7.4 Stochastic Description of the Wireless Channel 7.5 Projects 7.6 Summary References Software Supplied 8 Propagation in Microcells and Picocells 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Review of Some Propagation Basics 8.3 Microcell and Picocell Empirical Models 8.4 Projects 8.5 Summary References Software Supplied 9 The Land Mobile Satellite Channel 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Projects 9.3 Summary References Software Supplied 10 The Directional Wireless Channel 10.1 Introduction 10.2 MIMO Systems 10.3 Projects 10.4 Summary References Software Supplied Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisProviding an holistic approach to IMS technologies, IMS: A Development and Deployment Perspective explores service architecture for development and delivery of IMS services. Approaching IMS from the perspective of the user and the service provider it examines both the current state of deployment and future trends. The book offers a realistic view of IMS deployment to operators and service providers, giving practical examples, application cases and business models. It also presents IMS deployment strategies based on real-life deployment statistics from a live IMS test bed connected to an operator network and proof-of-concept applications including inter-operability trials and results. Focusing on IMS potential in terms of service creation, service composition and service provision the book discusses the ability of IMS to act not only as a service delivery framework, but also as a service integration framework. It presents the possible future of IMS in terms of convergence witTable of ContentsPreface. Author Biographies. Part I Introduction. 1 IMS Context. 1.1 Drivers of Convergence. 1.2 IMS Misconceptions. 1.3 IMS Standards Status. 1.4 IMS Deployment Status. 1.5 Future. 2 IMS Technology. 2.1 Evolution of Mobile Network Architecture. 2.2 IMS - A Standardized All-IP Infrastructure. 2.3 Evolution of Fixed Mobile Convergence. Part II Convergence - Services and Deployment Perspective. 3 IMS - A Service Perspective. 3.1 The IMS Potential. 3.2 IMS-Enhanced Service Delivery Framework. 3.3 IMS Services - Possibilities. 4 IMS Deployment. 4.1 Deployment Concerns. 4.2 Interoperability. 4.3 IMS Deployment Strategies. 4.4 IMS Test Networks. Part III Convergence - The Road Ahead. 5 WIMS 2.0: Convergence of Telcos with web 2.0 Facilitated by IMS. 5.1 Impact of Web 2.0 Disruption on the IMS and Telecom Evolution. 5.2 WIMS 2.0: The Service Focus. 5.3 WIMS 2.0: The Technology Focus. 6 The Way Forward - Paths to Follow. 6.1 Operators and Service Platforms. 6.2 Developers and Service Creation. 6.3 Users and Service Creation. 6.4 Devices and Service Creation. 6.5 Research and Development. 6.6 Concluding Remarks. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a common framework for mobility management that considers the theoretical and practical aspects of systems optimization for mobile networks. In this book, the authors show how an optimized system of mobility management can improve the quality of service in existing forms of mobile communication. Furthermore, they provide a theoretical approach to mobility management, as well as developing the model for systems optimization, including practical case studies using network layer and mobility layer protocols in different deployment scenarios. The authors also address the different ways in which the specific mobility protocol can be developed, taking into account numerous factors including security, configuration, authentication, quality of service, and movement patterns of the mobiles. Key Features: Defines and discusses a common set of optimization methodologies and their application to all mobility protocols for both ITrade Review“It is a recommended resource for graduate students, researchers, and IT professionals interested in the study of handoff management.” (IEEE Communications Magazine, 1 April 2015) Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xv Foreword xvii Preface xix Acknowledgements xxiii List of Abbreviations xxv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Types of Mobility 2 1.1.1 Terminal Mobility 2 1.1.2 Personal Mobility 5 1.1.3 Session Mobility 6 1.1.4 Service Mobility 7 1.2 Performance Requirements 7 1.3 Motivation 8 1.4 Summary of Key Contributions 9 2 Analysis of Mobility Protocols for Multimedia 13 2.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 13 2.2 Introduction 14 2.3 Cellular 1G 15 2.3.1 System Architecture 15 2.3.2 Handoff Procedure 17 2.4 Cellular 2G Mobility 17 2.4.1 GSM 17 2.4.2 IS-95 19 2.5 Cellular 3G Mobility 23 2.5.1 WCDMA 24 2.5.2 CDMA2000 26 2.6 4G Networks 27 2.6.1 Evolved Packet System 28 2.6.2 WiMAX Mobility 31 2.7 IP-Based Mobility 34 2.7.1 Network Layer Macromobility 34 2.7.2 Network Layer Micromobility 40 2.7.3 NETMOB: Network Mobility 46 2.7.4 Transport Layer Mobility 49 2.7.5 Application Layer Mobility 49 2.7.6 Host Identity Protocol 50 2.7.7 MOBIKE 52 2.7.8 IAPP 53 2.8 Heterogeneous Handover 55 2.8.1 UMTS–WLAN Handover 55 2.8.2 LTE–WLAN Handover 58 2.9 Multicast Mobility 61 2.10 Concluding Remarks 71 3 Systems Analysis of Mobility Events 73 3.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 75 3.2 Introduction 75 3.2.1 Comparative Analysis of Mobility Protocols 77 3.3 Analysis of Handoff Components 78 3.3.1 Network Discovery and Selection 80 3.3.2 Network Attachment 80 3.3.3 Configuration 81 3.3.4 Security Association 81 3.3.5 Binding Update 82 3.3.6 Media Rerouting 83 3.4 Effect of Handoff across Layers 83 3.4.1 Layer 2 Delay 84 3.4.2 Layer 3 Delay 84 3.4.3 Application Layer Delay 85 3.4.4 Handoff Operations across Layers 85 3.5 Concluding Remarks 90 4 Modeling Mobility 91 4.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 91 4.2 Introduction 92 4.3 Related Work 92 4.4 Modeling Mobility as a Discrete-Event Dynamic System 93 4.5 Petri Net Primitives 94 4.6 Petri-Net-Based Modeling Methodologies 96 4.7 Resource Utilization during Handoff 97 4.8 Data Dependency Analysis of the Handoff Process 99 4.8.1 Petri-Net-Based Data Dependency 99 4.8.2 Analysis of Data Dependency during Handoff Process 100 4.9 Petri Net Model for Handoff 105 4.10 Petri-Net-Based Analysis of Handoff Event 113 4.10.1 Analysis of Deadlocks in Handoff 114 4.10.2 Reachability Analysis 120 4.10.3 Matrix Equations 122 4.11 Evaluation of Systems Performance Using Petri Nets 123 4.11.1 Cycle-Time-Based Approach 123 4.11.2 Floyd-Algorithm-Based Approach 124 4.11.3 Resource–Time Product Approach 125 4.12 Opportunities for Optimization 128 4.12.1 Analysis of Parallelism in Handoff Operations 129 4.12.2 Opportunities for Proactive Operation 129 4.13 Concluding Remarks 130 5 Layer 2 Optimization 131 5.1 Introduction 131 5.2 Related Work 131 5.3 IEEE 802.11 Standards 132 5.3.1 The IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN Architecture 133 5.3.2 IEEE 802.11 Management Frames 134 5.4 Handoff Procedure with Active Scanning 135 5.4.1 Steps during Handoff 135 5.5 Fast-Handoff Algorithm 137 5.5.1 Selective Scanning 137 5.5.2 Caching 138 5.6 Implementation 142 5.6.1 The HostAP Driver 142 5.7 Measurements 142 5.7.1 Experimental Setup 142 5.7.2 The Environment 142 5.7.3 Experiments 143 5.8 Measurement Results 143 5.8.1 Handoff Time 143 5.8.2 Packet Loss 143 5.9 Conclusions and Future Work 146 6 Mobility Optimization Techniques 149 6.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 149 6.1.1 Discovery 149 6.1.2 Authentication 150 6.1.3 Layer 3 Configuration 151 6.1.4 Layer 3 Security Association 152 6.1.5 Binding Update 152 6.1.6 Media Rerouting 153 6.1.7 Route Optimization 154 6.1.8 Media-Independent Cross-Layer Triggers 155 6.2 Introduction 156 6.3 Discovery 156 6.3.1 Key Principles 156 6.3.2 Related Work 157 6.3.3 Application Layer Discovery 158 6.3.4 Experimental Results and Analysis 161 6.4 Authentication 164 6.4.1 Key Principles 166 6.4.2 Related Work 166 6.4.3 Network-Layer-Assisted Preauthentication 169 6.4.4 Experimental Results and Analysis 173 6.5 Layer 3 Configuration 177 6.5.1 Key Principles 179 6.5.2 Related Work 180 6.5.3 Router-Assisted Duplicate Address Detection 180 6.5.4 Proactive IP Address Configuration 180 6.5.5 Experimental Results and Analysis 183 6.6 Layer 3 Security Association 183 6.6.1 Key Principles 184 6.6.2 Related Work 184 6.6.3 Anchor-Assisted Security Association 184 6.6.4 Experimental Results and Analysis 187 6.7 Binding Update 190 6.7.1 Key Principles 191 6.7.2 Related Work 191 6.7.3 Hierarchical Binding Update 192 6.7.4 Experimental Results and Analysis 195 6.7.5 Proactive Binding Update 199 6.8 Media Rerouting 199 6.8.1 Key Principles 200 6.8.2 Related Work 200 6.8.3 Data Redirection Using Forwarding Agent 201 6.8.4 Mobility-Proxy-Assisted Time-Bound Data Redirection 202 6.8.5 Time-Bound Localized Multicasting 205 6.9 Media Buffering 210 6.9.1 Key Principles 211 6.9.2 Related Work 211 6.9.3 Protocol for Edge Buffering 212 6.9.4 Experimental Results and Analysis 215 6.9.5 Analysis of the Trade-off between Buffering Delay and Packet Loss 219 6.10 Route Optimization 220 6.10.1 Key Principles 221 6.10.2 Related Work 221 6.10.3 Maintaining a Direct Path by Application Layer Mobility 221 6.10.4 Interceptor-Assisted Packet Modifier at the End Point 222 6.10.5 Intercepting Proxy-Assisted Route Optimization 224 6.10.6 Cost Analysis and Experimental Analysis 226 6.10.7 Binding-Cache-Based Route Optimization 229 6.11 Media-Independent Cross-Layer Triggers 232 6.11.1 Key Principles 232 6.11.2 Related Work 232 6.11.3 Media Independent Handover Function 233 6.11.4 Faster Link-Down Detection Scheme 238 6.12 Concluding Remarks 241 7 Optimization with Multilayer Mobility Protocols 243 7.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 243 7.2 Introduction 244 7.3 Key Principles 245 7.4 Related Work 245 7.5 Multilayer Mobility Approach 246 7.5.1 Policy-Based Mobility Protocols: SIP and MIP-LR 247 7.5.2 Integration of SIP and MIP-LR with MMP 248 7.5.3 Integration of Global Mobility Protocol with Micromobility Protocol 250 7.5.4 Implementation of Multilayer Mobility Protocols 250 7.5.5 Implementation and Performance Issues 252 7.6 Concluding Remarks 255 8 Optimizations for Simultaneous Mobility 257 8.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 257 8.2 Introduction 258 8.2.1 Analysis of Simultaneous Mobility 258 8.3 Illustration of the Simultaneous Mobility Problem 260 8.4 Related Work 262 8.5 Key Optimization Techniques 262 8.6 Analytical Framework 262 8.6.1 Fundamental Concepts 262 8.6.2 Handoff Sequences 263 8.6.3 Binding Updates 264 8.6.4 Location Proxies and Binding Update Proxies 265 8.7 Analyzing the Simultaneous Mobility Problem 267 8.8 Probability of Simultaneous Mobility 270 8.9 Solutions 272 8.9.1 Soft Handoff 273 8.9.2 Receiver-Side Mechanisms 273 8.9.3 Sender-Side Mechanisms 275 8.10 Application of Solution Mechanisms 276 8.10.1 Mobile IPv6 277 8.10.2 MIP-LR 279 8.10.3 SIP-Based Mobility 280 8.11 Concluding Remarks 282 9 Handoff Optimization for Multicast Streaming 285 9.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 285 9.2 Introduction 286 9.3 Key Principles 289 9.4 Related Work 290 9.5 Mobility in a Hierarchical Multicast Architecture 291 9.5.1 Channel Announcement 293 9.5.2 Channel Management 293 9.5.3 Channel Tuning 293 9.5.4 Local Advertisement Insertion 294 9.5.5 Channel Monitor 294 9.5.6 Security 295 9.6 Optimization Techniques for Multicast Media Delivery 296 9.6.1 Reactive Triggering 296 9.6.2 Proactive Triggering 297 9.6.3 Triggering during Configuration of a Mobile 298 9.7 Experimental Results and Performance Analysis 299 9.7.1 Experimental Results 299 9.7.2 Performance Analysis 302 9.8 Concluding Remarks 305 10 Cooperative Roaming 307 10.1 Introduction 307 10.2 Related Work 309 10.3 IP Multicast Addressing 310 10.4 Cooperative Roaming 311 10.4.1 Overview 311 10.4.2 L2 Cooperation Protocol 312 10.4.3 L3 Cooperation Protocol 313 10.5 Cooperative Authentication 314 10.5.1 Overview of IEEE 802.1x 314 10.5.2 Cooperation in the Authentication Process 315 10.5.3 Relay Process 316 10.6 Security 318 10.6.1 Security Issues in Roaming 318 10.6.2 Cooperative Authentication and Security 319 10.7 Streaming Media Support 320 10.8 Bandwidth and Energy Usage 320 10.9 Experiments 321 10.9.1 Environment 321 10.9.2 Implementation Details 322 10.9.3 Experimental Setup 322 10.9.4 Results 323 10.10 Application Layer Mobility 328 10.11 Load Balancing 329 10.12 Multicast and Scalability 330 10.13 An Alternative to Multicast 330 10.14 Conclusions and Future Work 331 11 System Evaluation 333 11.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 333 11.2 Introduction 334 11.3 Experimental Validation 334 11.3.1 The Media Independent Preauthentication Framework 334 11.3.2 Intratechnology Handoff 338 11.3.3 Intertechnology Handoff 340 11.3.4 Cross-Layer-Trigger-Assisted Preauthentication 342 11.3.5 Mobile-Initiated Handover with 802.21 Triggers 344 11.3.6 Network-Initiated Handover with 802.21 Triggers 345 11.3.7 Handover Preparation Time 346 11.4 Handoff Optimization in IP Multimedia Subsystem 350 11.4.1 Nonoptimized Handoff Mode 350 11.4.2 Optimization with Reactive Context Transfer 351 11.4.3 Optimization with Proactive Security Context Transfer 352 11.4.4 Performance Results 353 11.5 Systems Validation Using Petri-Net-Based Models 355 11.5.1 MATLAB®-Based Modeling of Handoff Functions 356 11.5.2 Petri-Net-Based Model for Optimized Security Association 360 11.5.3 Petri-Net-Based Model for Hierarchical Binding Update 361 11.5.4 Petri-Net-Based Model for Media Redirection of In-Flight Data 362 11.5.5 Petri-Net-Based Model of Optimized Configuration 364 11.5.6 Petri-Net-Based Model for Multicast Mobility 364 11.6 Scheduling Handoff Operations 365 11.6.1 Sequential Scheduling 366 11.6.2 Concurrent Scheduling 368 11.6.3 Proactive Scheduling 368 11.7 Verification of Systems Performance 369 11.7.1 Cycle-Time-Based Approach 369 11.7.2 Using the Floyd Algorithm 370 11.8 Petri-Net-Based Modeling for Multi-Interface Mobility 371 11.8.1 Multihoming Scenario 371 11.8.2 Break-Before-Make Scenario 372 11.8.3 Make-Before-Break Scenario 372 11.8.4 MATLAB®-Based Petri Net Modeling for Multi-Interface Mobility 372 11.9 Deadlocks in Handoff Scheduling 374 11.9.1 Handoff Schedules with Deadlocks 375 11.9.2 Deadlock Prevention and Avoidance in Handoff Schedules 377 11.10 Analysis of Level of Concurrency and Resources 380 11.11 Trade-off Analysis for Proactive Handoff 385 11.12 Concluding Remarks 389 12 Conclusions 391 12.1 General Principles of Mobility Optimization 391 12.2 Summary of Contributions 393 12.3 Future Work 394 A RDF Schema for Application Layer Discovery 395 A.1 Schema Primitives 395 B Definitions of Mobility-Related Terms 399 References 409 Index 425

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book offers a unified treatment of mobile middleware technology Mobile Middleware: Architecture, Patterns and Practiceprovides a comprehensive overview of mobile middleware technology. The focus is on understanding the key design and architectural patterns, middleware layering, data presentation, specific technological solutions, and standardization. The author addresses current state of the art systems including Symbian, Java 2 Micro Edition, W3C technologies and many others, and features a chapter on widely deployed middleware systems. Additionally, the book includes a summary of relevant mobile middleware technologies, giving the reader an insight into middleware architecture design and well-known, useful design patterns. Several case studies are included in order to demonstrate how the presented patterns, solutions, and architectures are applied in practice. The case studies pertain to mobile service platforms, mobile XML processing, thin clients, rich clientTable of ContentsAbout the Authors. List of Contributors. Preface. 1. Introduction. 1.1 Mobile Middleware. 1.2 Mobile Applications and Services. 1.3 Middleware Services. 1.4 Transparencies. 1.5 Mobile Environment. 1.6 Context-Awareness. 1.7 Mobility. 1.8 Example Use Case. 1.9 Requirements for Mobile Computing. 1.10 Mobile Platforms. 1.11 Organization of the Book. Bibliography. 2. Architectures and Platforms. 2.1 Overview. 2.2 Networking. 2.3 Naming and Addressing. 2.4 Middleware and Platforms. 2.5 Overview of Platforms. 2.6 Mobile Platforms. Bibliography. 3. Support Technologies. 3.1 Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). 3.2 IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). 3.3 Web Services. 3.4 Other Technologies. 3.5 Service Discovery. 3.6 Mobility Solutions. 3.7 Advanced Topics. 3.8 Fuego: Example Middleware Platform. Bibliography. 4. Principles and Patterns. 4.1 Definitions. 4.2 Principles. 4.3 Cross-layer design. 4.4 Model Driven Architecture. 4.5 Architectural Patterns. 4.6 General Patterns. 4.7 Patterns for Mobile Computing. 4.8 Summary. Bibliography. 5. Interoperability and Standards. 5.1 Interoperability. 5.2 Standardization. 5.3 Wireless Communications Standards. 5.4 W3C Standards. 5.5 IETF Standards. 5.6 Emerging Internet Standards. Bibliography. 6. Mobile Messaging. 6.1 Messaging Fundamentals. 6.2 Messaging Architectures. 6.3 Mobile and Wireless Communication. 6.4 Security. 6.5 Reliability. 6.6 Java Message Service. 6.7 CORBA and CORBA Messaging. 6.8 XMPP. 6.9 Web Services. 6.10 The Web and REST. Bibliography. 7. Publish/Subscribe. 7.1 Overview. 7.2 Router Topologies. 7.3 Interest Propagation. 7.4 Routing Decision. 7.5 Standards. 7.6 Research Systems. 7.7 Advanced Topics. Bibliography. 8. Data Synchronization. 8.1 Synchronization Models. 8.2 File Systems and Version Control. 8.3 Synchronization in Middleware. 8.4 Case Studies. Bibliography. 9. Security. 9.1 Basic Principles. 9.2 Cryptography. 9.3 Public Key Infrastructure. 9.4 Network Security. 9.5 802.11X. 9.6 AAA, RADIUS, Diameter. 9.7 Transport-layer Security. 9.8 Web Services Security. 9.9 Security Tokens. 9.10 SAML. 9.11 XACML. 9.12 Single Sign-On (SSO). 9.13 Generic Bootstrapping Architecture (GBA). 9.14 Trusted Platform Module. 9.15 OpenID, OAuth, MicroID. 9.16 Spam. 9.17 Downloaded Code. Bibliography. 10. Application and Service Case Studies. 10.1 Mobile Services. 10.2 Mobile Server. 10.3 Mobile Advertisement. 10.4 Mobile Push Email. 10.5 Mobile Video. 10.6 Mobile Widgets and WidSets. 10.7 Airline Services. 10.8 Revisiting Mobile Patterns. 10.9 Summary. Bibliography. 11. Conclusions. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides an in-depth reference for design engineers, system planners, and post-graduate students interested in the vastly popular field of indoor wireless communications. It contains wireless applications and services for in-building scenarios and the design and implementation of these systems.Table of ContentsPreface xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Motivation 1 1.2 Evolution of Macro to Heterogeneous Networks 2 1.3 Challenges 3 1.4 Structure of the Book 4 References 5 2 Indoor Wireless Technologies 7 2.1 Cellular 7 2.1.1 The Cellular Concept 8 2.1.2 GSM 9 2.1.3 UMTS 11 2.1.4 HSPA 12 2.1.5 LTE 13 2.2 Wi-Fi 14 2.2.1 History 14 2.2.2 Medium Access Control (MAC) Sublayer 16 2.2.3 Physical Layer 17 2.2.4 Industry Bodies 17 2.2.4.1 Wi-Fi Alliance 17 2.2.4.2 IEEE 802.11 17 2.2.4.3 The Wireless Broadband Alliance 17 2.2.5 Wi-Fi Standards 18 2.2.5.1 IEEE 802.11-1997 18 2.2.5.2 IEEE 802.11a 18 2.2.5.3 IEEE 802.11b 18 2.2.5.4 IEEE 802.11g 18 2.2.5.5 IEEE 802.11-2007 18 2.2.5.6 IEEE 802.11n 18 2.2.6 Spectrum 19 2.2.6.1 2.4 GHz Band 19 2.2.6.2 5 GHz Band 20 2.2.7 Modulation Schemes Used in Wi-Fi 21 2.2.8 Multiple Access (MA) Techniques 21 2.2.8.1 Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) 21 2.2.8.2 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) 22 2.2.8.3 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 23 2.2.9 Power Levels 24 2.2.10 Performance Indicators 25 2.2.11 Target Signal Levels and Link Budgets 25 2.2.12 Interference Challenges 29 2.2.13 Channel Planning 29 2.2.13.1 Single-Floor and Vertical Channel Planning 30 2.2.13.2 Multichannel Access Points 31 2.2.13.3 Automated Planning 31 2.2.14 Mobility Issues 31 2.2.14.1 Layer 2 Roam 32 2.2.14.2 Layer 3 Roam 32 2.3 Bluetooth 33 2.4 ZigBee 36 2.5 Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) 37 2.6 Private Mobile Radio (PMR) 39 2.6.1 PMR Elements 40 2.6.2 Attributes 40 2.6.3 TETRA 41 2.7 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications (DECT) 42 References 44 3 System Requirements 45 3.1 Environments 45 3.1.1 Corporate Buildings 46 3.1.2 Airports 47 3.1.3 Trains and Railway Stations 50 3.1.4 Shopping Centres 52 3.1.5 Hospitals 53 3.1.6 Arenas and Stadiums 54 3.1.6.1 What Makes a Stadium so Special? 56 3.1.6.2 Mix of Communities with Different Needs 56 3.1.7 University Campuses 57 3.1.8 Underground Stations 59 3.1.9 Cinemas and Theatres 60 3.1.10 Hotels 60 3.1.11 Cruise Ships 62 3.2 Coverage 62 3.2.1 Cellular 62 3.2.2 Wi-Fi 64 3.2.3 Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPAN) 65 3.3 Isolation 66 3.4 Leakage 67 3.5 Capacity 67 3.6 Interference 70 3.7 Signal Quality 71 3.8 Technology 72 3.9 Cost 72 3.10 Upgradeability 73 3.11 System Expansion 74 3.12 Conclusion 74 References 74 4 Radio Propagation 77 4.1 Maxwell’s Equations 77 4.1.1 Gauss’s Law for Electricity 79 4.1.2 Gauss’s Law for Magnetism 79 4.1.3 Faraday’s Law of Induction 81 4.1.4 Ampère’s Circuital Law 81 4.1.5 Consequence of Maxwell’s Equations 82 4.2 Plane Waves 82 4.2.1 Wave Equation 83 4.2.2 Plane Wave Properties 84 4.2.3 Wave Polarization 85 4.2.4 Wave Propagation in Lossy Media 87 4.3 Propagation Mechanisms 87 4.3.1 Is Electromagnetic Theory Wrong Inside Buildings? 87 4.3.2 Loss and Skin Effect 88 4.3.3 Reflection 89 4.3.4 Refraction (Transmission) 90 4.3.5 Diffraction 91 4.3.6 Scattering 92 4.3.7 Waveguiding 94 4.4 Effects of Materials 95 4.5 Path Loss 97 4.5.1 Median Path Loss 97 4.5.2 Link Budgets 98 4.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity 99 4.5.4 Maximum Acceptable Path Loss (MAPL) 99 4.5.5 Free-Space Loss 100 4.5.6 Excess Loss 100 4.6 Fast Fading 101 4.7 Shadowing (Slow Fading) 103 4.8 Building Penetration Loss 104 4.8.1 Radio Wave Propagation into Buildings 106 4.8.2 Variations with Frequency 106 4.8.3 Variations with Depth and Clutter 109 4.8.4 Comparison of Assumptions Made by Ofcom 109 4.9 Conclusion 109 References 110 5 Channel Modelling 113 5.1 The Importance of Channel Modelling 113 5.2 Propagation Modelling Challenges 114 5.3 Model Classification 114 5.3.1 Channel Bandwidth 114 5.3.2 Propagation Environment 115 5.3.3 Model Construction Approach 115 5.4 Model Accuracy 116 5.5 Empirical Models 117 5.5.1 Power Law Model 118 5.5.2 Keenan–Motley Model 119 5.5.3 ITU-R Indoor Model 121 5.5.4 Siwiak–Bertoni–Yano (SBY) Multipath-Based Model 122 5.5.5 Ericsson Multiple Breakpoint Model 122 5.5.6 Tuan Empirical Indoor Model: 900 MHz to 5.7 GHz 123 5.5.7 Attenuation Factor Model 123 5.5.8 Indoor Dominant Path Model (DPM) 124 5.5.9 COST-231 Multiwall Model 126 5.6 Physical Models 128 5.6.1 Introduction to Ray Tracing 129 5.6.2 Honcharenko–Bertoni Model 130 5.6.3 Ray-Tracing Site-Specific Model 131 5.6.4 Lee Ray-Tracing Model 132 5.6.5 Multichannel Coupling (MCC) Prediction 133 5.6.6 Angular Z-Buffer Algorithm for Efficient Ray Tracing 136 5.6.7 Intelligent Ray-Tracing (IRT) Model 138 5.6.8 Hybrid Parabolic Equation–Integral Equation Indoor Model 139 5.7 Hybrid Models 140 5.7.1 Reduced-Complexity UTD Model 140 5.7.2 Measurement-Based Prediction 142 5.8 Outdoor-to-Indoor Models 143 5.8.1 COST-231 Line-of-Sight Model 144 5.8.2 COST-231 Non-Line-of-Sight Model 146 5.8.3 Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) Penetration Model 147 5.8.4 Ichitsubo–Okamoto Outdoor-to-Indoor Model (800 MHz–8 GHz) 148 5.8.5 Taga–Miura Model Using Identification of Path Passing Through Wall Openings 149 5.9 Models for Propagation in Radiating Cables 150 5.9.1 Zhang Model 150 5.9.2 Carter Model 151 5.9.3 Seseña–Aragón–Castañón Model 152 5.10 Wideband Channel Characteristics 153 5.11 Noise Considerations 156 5.11.1 Noise Sources 157 5.11.2 Noise Parameters 157 5.11.3 Considerations for Indoor Wireless Systems 158 5.12 In-Building Planning Tools 159 5.12.1 iBwave Design 159 5.12.2 WiMap-4G 160 5.12.3 Mentum CellPanner 160 5.12.4 Atrium 160 5.12.5 WinProp 160 5.12.6 CellTrace 161 5.12.7 EDX Signal Pro 161 5.12.8 iBuildNet DAS 162 5.12.9 Wireless InSite 162 5.13 Conclusion 162 References 163 6 Antennas 167 6.1 The Basics of Antenna Theory 167 6.1.1 Conditions for Radiation 168 6.1.2 Antenna Regions 169 6.2 Antenna Parameters 170 6.2.1 Radiation Pattern 171 6.2.2 Directivity 174 6.2.3 Radiation Resistance and Efficiency 176 6.2.4 Power Gain 177 6.2.5 Bandwidth 178 6.2.6 Reciprocity 179 6.2.7 Receiving Antenna Aperture 180 6.2.8 Beamwidth 181 6.2.9 Cross-Polar Discrimination 181 6.2.10 Polarization Matching 182 6.3 Antenna Types 183 6.3.1 Linear Wire 183 6.3.2 Loop 184 6.3.3 Antenna Arrays 186 6.3.4 Travelling Wave and Broadband 186 6.3.5 Microstrip 187 6.3.6 Yagi-Uda 188 6.3.7 Aperture Antennas 189 6.3.8 Horn 189 6.3.9 Monopole 190 6.3.10 Parabolic Reflector (Dish) 190 6.3.11 Smart Antennas 192 6.4 Antenna Performance Issues 193 6.4.1 Mean Effective Gain (MEG) 193 6.4.2 Radiation Pattern Extrapolation 195 6.4.3 Reliability of Radiation Patterns 198 6.5 Antenna Measurements 199 6.6 MIMO (Multiple-Input Multiple-Output) 200 6.7 Examples Of In-Building Antennas 203 6.7.1 In-Building Cellular Antenna Requirements 203 Contents xi 6.7.2 Omnidirectional 203 6.7.3 Directional 206 6.7.4 Macrocell 207 6.7.5 Multiband 207 6.7.6 Deployment Considerations 208 6.8 Radiating Cables 208 6.8.1 Structure 209 6.8.2 Applications 210 6.8.3 Propagation Modes 210 6.8.3.1 Coupled Mode 210 6.8.3.2 Radiating Mode 211 6.8.4 Parameters 211 6.8.4.1 Coupling Loss 211 6.8.4.2 Insertion Loss 211 6.8.4.3 Bandwidth 211 6.8.5 Practical Considerations 212 6.9 Conclusion 212 References 212 7 Radio Measurements 215 7.1 The Value of Measurements 215 7.1.1 Tuning Empirical Path Loss Models 216 7.1.2 Creating Synthetic Channel Models 218 7.1.3 Validating Indoor Radio Designs 218 7.2 Methodology for Indoor Measurements 218 7.2.1 Measurement Campaign Plan 218 7.2.2 Preliminary Site Visit 219 7.2.3 Site Acquisition and Permissions 219 7.2.4 Equipment Checklist 219 7.2.5 Measurement Campaign 219 7.2.6 Data Postprocessing 219 7.2.7 Postvisit to Site 219 7.3 Types of Measurement Systems 220 7.3.1 Narrowband Measurements 220 7.3.1.1 CW Measurements 221 7.3.1.2 Code Scanning 223 7.3.1.3 Engineering Test Mobiles 224 7.3.1.4 Comparative Analysis 224 7.3.2 Wideband Measurements 226 7.4 Measurement Equipment 228 7.4.1 Transmit Equipment 228 7.4.2 Receive Rquipment 229 7.4.3 Miscellaneous Testing Components 230 7.4.4 Buyer’s Guide 232 7.5 Types of Indoor Measurement Surveys 233 7.5.1 Design Survey 233 7.5.2 Existing Coverage 234 7.6 Guidelines for Effective Radio Measurements 235 7.6.1 Planning Your Measurements: The MCP 235 7.6.1.1 Introduction 236 7.6.1.2 Objectives 236 7.6.1.3 Requirements 236 7.6.1.4 Antenna Locations 237 7.6.1.5 Walk Test Routes 238 7.6.1.6 Workplan 238 7.6.1.7 Implications of Not Having an MCP 238 7.6.2 Choose a Suitable Navigation System 238 7.6.3 Signal Sampling and Averaging Considerations 241 7.6.4 Documentation 245 7.6.5 Walk Test Best Practice 246 7.6.6 Equipment Calibration and Validation 247 7.7 Model Tuning and Validation 250 7.7.1 Measurements for Model Tuning 251 7.7.2 Factors Affecting Model Tuning 252 7.7.3 Impact of Having Insufficient Measurements for Tuning 252 7.8 Conclusion 254 References 255 8 Capacity Planning and Dimensioning 257 8.1 Introduction 257 8.2 An Overview On Teletraffic 258 8.2.1 Trunking 259 8.2.2 Loss and Queue Networks 260 8.2.3 Busy-Hour 260 8.3 Capacity Parameters – Circuit-Switched 260 8.3.1 Blocking 260 8.3.2 Grade of Service 261 8.3.3 Traffic per User 261 8.3.4 Offered and Carried Traffic 262 8.3.5 Traffic Categories 263 8.4 Data Transmission Parameters 264 8.4.1 Delay 264 8.4.2 Throughput 264 8.4.3 Latency 264 8.5 Capacity Limits 265 8.6 Radio Resource Management 265 8.7 Load Sharing: Base Station Hotels 266 8.8 Traffic Mapping 267 8.9 Capacity Calculations 267 8.9.1 Service Categories 268 8.9.1.1 Service Types 268 8.9.1.2 Traffic Classes 268 8.9.1.3 Service Category Parameters 269 8.9.2 Service Environment 270 8.9.3 Radio Environment 271 8.9.4 Radio Access Technology Groups (RATGs) 272 8.9.5 Methodology Flowchart 272 8.9.6 Market Data Analysis 273 8.9.7 Traffic Demand Calculation by SE and SC 274 8.9.8 Traffic Distribution Amongst RATGs 275 8.9.8.1 Distribution Ratios 276 8.9.8.2 Distribution of Session Arrival Rates 278 8.9.8.3 Offered Traffic 279 8.9.9 Carried Traffic Capacity Determination 279 8.9.9.1 Circuit-Switched Traffic 279 8.9.9.2 Packet-Switched Traffic 280 8.10 Wi-Fi Capacity 280 8.10.1 The Challenge 280 8.10.2 Facts and Figures 280 8.10.3 Coverage Design 282 8.10.4 Capacity Design 283 8.10.5 Additional Challenges 283 8.11 Data Offloading Considerations 284 8.11.1 Data Offload Using Femtocells 287 8.11.2 Data Offload Using Wi-Fi 287 8.11.3 Femtocell versus Wi-Fi 287 8.11.3.1 Wi-Fi 287 8.11.3.2 Femtocells 288 8.11.4 Carrier Wi-Fi 288 8.11.5 UMA/GAN 288 8.11.6 Seamless Authentication 289 8.11.7 Turning Wi-Fi into an Operator Network 289 8.11.7.1 WBA Next Generation Hotspot 290 8.11.7.2 WBA Roaming 290 8.11.7.3 WFA Hotspot 290 8.11.7.4 ANDSF 290 8.11.7.5 I-WLAN 290 8.11.8 Discussion 290 8.12 Conclusion 291 References 292 9 RF Equipment and Distribution Systems 293 9.1 Base Stations 293 9.2 Distributed Antenna Systems 295 9.2.1 Passive DAS 296 9.2.2 Active DAS 297 9.2.3 Hybrid DAS 299 9.2.4 Installation 300 9.3 RF Miscellaneous – Passive 300 9.3.1 Cables 301 9.3.2 Splitters/Combiners 302 9.3.3 Antennas 302 9.3.4 Directional Couplers 303 9.3.5 Tappers 304 9.3.6 Attenuators 305 9.3.7 Circulators 306 9.3.8 Terminations/Dummy Loads 307 9.3.9 Duplexers 308 9.3.10 Diplexers/Triplexers 308 9.4 RF Miscellaneous – Active 308 9.4.1 Amplifiers 308 9.4.2 Active DAS Components 309 9.4.2.1 Main Unit 309 9.4.2.2 Expansion Unit 309 9.4.2.3 Remote Unit 309 9.5 Repeaters 310 9.5.1 Repeater Deployments 310 9.5.1.1 Operator-Deployed Repeaters 310 9.5.1.2 Traditional Consumer Repeaters 311 9.5.1.3 Intelligent Repeaters 312 9.5.2 Disadvantages 312 9.5.3 Installation Issues 312 9.5.4 Benefits 314 9.6 Conclusion 314 References 314 10 Small Cells 315Simon R. Saunders 10.1 What is a Small Cell? 315 10.2 Small Cell Species 316 10.2.1 Femtocells for Residential Environments 316 10.2.2 Picocells 316 10.2.3 Metrocells 317 10.2.4 Rural and Remote Small Cells 317 10.3 The Case for Small Cells 318 10.3.1 Capacity 318 10.3.2 Coverage 318 10.3.3 User Experience 318 10.3.4 Cost Effectiveness 318 10.4 History and Standards 318 10.5 Architecture and Management 320 10.6 Coverage, Capacity and Interference 321 10.7 Business Case 323 10.8 Regulation 324 10.9 Small Cells ComparedWith Other IndoorWireless Technologies 324 10.9.1 Distributed Antenna Systems (DASs) 324 10.9.2 Wi-Fi 325 10.9.3 Repeaters and Relay Nodes 326 10.10 Market 326 10.11 Future: New Architectures and Towards 5G 327 References 327 11 In-Building Case Studies 331Vladan Jevremovic 11.1 Public Venue 331 11.1.1 Scenario 332 11.1.2 Solution 332 11.1.3 Common Design Requirements 332 11.1.3.1 Multicarrier (Neutral Host) 332 11.1.3.2 Multiband 333 11.1.3.3 Multitechnology 334 11.1.4 Common Best Practices 335 11.1.4.1 Passive Intermodulation (PIM) 335 11.1.4.2 Downlink Design 335 11.1.4.3 Uplink Design 336 11.1.5 Summary 341 11.2 Stadium 341 11.2.1 Scenario 342 11.2.2 Solution 344 11.2.3 Design Requirements 344 11.2.3.1 RF Coverage 344 11.2.3.2 Capacity 344 11.2.3.3 Handoff Management 344 11.2.3.4 Interference Management 345 11.2.4 Site Survey 345 11.2.5 Detailed 3-D Modelling 346 11.2.6 Sectorization 348 11.2.7 Macro Coverage Management 349 11.2.8 Passive Intermodulation Management 350 11.2.9 Design for Stadium Capacity 350 11.2.9.1 Data Capacity Sizing 352 11.2.9.2 Voice Capacity Sizing 358 11.2.10 RF Coverage Design 360 11.2.11 Summary 361 11.3 Shopping Centre 362 11.3.1 Scenario 362 11.3.2 Design Requirements 363 11.3.2.1 RF Coverage 363 11.3.2.2 Antenna Placement Restrictions 364 11.3.3 Solution 364 11.3.4 Antenna Choice and Placement 364 11.3.5 RF Coverage Design 365 11.3.6 Capacity Dimensioning 367 11.3.7 Sectorization 372 11.3.8 Data Rate Coverage 372 11.3.9 Summary 373 11.4 Business Campus 374 11.4.1 Scenario 374 11.4.2 Design Requirements 375 11.4.2.1 RF Coverage 375 11.4.2.2 Handoff Management 376 11.4.2.3 Interference Management 377 11.4.3 Solution 378 11.4.4 Interference Control 378 11.4.5 Lift Coverage 380 11.4.6 Detailed RF Coverage Design 383 11.4.7 Summary 385 11.5 Underground (Subway) 386 11.5.1 Scenario 386 11.5.2 Design Requirements 387 11.5.2.1 RF Coverage 387 11.5.2.2 Capacity 389 11.5.2.3 Handoff Management 390 11.5.3 Solution 390 11.5.4 RF Coverage Design 391 11.5.5 Capacity 393 11.5.5.1 Data 393 11.5.5.2 Voice 400 11.5.6 Environmental Challenges 402 11.5.7 Radio Coverage Maps 403 11.5.8 Summary 406 References 406 Index 409

Read more less

Book SynopsisWritten by experts in the field, this book provides an overview of all forms of broadband subscriber access networks and technology, including fiber optics, DSL for phone lines, DOCSIS for coax, power line carrier, and wireless. Each technology is described in depth, with a discussion of key concepts, historical development, and industry standards. The book contains comprehensive coverage of all broadband access technologies, with a section each devoted to fiber-based technologies, non-fiber wired technologies, and wireless technologies. The four co-authors' breadth of knowledge is featured in the chapters comparing the relative strengths, weaknesses, and prognosis for the competing technologies. Key Features: Covers the physical and medium access layers (OSI Layer 1 and 2), with emphasis on access transmission technology Compares and contrasts all recent and emerging wired and wireless standards for broadband access in a single reference IllustTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xv Acknowledgments xvii List of Abbreviations and Acronyms xix 1 Introduction to Broadband Access Networks and Technologies 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 A Brief History of the Access Network 2 1.3 Digital Subscriber Lines (DSL) 3 1.3.1 DSL Technologies and Their Evolution 3 1.3.2 DSL System Technologies 5 1.4 Hybrid Fiber-Coaxial Cable (HFC) 5 1.5 Power Line Communications (PLC) 6 1.6 Fiber in the Loop (FITL) 7 1.7 Wireless Broadband Access 10 1.8 Direct Point-to-Point Connections 12 Appendix 1.A: Voiceband Modems 12 2 Introduction to Fiber Optic Broadband Access Networks and Technologies 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 A Brief History of Fiber in the Loop (FITL) 16 2.3 Introduction to PON Systems 18 2.3.1 PON System Overview 18 2.3.2 PON Protocol Evolution 19 2.4 FITL Technology Considerations 21 2.4.1 Optical Components 21 2.4.2 Powering the Loop 22 2.4.3 System Power Savings 23 2.4.4 PON Reach Extension 25 2.5 Introduction to PON Network Protection 30 2.5.1 Background on Network Protection 31 2.5.2 PON Facility Protection 31 2.5.3 OLT Function Protection 35 2.5.4 ONU Protection 40 2.5.5 Conclusions Regarding Protection 42 2.6 Conclusions 42 Appendix 2.A: Subscriber Power Considerations 43 References 43 Further Reading 43 3 IEEE Passive Optical Networks 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 IEEE 802.3ah Ethernet-based PON (EPON) 45 3.2.1 EPON Physical Layer 46 3.2.2 Signal Formats 46 3.2.3 MAC Protocol 48 3.2.4 Encryption and Security 49 3.2.5 Forward Error Correction (FEC) 50 3.2.6 ONU Discovery and Activation 51 3.2.7 ONU Ranging Mechanism 52 3.2.8 EPON OAM 52 3.2.9 Dynamic Bandwidth Assignment (DBA) 53 3.3 IEEE 802.3av 10Gbit/s Ethernet-based PON (10G EPON) 54 3.3.1 10G EPON Physical Layer 54 3.3.2 Signal Format 58 3.3.3 MAC Protocol 59 3.3.4 Forward Error Correction 59 3.3.5 ONU Discovery and Activation 61 3.3.6 ONU Ranging Mechanism 61 3.3.7 10G EPON OAM 61 3.3.8 Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation 61 3.4 Summary Comparison of EPON and 10G EPON 61 3.5 Transport of Timing and Synchronization over EPON and 10G EPON 61 3.6 Overview of the IEEE 1904.1 Service Interoperability in Ethernet Passive Optical Networks (SIEPON) 63 3.6.1 SIEPON MAC Functional Blocks 65 3.6.2 VLAN Support 67 3.6.3 Multicast Service 67 3.6.4 SIEPON Service Management 67 3.6.5 Performance Monitoring and Verification 69 3.6.6 SIEPON Service Availability 70 3.6.7 SIEPON Optical Link Protection 70 3.6.8 SIEPON Power Savings 70 3.6.9 SIEPON Security Mechanisms 71 3.6.10 SIEPON Management 71 3.7 ITU-T G.9801 Ethernet Passive Optical Networks using OMCI 71 3.8 Conclusions 71 Appendix 3.A: 64B/66B Line Code 72 References 75 Further Readings 75 4 ITU-T/FSAN PON Protocols 77 4.1 Introduction 77 4.2 ITU-T G.983 Series B-PON (Broadband PON) 78 4.3 ITU-T G.984 Series G-PON (Gigabit-capable PON) 79 4.3.1 G-PON Physical Layer 79 4.3.2 G-PON Frame Formats 81 4.3.3 G-PON Encapsulation Method (GEM) 87 4.3.4 G-PON Multiplexing 91 4.3.5 Encryption and Security 92 4.3.6 Forward Error Correction 92 4.3.7 Protection Switching 94 4.3.8 ONU Activation 94 4.3.9 Ranging Mechanism 95 4.3.10 Dynamic Bandwidth Assignment (DBA) 96 4.3.11 OAM Communication 97 4.3.12 Time of Day Distribution 97 4.3.13 G-PON Enhancements 101 4.4 Next Generation PON (NG-PON) 101 4.4.1 Introduction to G.987 series XG-PON (NG-PON1 – 10Gbit-capable PON) 102 4.4.2 XG-PON Physical Layer 102 4.4.3 XG-PON Transmission Convergence Layer and Frame Structures 105 4.4.4 Forward Error Correction 108 4.4.5 XG-PON Encapsulation Method (XGEM) 109 4.4.6 XG-PON Management 110 4.4.7 XG-PON Security 110 4.4.8 NG-PON2 40 Gbit/s Capable PON 110 Appendix 4.A: Summary Comparison of EPON and G-PON 112 References 113 Further Readings 114 5 Optical Domain PON Technologies 115 5.1 Introduction 115 5.2 WDMA (Wavelength Division Multiple Access) PON 115 5.2.1 Overview 115 5.2.2 Technologies 116 5.2.3 Applications 120 5.3 CDMA PON 120 5.4 Point-to-Point Ethernet 122 5.5 Subcarrier Multiplexing and OFDM 123 5.5.1 Introduction 123 5.5.2 OFDMA PON 123 5.6 Conclusions 125 References 126 Further Readings 126 6 Hybrid Fiber Access Technologies 127 6.1 Introduction and Background 127 6.2 Evolution of DOCSIS (Data-Over-Cable Service Interface Specification) to Passive Optical Networks 127 6.2.1 Introduction and Background 127 6.2.2 DOCSIS Provisioning of EPON (DPoE) 128 6.2.3 Conclusions for DPoE 135 6.3 Radio and Radio Frequency Signals over Fiber 135 6.3.1 Radio over Fiber (RoF) 136 6.3.2 Baseband Digital Radio Fiber Interfaces 136 6.3.3 Radio Frequency over Glass (RFoG) 138 6.4 IEEE 802.3bn Ethernet Protocol over Coaxial Cable (EPoC) 140 6.5 Conclusions 140 References 141 Further Readings 141 7 DSL Technology – Broadband via Telephone Lines 143 7.1 Introduction to DSL 143 7.2 DSL Compared to Other Access Technologies 144 7.2.1 Security and Reliability 144 7.2.2 Point-to-Point Versus Shared Access 145 7.2.3 Common Facilities for Voice and DSL 146 7.2.4 Bit-rate Capacity 146 7.2.5 Hybrid Access 146 7.2.6 Future Trends for DSL Access 146 7.3 DSL Overview 147 7.3.1 Voice-band Modems 147 7.3.2 The DSL Concept 147 7.3.3 DSL Terminology 149 7.3.4 Introduction to DSL Types 151 7.3.5 DSL Performance Improvement, Repeaters, and Bonding 152 7.3.6 Splitters and Filters for Voice and Data 153 7.3.7 Other Ways to Convey Voice and Data 155 7.4 Transmission Channel and Impairments 156 7.4.1 Signal Attenuation 158 7.4.2 Bridged Taps 159 7.4.3 Loading Coils 162 7.4.4 Return Loss and Insertion Loss 163 7.4.5 Balance 163 7.4.6 Intersymbol Interference (ISI) 163 7.4.7 Noise 164 7.4.8 Transmission Channel Models 170 7.5 DSL Transmission Techniques 170 7.5.1 Duplexing 170 7.5.2 Channel Equalization and Related Techniques 171 7.5.3 Coding 172 References 174 Further Readings 174 8 The Family of DSL Technologies 175 8.1 ADSL 175 8.1.1 G.lite 176 8.1.2 ADSL2 and ADSL2plus 177 8.1.3 ADSL1 and ADSL2plus Performance 178 8.2 VDSL 179 8.2.1 VDSL2 181 8.2.2 VDSL2 Performance 182 8.3 Basic Rate Interface ISDN 184 8.4 HDSL, HDSL2, and HDLS4 185 8.5 SHDSL 185 8.6 G.fast (FTTC DSL) 187 Reference 188 9 Advanced DSL Techniques and Home Networking 189 9.1 Repeaters and Bonding 189 9.2 Dynamic Spectrum Management (DSM) 190 9.3 Vectored Transmission 190 9.4 Home Networking 195 References 195 Further Readings 195 10 DSL Standards 197 10.1 Spectrum Management – ANSI T1.417 197 10.2 G.hs – ITU-T Rec. G.994.1 199 10.3 PLOAM – ITU-T Rec. G.997.1 200 10.4 G.bond – ITU-T Recs. G.998.1, G.998.2, and G.998.3 201 10.5 G.test – ITU-T Rec. G.996.1 202 10.6 G.lt – ITU-T Rec. G.996.2 202 10.7 Broadband Forum DSL Testing Specifications 203 10.8 Broadband Forum TR-069 – Remote Management of CPE 204 References 205 11 The DOCSIS (Data-Over-Cable Service Interface Specification) Protocol 207 11.1 General Introduction 207 11.2 Introduction to MSO Networks 207 11.3 Background on Hybrid Fiber Coax (HFC) Networks 208 11.4 Introduction to DOCSIS 210 11.5 DOCSIS Network Elements 210 11.5.1 CMTS (Cable Modem Terminating System) 211 11.5.2 CM (Cable Modem) 212 11.5.3 FN (Fiber Node) 213 11.5.4 RF Combiner Shelf 213 11.6 Brief History of the DOCSIS Protocol Evolution 213 11.6.1 DOCSIS 1.0 214 11.6.2 DOCSIS 1.1 214 11.6.3 DOCSIS 2.0 214 11.6.4 DOCSIS 3.0 215 11.6.5 Regional History and Considerations 215 11.7 DOCSIS Physical Layer 216 11.7.1 DOCSIS Downstream Transmission 216 11.7.2 DOCSIS Upstream Transmission 218 11.8 Synchronization and Ranging 222 11.8.1 Synchronization 223 11.8.2 Ranging 224 11.9 DOCSIS MAC Sub-Layer 226 11.9.1 Downstream MAC 227 11.9.2 Upstream MAC 228 11.9.3 MAC Management Messages 232 11.9.4 MAC Parameters 233 11.10 CM Provisioning 239 11.11 Security 240 11.12 Introduction to Companion Protocols 242 11.12.1 The PacketCableTM Protocol 242 11.12.2 The OpenCableTM Protocol 242 11.12.3 PacketCable Multimedia (PCMM) 242 11.13 Conclusions 243 References 243 Further Readings 243 12 Broadband in Gas Line (BIG) 245 12.1 Introduction to BIG 245 12.2 Proposed Technology 245 12.3 Potential Drawbacks for BIG 245 12.4 Broadband Sewage Line 247 Reference 247 13 Power Line Communications 249 13.1 Introduction 249 13.2 The Early Years 250 13.3 Narrowband PLC 251 13.3.1 Overview of NB-PLC Standards 252 13.4 Broadband PLC 253 13.4.1 Overview of BB-PLC Standards 254 13.5 Power Grid Topologies 257 13.5.1 Outdoor Topologies: HV, MV, and LV 257 13.5.2 Indoor Topologies 258 13.6 Outdoor and In-Home Channel Characterization 261 13.6.1 Characteristics of the HV Power Line Channel 262 13.6.2 Characteristics of MV Power Line Channel 262 13.6.3 Characteristics of LV Power Line Channel 263 13.6.4 Power Line Noise Characteristics 263 13.7 Power Line Channel Modeling 269 13.7.1 Recent Results on the Modeling of Wireline Channels: Towards a Unified Framework 271 13.8 The IEEE 1901 Broadband over Power Line Standard 273 13.8.1 Overview of Technical Features 273 13.8.2 The MAC and the Two PLCPs 274 13.8.3 Access-Specific Features 275 13.9 PLC and the Smart Grid 277 13.9.1 PLC for MV 279 13.9.2 PLC for LV 279 13.10 Conclusions 283 References 284 Further Reading 285 14 Wireless Broadband Access: Air Interface Fundamentals 287 14.1 Introduction 287 14.2 Duplexing Techniques 287 14.2.1 Frequency-Division Duplex 288 14.2.2 Time-Division Duplex 288 14.3 Physical Layer Concepts 289 14.3.1 The Wireless Channel 289 14.3.2 Diversity 290 14.3.3 Channel Coding 291 14.3.4 Interleaving 291 14.3.5 Multi-Antenna Techniques and Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) 291 14.4 Access Technology Concepts 295 14.4.1 Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) 295 14.4.2 Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) 295 14.4.3 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 295 14.4.4 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 297 14.4.5 MAC Protocols 299 14.5 Cross-Layer Algorithms 300 14.5.1 Link Adaptation 300 14.5.2 Channel-Dependent Scheduling 300 14.5.3 Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) and Hybrid ARQ (HARQ) 302 14.6 Example Application: Satellite Broadband Access 303 14.7 Summary 303 Further Reading 304 15 WiFi: IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN 305 15.1 Introduction 305 15.2 Technology Basics 306 15.2.1 System Overview 306 15.2.2 MAC Layer 308 15.2.3 Physical Layer 311 15.3 Technology Evolution 312 15.3.1 802.11 b 312 15.3.2 802.11 a/g 313 15.3.3 802.11 n 314 15.3.4 802.11 ac 316 15.4 WLAN Network Architecture 318 15.5 TV White Space and 802.11 af 320 15.6 Summary 320 Further Readings 321 16 UMTS: W-CDMA and HSPA 323 16.1 Introduction 323 16.2 Technology Basics 324 16.2.1 Network Architecture 324 16.2.2 Protocol Architecture 325 16.2.3 Physical Layer (L1) 327 16.2.4 Layer-2 334 16.2.5 Radio Resource Control (RRC) 336 16.3 UMTS Technology Evolution 338 16.3.1 Release 99 338 16.3.2 Release 5: High-Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) 339 16.3.3 Release 6: Enhanced Uplink 343 16.3.4 Release 7 347 16.3.5 Release 8 and Beyond 348 16.4 CDMA2000 350 16.5 Summary 351 Further Readings 352 17 Fourth Generation Systems: LTE and LTE-Advanced 353 17.1 Introduction 353 17.1.1 LTE Standardization 353 17.1.2 LTE Requirements 354 17.2 Release 8: The Basics of LTE 355 17.2.1 Network Architecture 355 17.2.2 PDN Connectivity, Bearers, and QoS Architecture 358 17.2.3 Protocol Architecture 360 17.2.4 Layer-1: The Physical Layer 361 17.2.5 Layer-2 and Cross-Layer Algorithms 370 17.2.6 Layer-3: Radio Resource Control (RRC) 380 17.3 Release 9: eMBMS and SON 383 17.3.1 Evolved Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (eMBMS) 384 17.3.2 Self-Organizing Networks (SON) 386 17.4 Release 10: LTE-Advanced 386 17.4.1 Carrier Aggregation 388 17.4.2 Heterogeneous Networks with Small Cells 391 17.5 Future of LTE-Advanced: Release 11 and Beyond 395 17.5.1 Cooperative Multi-Point (CoMP) 396 17.5.2 Release 12 and the Future of LTE 398 17.6 IEEE 802.16 and WiMAX Systems 399 17.7 Summary 400 Further Readings 402 18 Conclusions Regarding Broadband Access Networks and Technologies 403 Index 407

Read more less

Book SynopsisDigital Design of Signal Processing Systems discusses a spectrum of architectures and methods for effective implementation of algorithms in hardware (HW). Encompassing all facets of the subject this book includes conversion of algorithms from floating-point to fixed-point format, parallel architectures for basic computational blocks, Verilog Hardware Description Language (HDL), SystemVerilog and coding guidelines for synthesis. The book also covers system level design of Multi Processor System on Chip (MPSoC); a consideration of different design methodologies including Network on Chip (NoC) and Kahn Process Network (KPN) based connectivity among processing elements. A special emphasis is placed on implementing streaming applications like a digital communication system in HW. Several novel architectures for implementing commonly used algorithms in signal processing are also revealed. With a comprehensive coverage of topics the book provides an appropriate mix of examples to iTrade Review"It can be used in a course on advanced digital design and VLSI signal processing at the senior undergraduate or graduate level." (Booknews, 1 April 2011)Table of ContentsPreface. Acknowledgement. 1 Overview. 1.1 Introduction. 1.2 Fueling the Innovation: Moore’s Law. 1.3 Digital Systems. 1.4 Examples of Digital Systems. 1.5 Components of the Digital Design Process. 1.6 Competing Objectives in Digital Process. 1.7 Synchronous Digital Hardware Systems. 1.8 Design Strategies. References. 2. Using a Hardware Description Language. 2.1 Overview. 2.2 About Verilog. 2.3 System Design Flow. 2.4 Logic Synthesis. 2.5 Using the Verilog HDL. 2.6 Four Levels of Abstraction. 2.7 Verification in Hardware Design. 2.8 Example of a Verification Setup. 2.9 SystemVerilog. Exercises. References. 3. System Design Flow and Fixed-Point Arithmetic. 3.1 Overview. 3.2 System Design Flow. 3.3 Representations and Numbers. 3.4 Floating-point Format. 3.5 Qn.m Format for Fixed-point Arithmetic. 3.6 Floating-Point to Fixed-Point Conversion. 3.7 Block Floating-Point Format. 3.8 Forms of Digital Filter. Exercises. References. 4. Mapping on Fully Dedicated Architecture. 4.1 Introduction. 4.2 Discrete Real-Time Systems. 4.3 Synchronous Digital Hardware Systems. 4.4 Kahn Process Network. 4.5 Methods of Representing DSP Systems. 4.6 Performance Measures. 4.7 Fully Dedicated Architecture. 4.8 DFG to HW Synthesis. Exercises. References. 5. Design Options for Basic Building Blocks. 5.1 Introduction. 5.2 Embedded Processors and Arithmetic Units in FPGAs. 5.3 Instantiation of Embedded Blocks. 5.4 Basic Building Blocks: Introduction. 5.5 Adders. 5.6 Barrel Shifter. 5.7 Cary Save Adder and Compressors. 5.8 Parallel Multipliers. 5.9 Two’s Complement Signed Multiplier. 5.10 Compression Trees for Multi-operand Addition. 5.11 Algorithm Transformations for CSA. Exercises. References. 6. Multiplier-less Multiplication by Constants. 6.1 Introduction. 6.2 Canonic Sign Digit Representation. 6.3 Minimum Signed Digit Representation. 6.4 Multiplication by Constant in Signal Processing Algorithm. 6.5 Optimized DFG Transformation. 6.6 Fully Dedicated Architecture for Direct-form FIR Filter. 6.7 Complexity Reduction. 6.8 Distributed Arithmetic. 6.9 FFT Architecture using FIR Filter Structure. Exercises. References. 7. Pipelining, Retiming, Look-ahead Transformation and Polyphase Decomposition. 7.1 Introduction. 7.2 Pipelining and Retiming. 7.3 Digital Design of Feedback Systems. 7.4 C-slow Retiming. 7.5 Look-ahead Transformation for IIR filters. 7.6 Look-ahead Transformation for Generalized IIR Filters. 7.7 Polyphase Structure for Decimation and Interpolation Applications. 7.8 IIR Filter for Decimation and Interpolation. Exercises. References. 8. Unfolding and Folding Architectures. 8.1 Introduction. 8.2 Unfolding. 8.3 Sampling Rate Considerations. 8.4 Unfolding Techniques. 8.5 Folding Techniques. 8.6 Mathematical Transformation for Folding. 8.7 Algorithmic Transformation. Exercises. References. 9.Designs based on Finite State Machines. 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 Examples of Time-shared Architecture Design. 9.3 Sequencing and Control. 9.4 Algorithmic State Machine Representation. 9.5 FSM Optimization for Low Power and Area. 9.6 Designing for Testability. 9.7 Methods for Reducing Power Dissipation. Exercises. References. 10. Micro-programmed State Machines. 10.1 Introduction. 10.2 Micro-programmed Controller. 10.3 Counter-based State Machine. 10.4 Subroutine Support. 10.5 Nested Subroutine Support. 10.6 Nested Loop Support. 10.7 Examples. Exercises. References. 11. Micro-programmed Adaptive Filtering Applications. 11.1 Introduction. 11.2 Adaptive Filters Configurations. 11.3 Adaptive Algorithms. 11.4 Channel Equalizer using NLMS. 11.5 Echo Canceller. 11.6 Adaptive Algorithms with Micro-programmed State Machines. Exercises. References. 12 CORDIC-based DDFS Architectures. 12.1 Introduction. 12.2 Direct Digital Frequency Synthesizer. 12.3 Design of a Basic DDFS. 12.4 The CORDIC Algorithm. 12.5 Hardware Mapping of Modified CORDIC Algorithm. Exercises. References. 13. Digital Design of Communication Systems. 13.1 Introduction. 13.2 Top-level Design Options. 13.3 Typical Digital Communication System. Exercises. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe most comprehensive book on state-of-the-art smart card technology available Updated with new international standards and specifications, this essential fourth edition now covers all aspects of smart card in a completely revised structure. Its enlarged coverage now includes smart cards for passports and ID cards, health care cards, smart cards for public transport, and Java Card 3.0. New sub-chapters cover near field communication (NFC), single wire protocol (SWP), and multi megabyte smart cards (microcontroller with NAND-Flash). There are also extensive revisions to chapters on smart card production, the security of smart cards (including coverage of new attacks and protection methods), and contactless card data transmission (ISO/IEC 10536, ISO/IEC 14443, ISO/IEC 15693). This edition also features: additional views to the future development of smart cards, such as USB, MMU, SWP, HCI, Flash memory and their usage; new inteTable of ContentsPreface to the Fourth Edition. Symbols and Notation. Abbreviations. 1 Introduction. 1.1 The history of smart cards. 1.2 Card types and applications. 1.3 Standardization. 2 Card Types. 2.1 Embossed cards. 2.2 Magnetic-stripe cards. 2.3 Smart cards. 2.4 Optical memory cards. 3 Physical Properties. 3.1 Card formats. 3.2 Contact field. 3.3 Card body. 3.4 Card materials. 3.5 Card components and security features. 3.6 Chip modules. 4 Electrical Properties. 4.1 Electrical connections. 4.2 Supply voltage. 4.3 Supply current. 4.4 Clock supply. 4.5 Data transmission with T = 0 or T =1. 4.6 Activation and deactivation sequences. 5 Smart Card Microcontrollers. 5.1 Semiconductor technology. 5.2 Processor types. 5.3 Memory types. 5.4 Supplementary hardware. 5.5 Extended temperature range. 6 Information Technology Foundations. 6.1 Data structures. 6.2 Encoding alphanumeric data. 6.3 SDL notation. 6.4 State machines. 6.5 Error detection and correction codes. 6.6 Data compression. 7 Security Foundations. 7.1 Cryptology. 7.2 Hash functions. 7.3 Random numbers. 7.4 Authentication. 7.5 Digital signatures. 7.6 Certificates. 7.7 Key management. 7.8 Identification of persons. 8 Communication with Smart Cards. 8.1 Answer to reset (ATR). 8.2 Protocol Parameter Selection (PPS). 8.3 Message structure: APDUS. 8.4 Secure Data Transmission. 8.5 Logical channels. 8.6 Logical protocols. 8.7 Connecting terminals to higher-level systems. 9 Data Transmission with Contact Cards. 9.1 Physical transmission layer. 9.2 Memory card protocols. 9.3 ISO transmission protocols. 9.4 USB transmission protocol. 9.5 MMC transmission protocol. 9.6 Single-wire protocol (SWP). 10 Contactless Data Transmission. 10.1 Inductive coupling. 10.2 Power transmission. 10.3 Data transmission. 10.4 Capacitive coupling. 10.5 Collision avoidance. 10.6 State of standardization. 10.7 Close-coupling cards (ISO/IEC 10536). 10.8 Remote coupling cards. 10.9 Proximity cards (ISO/IEC 14443). 10.10 Vicinity integrated circuit cards (ISO/IEC 15693). 10.11 Near field communication (NFC). 10.12 FeliCa. 10.13 Mifare. 11 Smart Card Commands. 11.1 File selection commands. 11.2 Read and write commands. 11.3 Search commands. 11.4 File operation commands. 11.5 Commands for authenticating persons. 11.6 Commands for authenticating devices. 11.7 Commands for cryptographic algorithms. 11.8 File management commands. 11.9 Application management commands. 11.10 Completion commands. 11.11 Commands for hardware testing. 11.12 Commands for data transmission. 11.13 Database commands (SCQL). 11.14 Commands for electronic purses. 11.15 Commands for credit and debit cards. 11.16 Application-specific commands. 11.17 Command processing times. 12 Smart Card File Management. 12.1 File structure. 12.2 The life cycle of files. 12.3 File types. 12.4 Application files. 12.5 File names. 12.6 File selection. 12.7 EF file structures. 12.8 File access conditions. 12.9 File attributes. 13 Smart Card Operating Systems. 13.1 Evolution of smart card operating systems. 13.2 Fundamental aspects and tasks. 13.3 Command processing. 13.4 Design and implementation principles. 13.5 Operating system completion. 13.6 Memory organization and memory management. 13.7 File management. 13.8 Sequence control. 13.9 ISO/IEC 7816-9 resource access. 13.10 Atomic operations. 13.11 Multitasking. 13.12 Performance. 13.13 Application management with global platform. 13.14 Downloadable program code. 13.15 Executable native code. 13.16 Open platforms. 13.17 The small-OS smart card operating system. 14 Smart Card Production. 14.1 Tasks and roles in the production process. 14.2 The smart card life cycle. 14.3 Chip and module production. 14.4 Card Body production. 14.5 Combining the card body and the chip. 14.6 Electrical testing of modules. 14.7 Loading static data. 14.8 Loading individual data. 14.9 Envelope stuffing and dispatching. 14.10 Special types of production. 14.11 Termination of card usage. 15 Quality Assurance. 15.1 Card body tests. 15.2 Microcontroller hardware tests. 15.3 Test methods for contactless smart cards. 15.5 Evaluation of hardware and software. 16 Smart Card Security. 16.1 Classification of attacks and attackers. 16.2 A history of attacks. 16.3 Attacks and defense measures during development. 16.4 Attacks and defense measures during production. 16.5 Attacks and defense measures during card usage. 17 Smart Card Terminals. 17.1 Mechanical properties. 17.2 Electrical properties. 17.3 User interface. 17.4 Application interface. 17.5 Security. 18 Smart Cards in Payment Systems. 18.1 Payment transactions with cards. 18.2 Prepaid memory cards. 18.3 Electronic purses. 18.4 EMV Application. 18.5 PayPass and payWave. 18.6 The Eurocheque System in Germany. 19 Smart Cards in Telecommunication Systems. 19.1 Public card phones in Germany. 19.2 Telecommunication. 19.3 Overview of mobile telecommunication systems. 19.4 The GSM system. 19.5 The UMTS system. 19.6 The wireless identification module (WIM). 19.7 Microbrowsers. 20 Smart Cards in Health Care Systems. 20.1 Health insurance cards in Germany. 20.2 Electronic health care cards in Germany. 21 Smart Cards in Transportation Systems. 21.1 Electronic tickets. 21.2 Ski Passes. 21.3 Tachosmart. 21.4 Electronic toll systems. 22 Smart Cards for Identification and Passports. 22.1 FINEID personal ID card. 22.2 ICAO-compliant passports. 23 Smart Cards for IT Security. 23.1 Digital signatures. 23.2 Signature applications compliant with PKCS #15. 23.3 Smart Card Web Server (SCWS). 24 Application Design. 24.1 General information and characteristic data. 24.2 Application generation tools. 24.3 Analyzing an unknown smart card. 25 Appendix. 25.1 Glossary. 25.2 Related reading. 25.3 Bibliography. 25.4 Directory of standards and specifications. 25.5 Web addresses. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe main purpose of this book is to provide a comprehensive treatment of the materials aspects of group-IV, III-V and II-VI semiconductor alloys used in various electronic and optoelectronic devices. The topics covered in this book include the structural, thermal, mechanical, lattice vibronic, electronic, optical and carrier transport properties of such semiconductor alloys. The book reviews not only commonly known alloys (SiGe, AlGaAs, GaInPAs, and ZnCdTe) but also new alloys, such as dilute-carbon alloys (CSiGe, CSiSn, etc.), III-N alloys, dilute-nitride alloys (GaNAs and GaInNAs) and Mg- or Be-based II-VI semiconductor alloys. Finally there is an extensive bibliography included for those who wish to find additional information as well as tabulated values and graphical information on the properties of semiconductor alloys.Table of ContentsSeries Preface. Preface. Abbreviations and Acronyms. Introductory Remarks. A.1 An Alloy and a Compound. A.2 Grimm–Sommerfeld Rule. A.3 An Interpolation Scheme. References. 1 Structural Properties. 1.1 Ionicity. 1.2 Elemental Isotopic Abundance and Molecular Weight. 1.3 Crystal Structure. 1.4 Lattice Constant and Related Parameters. 1.5 Coherent Epitaxy and Strain Problem. 1.6 Structural Phase Transition. 1.7 Cleavage Plane. References. 2 Thermal Properties. 2.1 Melting Point and Related Parameters. 2.2 Specific Heat. 2.3 Debye Temperature. 2.4 Thermal Expansion Coefficient. 2.5 Thermal Conductivity and Diffusivity. References. 3 Elastic Properties. 3.1 Elastic Constant. 3.2 Third-order Elastic Constant. 3.3 Young’s Modulus, Poisson’s Ratio and Similar Properties. 3.4 Microhardness. 3.5 Sound Velocity. References. 4 Lattice Dynamic Properties. 4.1 Phonon Dispersion Relationships. 4.2 Phonon Frequency. 4.3 Mode Grüneisen Parameter. 5 Collective Effects and Some Response Characteristics. 5.1 Piezoelectric Constant. 5.2 Fröhlich Coupling Constant. References. 6 Energy-band Structure: Energy-band Gaps. 6.1 Introductory Remarks. 6.2 Group-IV Semiconductor Alloy. 6.3 III–V Semiconductor Ternary Alloy. 6.4 III–V Semiconductor Quaternary Alloy. 6.5 II–VI Semiconductor Alloy. References. 7 Energy-band Structure: Effective Masses. 7.1 Introductory Remarks. 7.2 Group-IV Semiconductor Alloy. 7.3 III–V Semiconductor Ternary Alloy. 7.4 III–V Semiconductor Quaternary Alloy. 7.5 II–VI Semiconductor Alloy. 7.6 Concluding Remarks. References. 8 Deformation Potentials. 8.1 Intravalley Deformation Potential: I Point. 8.2 Intravalley Deformation Potential: High-symmetry Points. 8.3 Intervalley Deformation Potential. References. 9 Heterojunction Band Offsets and Schottky Barrier Height. 9.1 Heterojunction Band Offsets. 9.2 Schottky Barrier Height. References. 10 Optical Properties. 10.1 Introductory Remarks. 10.2 Group-IV Semiconductor Alloy. 10.3 III–V Semiconductor Ternary Alloy. 10.4 III–V Semiconductor Quaternary Alloy. 10.5 II–VI Semiconductor Alloy. References. 11 Elasto-optic, Electro-optic and Nonlinear Optical Properties. 11.1 Elasto-optic Effect. 11.2 Linear Electro-optic Constant. 11.3 Quadratic Electro-optic Constant. 11.4 Franz–Keldysh Effect. 11.5 Nonlinear Optical Constant. References. 12 Carrier Transport Properties. 12.1 Introductory Remarks. 12.2 Low-field Mobility. 12.3 High-field Transport. 12.4 Minority-carrier Transport. 12.5 Impact Ionization Coefficient. References. Index.

Read more less

Book Synopsis* Comprehensive treatment of the key theories and technologies associated with the design of modern communications networks. * Provides models and analytical methods for evaluating the performance of communications networks and systems.Trade Review“I think the book is very well designed as a textbook for students and as a handbook for engineers.” (Zentralblatt MATH, 1 December 2012) Table of ContentsPreface xiii List of Acronyms xvii List of Symbols xxi 1 Introduction to Telecommunication Services, Networks and Signaling 1 1.1 Telecommunication Services 1 1.1.1 Definition 1 1.1.2 Taxonomies According to Different Criteria 2 1.1.3 Taxonomies of Information Sources 4 1.2 Telecommunication Networks 5 1.2.1 Introduction 5 1.2.2 Access Network and Core Network 9 1.3 Circuit-Switched and Packet-Switched Communication Modes 11 1.4 Introduction to the ISO/OSI Model 13 1.4.1 The Layered Model 13 1.4.2 The ISO/OSI Model 16 1.5 Signaling 18 1.5.1 Introduction 19 1.5.2 Channel-Associated and Common-Channel Signaling 19 1.5.3 SS7 20 1.5.4 PDH Networks 22 1.5.5 SDH Networks 24 References 25 2 Deterministic and Random Signals 27 2.1 Time and Frequency Domain Representation 27 2.1.1 Continuous Time Signals 27 2.1.2 Frequency Domain Representation for Periodic Signals 34 2.1.3 Discrete Time Signals 36 2.2 Energy and Power 39 2.2.1 Energy and Energy Spectral Density 39 2.2.2 Instantaneous and Average Power 42 2.3 Systems and Transformations 46 2.3.1 Properties of a System 46 2.3.2 Filters 47 2.3.3 Sampling 50 2.3.4 Interpolation 51 2.4 Bandwidth 54 2.4.1 Classification of Signals and Systems 56 2.4.2 Uncertainty Principle 58 2.4.3 Practical Definitions of Band 58 2.4.4 Heaviside Conditions 60 2.4.5 Sampling Theorem 61 2.4.6 Nyquist Criterion 64 2.5 The Space of Signals 66 2.5.1 Linear Space 66 2.5.2 Signals as Elements in a Linear Space 70 2.5.3 Gram–Schmidt Orthonormalization in Signal Spaces 71 2.5.4 Vector Representation of Signals 76 2.5.5 Orthogonal Projections onto a Signal Space 79 2.6 Random Variables and Vectors 81 2.6.1 Statistical Description of Random Variables 82 2.6.2 Expectation and Statistical Power 84 2.6.3 Random Vectors 88 2.6.4 Second Order Description of Random Vectors and Gaussian Vectors 94 2.6.5 Complex-Valued Random Variables 97 2.7 Random Processes 99 2.7.1 Definition and Properties 99 2.7.2 Point and Poisson Processes 101 2.7.3 Stationary and Ergodic Random Processes 108 2.7.4 Second Order Description of a WSS Process 110 2.7.5 Joint Second-Order Description of Two Random Processes 115 2.7.6 Second-Order Description of a Cyclostationary Process 117 2.8 Systems with Random Inputs and Outputs 118 2.8.1 Filtering of a WSS Random Process 119 2.8.2 Filtering of a Cyclostationary Random Process 122 2.8.3 Sampling and Interpolation of Stationary Random Processes 123 Appendix: The Complementary Normalized Gaussian Distribution Function 126 Problems 130 References 136 3 Sources of Digital Information 137 3.1 Digital Representation of Waveforms 137 3.1.1 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) 138 3.1.2 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) 140 3.1.3 Quantizer 142 3.1.4 Uniform Quantizers 143 3.1.5 Quantization Error 145 3.1.6 Quantizer SNR 148 3.1.7 Nonuniform Quantizers 150 3.1.8 Companding Techniques and SNR 152 3.2 Examples of Application 158 3.3 Information and Entropy 162 3.3.1 A Measure for Information 162 3.3.2 Entropy 164 3.3.3 Efficiency and Redundancy 171 3.3.4 Information Rate of a Message 172 3.4 Source Coding 173 3.4.1 The Purpose of Source Coding 173 3.4.2 Entropy Coding 174 3.4.3 Shannon Theorem on Source Coding 177 3.4.4 Optimal Source Coding 180 3.4.5 Arithmetic Coding 183 Problems 188 References 196 4 Characterization of Transmission Media and Devices 197 4.1 Two-Terminal Devices 198 4.1.1 Electrical Representation of a Signal Source 198 4.1.2 Electrical Power 198 4.1.3 Measurement of Electrical Power 200 4.1.4 Load Matching and Available Power 201 4.1.5 Thermal Noise 203 4.1.6 Other Sources of Noise 205 4.1.7 Noise Temperature 205 4.2 Two-Port Networks 206 4.2.1 Reference Model 206 4.2.2 Network Power Gain and Matched Network 207 4.2.3 Power Gain in Terms of Electrical Parameters 208 4.2.4 Noise Temperature 209 4.2.5 Noise Figure 211 4.2.6 Cascade of Two-Port Networks 213 4.3 Transmission System Model 216 4.3.1 Electrical Model 216 4.3.2 AWGN Model 217 4.3.3 Signal-to-noise Ratio 217 4.3.4 Narrowband Channel Model and Link Budget 220 4.4 Transmission Media 223 4.4.1 Transmission Lines and Cables 223 4.4.2 Power-Line Communications 229 4.4.3 Optical Fiber 234 4.4.4 Radio Links 237 4.4.5 Underwater Acoustic Propagation 242 Problems 250 References 256 5 Digital Modulation Systems 259 5.1 Introduction 259 5.2 Digital Modulation Theory for an AWGN Channel 260 5.2.1 Transmission of a Single Pulse 260 5.2.2 Optimum Detection 262 5.2.3 Statistical Characterization of Random Vectors 263 5.2.4 Optimum Decision Regions 265 5.2.5 Maximum A Posteriori Criterion 269 5.2.6 Maximum Likelihood Criterion 270 5.2.7 Minimum Distance Criterion 270 5.2.8 Implementation of Minimum Distance Receivers 273 5.2.9 The Theorem of Irrelevance 276 5.3 Binary Modulation 277 5.3.1 Error Probability 277 5.3.2 Antipodal and Orthogonal Signals 282 5.3.3 Single Filter Receivers 285 5.4 M-ary Modulation 288 5.4.1 Bounds on the Error Probability 288 5.4.2 Orthogonal and Biorthogonal Modulations 292 5.5 The Digital Modulation System 296 5.5.1 System Overview 296 5.5.2 Front-end Receiver Implementation 301 5.5.3 The Binary Channel 302 5.5.4 The Inner Numerical Channel 303 5.5.5 Realistic Receiver Structure 306 5.6 Examples of Digital Modulations 307 5.6.1 Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) 307 5.6.2 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) 313 5.6.3 Phase Shift Keying (PSK) 323 5.6.4 Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) 329 5.6.5 Code Division Modulation 333 5.7 Comparison of Digital Modulation Systems 336 5.7.1 Reference Bandwidth and Link Budget 336 5.7.2 Comparison in Terms of Performance, Bandwidth and Spectral Efficiency 338 5.8 Advanced Digital Modulation Techniques 339 5.8.1 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 339 5.8.2 Spread Spectrum Techniques 342 5.9 Digital Transmission of Analog Signals 344 5.9.1 Transmission through a Binary Channel 345 5.9.2 Evaluation of the Overall SNR 346 5.9.3 Digital versus Analog Transmission 348 5.9.4 Digital Transmission over Long Distances: Analog versus Regenerative Repeaters 352 Problems 355 References 370 6 Channel Coding and Capacity 373 6.1 Principles of Channel Coding 373 6.1.1 The Purpose of Channel Coding 373 6.1.2 Binary Block Codes 375 6.1.3 Decoding Criteria. Minimum Distance Decoding 376 6.2 Linear Block Codes 383 6.2.1 Construction of Linear Codes 383 6.2.2 Decoding of Linear Codes 386 6.2.3 Cyclic Codes 390 6.2.4 Specific Classes of Linear Block Codes 392 6.2.5 Performance of Linear Codes 395 6.3 Convolutional Codes 397 6.3.1 Construction and Properties 397 6.3.2 Decoding of Convolutional Codes and the Viterbi Algorithm 401 6.4 Channel Capacity 405 6.4.1 Capacity of a Numerical Channel 405 6.4.2 Capacity of the AWGN Channel 411 6.5 Codes that Approach Capacity 420 6.5.1 Soft Decoding 420 6.5.2 Concatenated Codes 422 6.5.3 Low Density Parity Check Codes 423 Problems 424 References 429 7 Markov Chains Theory 431 7.1 Introduction 432 7.2 Discrete-Time Markov Chains 432 7.2.1 Definition of Discrete-Time MC 432 7.2.2 Transition Probabilities of Discrete-Time MC 435 7.2.3 Sojourn Times of Discrete-Time MC 437 7.2.4 Chapman–Kolmogorov Equations for Discrete-Time MC 439 7.2.5 Transition Diagram of Discrete-Time MC 440 7.2.6 State Probability of Discrete-Time MC 441 7.2.7 Classification of Discrete-Time Markov Chains 444 7.2.8 Asymptotic Behavior of Discrete-Time MC 455 7.3 Continuous-Time Markov Chains 467 7.3.1 Definition of Continuous-Time MC 468 7.3.2 Transition Probabilities of Continuous-Time MC 468 7.3.3 Sojourn Times of Continuous-Time MC 469 7.3.4 Chapman–Kolmogorov Equations for Continuous-Time MC 474 7.3.5 The Infinitesimal Generator Matrix Q 474 7.3.6 Forward and Backward Equations for Continuous-Time MC 476 7.3.7 Embedded Markov Chain 478 7.3.8 Flow Diagram of Continuous-Time MC 482 7.3.9 State Probability of Continuous-Time MC 482 7.3.10 Classification of Continuous-Time MC 487 7.3.11 Asymptotic Behavior of Continuous-Time MC 488 7.4 Birth-Death Processes 492 7.4.1 Definition of BDP 492 7.4.2 Time-Dependent Behavior of BDP 494 7.4.3 Asymptotic Behavior of BDP 500 Problems 507 References 516 8 Queueing Theory 517 8.1 Objective of Queueing Theory 518 8.2 Specifications of a Queueing System 518 8.2.1 The Arrival Process 521 8.2.2 The Service Process 523 8.2.3 The Queueing Structure 524 8.2.4 The Service Discipline 525 8.2.5 Kendall Notation 526 8.3 Performance Characterization of a QS 527 8.3.1 Occupancy Measures 528 8.3.2 Time Measures 529 8.3.3 Traffic Measures 531 8.4 Little’s Law 534 8.5 Markovian Queueing Models 537 8.5.1 The M/M/1 Queueing System 542 8.5.2 The M/M/m Queueing System 554 8.5.3 The M/M/1/K Queueing System 565 8.5.4 The M/M/m/m Queueing System 573 8.5.5 The M/M/m/K Queueing System 577 8.6 The M/G/1 Queueing System 581 8.7 The M/D/1 Queueing System 589 Problems 590 References 596 9 Data Link Layer 597 9.1 Introduction 598 9.2 Medium Access Control 599 9.2.1 Deterministic Access: TDMA and FDMA 604 9.2.2 Time-Division Multiple Access 604 9.2.3 Frequency-Division Multiple Access 606 9.2.4 Comparison between TDMA and FDMA 607 9.2.5 Demand-Based Access: Polling and Token Ring 609 9.2.6 Random Access Protocols: ALOHA and Slotted ALOHA 624 9.2.7 Carrier Sense Multiple Access 633 9.2.8 Performance Comparison of Channel Access Schemes 659 9.3 Automatic Retransmission Request 662 9.3.1 Stop-and-Wait ARQ 666 9.3.2 Go Back N ARQ 668 9.3.3 Selective Repeat ARQ 671 9.3.4 Performance Comparison of ARQ Schemes 675 9.3.5 Optimal PDU Size for ARQ 677 9.4 Examples of LAN Standards 679 9.4.1 Ethernet 679 9.4.2 Wireless Local Area Networks 682 9.4.3 IEEE 802.11 684 9.4.4 Bluetooth 691 Problems 697 References 703 10 Network Layers 707 10.1 Introduction 708 10.1.1 Switching and Connecting 708 10.1.2 Networks and Network Topology 710 10.2 Routing 714 10.2.1 Routing Objectives 715 10.2.2 Routing Algorithms 722 10.2.3 Technical Aspects of Routing Implementation 732 10.2.4 Routing Strategies 738 10.2.5 Routing Protocols 744 10.3 The Internet and IP 747 10.3.1 The Internet Protocol 748 10.3.2 IP Addressing System 750 10.3.3 Control Protocols 756 10.4 The Transport Layer 759 10.4.1 User Datagram Protocol 762 10.4.2 Transmission Control Protocol 763 10.5 The Application Layer 769 10.5.1 Domain Name Server 769 10.5.2 Email Exchange and the World Wide Web 772 References 774 Index 777

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe high level of technical detail included in standards specifications can make it difficult to find the correlation between the standard specifications and the theoretical results. This book aims to cover both of these elements to give accessible information and support to readers.Trade Review“This is a timely book on wireless communications, with twelve chapters covering theoretical results and material of Standards … The effort dedicated by the authors to bridge technology with standards for sure will be very well appreciated by the readers.” (IEEE Communications Magazine, 1 June 2012)Table of ContentsAbout the Editors xi List of Contributors xiii Acknowledgements xv Introduction xvii 1 Channel Models and Reliable Communication 1 Evgenii Krouk, Andrei Ovchinnikov, and Jussi Poikonen 1.1 Principles of Reliable Communication 1 1.2 AWGN 2 1.2.1 Baseband Representation of AWGN 2 1.2.2 From Sample SNR to Eb /N0 5 1.3 Fading Processes in Wireless Communication Channels 6 1.3.1 Large-Scale Fading (Path Loss) 7 1.3.2 Medium-Scale Fading (Shadowing) 10 1.3.3 Small-Scale Fading (Multipath Propagation) 11 1.4 Modelling Frequency-Nonselective Fading 14 1.4.1 Rayleigh and Rice Distributions 14 1.4.2 Maximum Doppler Frequency Shift 15 1.4.3 Wide-Sense Stationary Stochastic Processes 15 1.4.4 Rayleigh and Rice Models for Frequency-Nonselective Fading 15 1.4.5 SNR in Rayleigh Fading Channels 17 1.5 WSSUS Models for Frequency-Selective Fading 18 1.5.1 Basic Principles 18 1.5.2 Definitions 19 References 19 2 Modulation 21 Sergei Semenov 2.1 Basic Principles of Bandpass Modulation 21 2.1.1 The Complex Representation of a Bandpass Signal 22 2.1.2 Representation of Signal with Basis Functions 27 2.1.3 Pulse Shaping 31 2.1.4 Matched Filter 35 2.2 PSK 38 2.2.1 BPSK 38 2.2.2 QPSK 43 2.2.3 M-PSK 47 2.2.4 DPSK 48 2.2.5 OQPSK 50 2.2.6 π/4-QPSK 51 2.3 MSK 54 2.3.1 GMSK 54 2.4 QAM 60 2.5 OFDM 66 References 81 3 Block Codes 83 Grigorii Kabatiansky, Evgenii Krouk, Andrei Ovchinnikov, and Sergei Semenov 3.1 Main Definitions 83 3.2 Algebraic Structures 86 3.3 Linear Block Codes 94 3.4 Cyclic Codes 98 3.5 Bounds on Minimum Distance 114 3.6 Minimum Distance Decoding 119 3.7 Information Set Decoding 120 3.8 Hamming Codes 128 3.9 Reed-Solomon Codes 131 3.10 BCH Codes 133 3.11 Decoding of BCH Codes 135 3.12 Sudan Algorithm and Its Extensions 139 3.13 LDPC Codes 146 3.13.1 LDPC Constructions 148 3.13.2 Decoding of LDPC Codes 154 References 157 4 Convolutional Codes and Turbo-Codes 161 Sergei Semenov and Andrey Trofimov 4.1 Convolutional Codes Representation and Encoding 161 4.2 Viterbi Decoding Algorithm 169 4.2.1 Hard Decision Viterbi Algorithm 170 4.2.2 Soft Decision Viterbi Algorithm 174 4.3 List Decoding 178 4.4 Upper Bound on Bit Error Probability for Viterbi Decoding 178 4.5 Sequential Decoding 183 4.5.1 Stack Algorithm 184 4.5.2 Fano Algorithm 187 4.6 Parallel-Concatenated Convolutional Codes and Soft Input Soft Output Decoding 190 4.7 SISO Decoding Algorithms 195 4.7.1 MAP Algorithm and Its Variants 195 4.7.2 Soft-In/Soft-Out Viterbi Algorithm (SOVA) 201 References 205 4.a Modified Chernoff Bound and Some Applications 206 Andrey Trofimov References 219 5 Equalization 221 Sergei Semenov 5.1 Equalization with Filtering 222 5.1.1 Zero-Forcing Equalization 226 5.1.2 MMSE Equalization 228 5.1.3 DFE 233 5.2 Equalization Based on Sequence Estimation 239 5.2.1 MLSE Equalization 239 5.2.2 Sphere Detection 242 5.3 RAKE Receiver 251 5.4 Turbo Equalization 254 5.5 Performance Comparison 259 References 261 6 ARQ 263 Evgenii Krouk 6.1 Basic ARQ Schemes 263 6.1.1 Basic Concepts 263 6.1.2 Stop-and-Wait ARQ 265 6.1.3 ARQ with N Steps Back (Go Back N, GBN) 267 6.1.4 ARQ with Selective Repeat (SR) 268 6.2 Hybrid ARQ 269 6.2.1 Type-I Hybrid ARQ (Chase Combining) 269 6.2.2 Type-II Hybrid ARQ (Full IR) 270 6.2.3 Type-III Hybrid ARQ (Partial IR) 273 References 275 7 Coded Modulation 277 Andrey Trofimov 7.1 Principle of Coded Modulation 277 7.1.1 Illustrative Example 280 7.2 Modulation Mapping by Signal Set Partitioning 282 7.3 Ungerboeck Codes 285 7.4 Performance Estimation of TCM System 287 7.4.1 Squared Distance Structure of PSK and QAM Constellations 287 7.4.2 Upper Bound on Error Event Probability and Bit Error Probability for TCM 289 References 299 8 MIMO 301 Andrei Ovchinnikov and Sergei Semenov 8.1 MIMO Channel Model 301 8.1.1 Fading in Narrowband Channels 301 8.1.2 Fading Countermeasures: Diversity 303 8.1.3 MIMO Channel model 306 8.2 Space-Time Coding 310 8.2.1 Maximum Ratio Combining 310 8.2.2 Definition of Space-Time Codes 311 8.2.3 Space-Time Codes with Two Transmit Antennas 312 8.2.4 Construction Criteria for Space-Time Codes 314 8.3 Orthogonal Designs 317 8.3.1 Real Orthogonal Designs 317 8.3.2 Complex Orthogonal Designs 319 8.3.3 Decoding of Space-Time Codes 323 8.3.4 Error Probability for Orthogonal Space-Time Codes 326 8.4 Space-Time Trellis Codes 327 8.4.1 Space-Time Trellis Codes 327 8.4.2 Space-Time Turbo Trellis Codes 330 8.5 Differential Space-Time Codes 334 8.6 Spatial Multiplexing 337 8.6.1 General Concepts 337 8.6.2 V-BLAST 339 8.6.3 D-BLAST 341 8.6.4 Turbo-BLAST 342 8.7 Beamforming 344 References 348 9 Multiple Access Methods 351 Dmitry Osipov, Jarkko Paavola, and Jussi Poikonen 9.1 Frequency Division Multiple Access 353 9.1.1 Spectral Reuse 355 9.1.2 OFDMA 356 9.1.3 SC-FDMA 358 9.1.4 WDMA 359 9.2 Time Division Multiple Access 359 9.3 Code Division Multiple Access 360 9.3.1 Direct-Sequence CDMA 360 9.3.2 Frequency-Hopping CDMA 366 9.4 Advanced MA Methods 367 9.4.1 Multicarrier CDMA 367 9.4.2 Random OFDMA 368 9.4.3 DHA-FH-CDMA 369 9.5 Random Access Multiple Access Methods 371 9.6 Conclusions 376 References 376 10 Standardization in IEEE 802.11, 802.16 381 Tuomas Laine, Zexian Li, Andrei Malkov, and Prabodh Varshney 10.1 IEEE Overview 381 10.2 Standard Development Process 384 10.3 IEEE 802.11 Working Group 385 10.4 IEEE 802.16 Working Group 386 10.5 IEEE 802.11 388 10.5.1 Overview and Scope 388 10.5.2 Frequency Plan 388 10.5.3 Reference Model 389 10.5.4 Architecture 390 10.5.5 802.11a 391 10.5.6 802.11b 392 10.5.7 802.11g 394 10.5.8 802.11n 395 10.5.9 Future Developments 397 10.6 IEEE 802.16x 398 10.6.1 Key PHY Features of the IEEE 802.16e 398 10.6.2 IEEE 802.16m 400 References 428 11 Standardization in 3GPP 429 Asbjørn Grøvlen, Kari Hooli, Matti Jokimies, Kari Pajukoski, Sergei Semenov, and Esa Tiirola 11.1 Standardization Process and Organization 429 11.1.1 General 429 11.1.2 Organization of 3GPP 430 11.1.3 Organization of TSG RAN 430 11.1.4 Standardization Process 431 11.1.5 3GPP Releases 432 11.1.6 Frequency Bands and 3GPP Releases 433 11.1.7 RAN Specifications 433 11.2 3G WCDMA 433 11.2.1 WCDMA Concept. Logical, Transport and Physical Channels 434 11.2.2 Logical and Transport Channels 435 11.2.3 Physical Channels 440 11.2.4 Coding, Spreading and Modulation 459 11.2.5 Cell Search 476 11.2.6 Power Control Procedures 476 11.2.7 Handover Procedures 479 11.2.8 Transmit Diversity 486 11.3 3.5G HSDPA/HSUPA 490 11.3.1 HSDPA 490 11.3.2 HSUPA 536 11.3.3 CPC 574 11.4 4G LTE 577 11.4.1 LTE Downlink 577 11.4.2 LTE Uplink 592 References 602 12 CDMA2000 and Its Evolution 605 Andrei Ovchinnikov 12.1 Development of 3G CDMA2000 Standard 605 12.1.1 IS-95 Family of Standards (cdmaOne) 605 12.1.2 IS-2000 Family of Standards 606 12.2 Reverse Channel of Physical Layer in CDMA2000 Standard 611 12.2.1 Reverse Channel Structure 611 12.2.2 Forward Error Correction (FEC) 612 12.2.3 Codeword Symbols Repetition 615 12.2.4 Puncturing 618 12.2.5 Block Interleaving 618 12.2.6 Orthogonal Modulation and Orthogonal Spreading 619 12.2.7 Direct Sequence Spreading and Quadrature Spreading 619 12.2.8 Frame Quality Indicator 622 12.3 Forward Channel of Physical Layer in CDMA2000 Standard 623 12.3.1 Forward Channel Structure 623 12.3.2 Forward Error Correction 625 12.3.3 Codeword Symbols Repetition 629 12.3.4 Puncturing 630 12.3.5 Block Interleaving 630 12.3.6 Sequence Repetition 630 12.3.7 Data Scrambling 630 12.3.8 Orthogonal and Quasi-Orthogonal Spreading 631 12.3.9 Quadrature Spreading 631 12.3.10 Frame Quality Indicator 631 12.4 Architecture Model of CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Standard 631 12.4.1 Structure of Physical Layer Packet 632 12.4.2 FCS Computation 632 12.5 Access Terminal of the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Standard 633 12.5.1 Power Control 633 12.5.2 Reverse Channel Structure 633 12.5.3 Modulation Parameters and Transmission Rates 634 12.5.4 Access Channel 634 12.5.5 Reverse Traffic Channel 636 12.5.6 Encoding 640 12.5.7 Channel Interleaving and Repetition 641 12.5.8 Quadrature Spreading 641 12.6 Access Network of the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Standard 643 12.6.1 Forward Channel Structure 643 12.6.2 Modulation Parameters and Transmission Rates 645 12.6.3 Pilot Channel 645 12.6.4 Forward MAC Channel 645 12.6.5 Control Channel 647 12.6.6 Forward Traffic Channel 647 12.6.7 Time-Division Multiplexing 651 12.6.8 Quadrature Spreading 651 References 654 Index 655

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe microelectronics evolution has given rise to many modern benefits but has also changed design methods and attitudes to learning. Technology advancements shifted focus from simple circuits to complex systems with major attention to high-level descriptions. The design methods moved from a bottom-up to a top-down approach. For today's students, the most beneficial approach to learning is this top-down method that demonstrates a global view of electronics before going into specifics. Franco Maloberti uses this approach to explain the fundamentals of electronics, such as processing functions, signals and their properties. Here he presents a helpful balance of theory, examples, and verification of results, while keeping mathematics and signal processing theory to a minimum. Key features: Presents a new learning approach that will greatly improve students' ability to retain key concepts in electronics studies Match the evolution of ComputTable of ContentsPreface xvii List of Abbreviations xxi 1 Overview, Goals and Strategy 1 1.1 Good Morning 1 1.2 Planning the Trip 4 1.3 Electronic Systems 5 1.3.1 Meeting a System 8 1.4 Transducers 11 1.4.1 Sensors 11 1.4.2 Actuators 14 1.5 What is the Role of the Computer? 16 1.6 Goal and Learning Strategies 19 1.6.1 Teamwork Attitude 20 1.6.2 Creativity and Execution 20 1.6.3 Use of Simulation Tools 21 1.7 Self Training, Examples and Simulations 21 1.7.1 Role of Examples and Computer Simulations 22 1.8 Business Issues, Complexity and CAD Tools 23 1.8.1 CAD Tools 23 1.8.2 Analog Simulator 24 1.8.3 Device and Macro-block Models 25 1.8.4 Digital Simulation 26 1.9 ELectronic VIrtual Student Lab (ElvisLab) 27 Problems 29 2 Signals 31 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 Types of Signals 35 2.3 Time and Frequency Domains 45 2.4 Continuous-time and Discrete-time Signals 51 2.4.1 The Sampling Theorem 55 2.5 Using Sampled-Data Signals 57 2.5.1 The z-transform 58 2.6 Discrete-amplitude Signals 59 2.6.1 Quantized Signal Coding 64 2.7 Signals Representation 65 2.7.1 The Decibel 67 2.8 DFT and FFT 69 2.9 Windowing 70 2.10 Good and Bad Signals 75 2.10.1 Offset 76 2.10.2 Interference 77 2.10.3 Harmonic Distortion 78 2.10.4 Noise 82 2.11 THD, SNR, SNDR, Dynamic Range 86 Problems 89 Additional Computer Examples 92 3 Electronic Systems 95 3.1 Introduction 95 3.2 Electronics for Entertainment 96 3.2.1 Electronic Toys 96 3.2.2 Video Game and Game Console 100 3.2.3 Personal Media Player 101 3.3 Systems for Communication 103 3.3.1 Wired Communication Systems 103 3.3.2 Wireless: Voice, Video and Data 104 3.3.3 RFID 107 3.4 Computation and Processing 108 3.4.1 Microprocessor 110 3.4.2 Digital Signal Processor 111 3.4.3 Data Storage 112 3.5 Measure, Safety, and Control 114 3.5.1 The Weather Station 115 3.5.2 Data Fusion 116 3.5.3 Systems for Automobile Control 119 3.5.4 Noise-canceling Headphones 120 3.6 System Partitioning 122 3.7 System Testing 124 Problems 125 Additional Computer Examples 126 4 Signal Processing 127 4.1 What is Signal Processing? 127 4.2 Linear and Non-linear Processing 130 4.3 Analog and Digital Processing 135 4.3.1 Timing for Signal Processing 138 4.4 Response of Linear Systems 141 4.4.1 Time Response of Linear Systems 141 4.4.2 Frequency Response of Linear Systems 144 4.4.3 Transfer Function 147 4.5 Bode Diagram 151 4.5.1 Amplitude Bode Diagram 151 4.5.2 Phase Bode Diagram 155 4.6 Filters 158 4.6.1 Analog Design and Sensitivity 162 4.6.2 Sampled-data Analog and Digital Design 167 4.7 Non-linear Processing 169 Problems 175 Additional Computer Examples 179 5 Circuits for Systems 181 5.1 Introduction 181 5.2 Processing with Electronic Circuits 183 5.2.1 Electronic Interfaces 184 5.2.2 Driving Capability 188 5.2.3 Electrostatic Discharge Protection 191 5.2.4 DC and AC Coupling 193 5.2.5 Ground and Ground for Signal 197 5.2.6 Single-ended and Differential Circuits 198 5.3 Inside Analog Electronic Blocks 200 5.3.1 Simple Continuous-time Filters 201 5.3.2 Two-Pole Filters 205 5.4 Continuous-time Linear Basic Functions 205 5.4.1 Addition of Signals 206 5.4.2 The Virtual Ground Concept 209 5.4.3 Multiplication by a Constant 212 5.4.4 Integration and Derivative 214 5.5 Continuous-time Non-linear Basic Functions 221 5.5.1 Threshold Detection 222 5.5.2 Analog Multiplier 223 5.6 Analog Discrete-time Basic Operations 225 5.7 Limits in Real Analog Circuits 227 5.8 Circuits for Digital Design 229 5.8.1 Symbols of Digital Blocks 230 5.8.2 Implementation of Digital Functions 233 Problems 234 6 Analog Processing Blocks 239 6.1 Introduction 239 6.2 Choosing the Part 241 6.3 Operational Amplifier 242 6.3.1 Ideal Operation 242 6.4 Op-Amp Description 244 6.4.1 General Description 244 6.4.2 Absolute Maximum Ratings and Operating Rating 244 6.4.3 Electrical Characteristics 245 6.4.4 Packaging and Board Assembly 254 6.4.5 Small-signal Equivalent Circuit 255 6.5 Use of Operational Amplifiers 257 6.5.1 Inverting Amplifier 257 6.5.2 Non-inverting Amplifier 261 6.5.3 Superposing Inverting and Non-inverting Amplification 262 6.5.4 Weighted Addition of Signals (with Inversion) 264 6.5.5 Unity Gain Buffer 265 6.5.6 Integration and Derivative 266 6.5.7 Generalized Amplifier 268 6.6 Operation with Real Op-amps 269 6.6.1 Input Offset 269 6.6.2 Finite Gain 270 6.6.3 Non-ideal Input and Output Impedances 271 6.6.4 Finite Bandwidth 276 6.6.5 Slew-rate Output Clipping and Non-linear Gain 277 6.7 Operational Transconductance Amplifier 280 6.7.1 Use of the OTA 280 6.8 Comparator 284 6.8.1 Comparator Data Sheet 286 6.8.2 Clocked Comparator 289 Problems 289 7 Data Converters 293 7.1 Introduction 293 7.2 Types and Specifications 295 7.2.1 General Features 295 7.2.2 Electrical Static Specifications 296 7.2.3 Electrical Dynamic Specifications 299 7.2.4 Digital and Switching Data 302 7.3 Filters for Data Conversion 303 7.3.1 Anti-aliasing and Reconstruction Filters 303 7.3.2 Oversampling and Digital Filters 305 7.4 Nyquist-rate DAC 306 7.4.1 Resistor-based Architectures 306 7.4.2 Capacitance-based Architectures 312 7.4.3 Parasitic Insensitivity 314 7.4.4 Hybrid Resistive–capacitive Architectures 316 7.4.5 Current-based Architectures 317 7.5 Nyquist-rate ADC 321 7.5.1 Flash Converter 322 7.5.2 Two-step Flash 324 7.5.3 Pipeline Converters 327 7.5.4 Slow Converters 328 7.6 Oversampled Converter 332 7.6.1 Quantization Error and Quantization Noise 332 7.6.2 Benefit of the Noise View 336 7.6.3 Sigma–Delta Modulators 337 7.7 Decimation and Interpolation 342 Problems 344 8 Digital Processing Circuits 347 8.1 Introduction 347 8.2 Digital Waveforms 348 8.2.1 Data Transfer and Data Communication 350 8.2.2 Propagation Delay 354 8.2.3 Asynchronous and Synchronous Operation 355 8.3 Combinational and Sequential Circuits 356 8.3.1 Combinational Circuits 356 8.3.2 Sequential Circuits 358 8.4 Digital Architectures with Memories 360 8.5 Logic and Arithmetic Functions 362 8.5.1 Adder and Subtracter 362 8.5.2 Multiplier 365 8.5.3 Registers and Counters 371 8.6 Circuit Design Styles 377 8.6.1 Complex Programmable Logic Devices (CPLDs) and FPGAs 378 8.7 Memory Circuits 381 8.7.1 Random-access Memory Organization and Speed 382 8.7.2 Types of Memories 384 8.7.3 Circuits for Memories 386 Problems 391 9 Basic Electronic Devices 393 9.1 Introduction 393 9.2 The Diode 395 9.2.1 Equivalent Circuit 398 9.2.2 Parasitic Junction Capacitance 400 9.2.3 Zener and Avalanche Breakdown 402 9.2.4 Doping and p–n Junction 403 9.2.5 Diode in Simple Circuits 407 9.3 The MOS Transistor 411 9.3.1 MOS Physical Structure 412 9.3.2 Voltage–current Relationship 414 9.3.3 Approximating the I–V Equation 416 9.3.4 Parasitic Effects 417 9.3.5 Equivalent Circuit 419 9.4 MOS Transistor in Simple Circuits 421 9.5 The Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT) 423 9.5.1 The BJT Physical Structure 426 9.5.2 BJT Voltage–current Relationships 427 9.5.3 Bipolar Transistor Model and Parameters 431 9.5.4 Darlington Configuration 433 9.5.5 Small-signal Equivalent Circuit of the Bipolar Transistor 434 9.6 Bipolar Transistor in Simple Circuits 435 9.7 The Junction Field-effect Transistor (JFET) 439 9.8 Transistors for Power Management 441 Problems 443 10 Analog Building Cells 445 10.1 Introduction 445 10.2 Use of Small-signal Equivalent Circuits 446 10.3 Inverting Voltage Amplifier 447 10.4 MOS Inverter with Resistive Load 451 10.4.1 Small-signal Analysis of the CMOS Inverter 452 10.5 CMOS Inverter with Active Load 454 10.5.1 CMOS Inverter with Active Load: Small-signal Analysis 456 10.6 Inverting Amplifier with Bipolar Transistors 459 10.6.1 Small-signal Analysis of BJT Inverters 462 10.7 Source and Emitter Follower 471 10.7.1 Small-signal Equivalent Circuit of Source and Emitter Follower 473 10.7.2 Small-signal Input and Output Resistance 474 10.8 Cascode with Active Load 477 10.8.1 Equivalent Resistances 480 10.8.2 Cascode with Cascode Load 482 10.9 Differential Pair 483 10.10 Current Mirror 487 10.10.1 Equivalent Circuit 488 10.10.2 Current Mirror with High Output Resistance 489 10.10.3 Differential to Single-ended Converter 490 10.11 Reference Generators 492 Problems 493 11 Digital Building Cells 495 11.1 Introduction 495 11.2 Logic Gates 496 11.2.1 Gate Specifications 497 11.3 Boolean Algebra and Logic Combinations 499 11.4 Combinational Logic Circuits 504 11.4.1 Exclusive-OR and Exclusive-NOR 505 11.4.2 Half-adder and Full-adder 507 11.4.3 Logic Comparators 509 11.4.4 Decoders 511 11.4.5 Parity Generator and Parity Checker 513 11.5 Sequential Logic Circuits 514 11.5.1 Latch 514 11.5.2 Gated Latch 516 11.5.3 Edge-triggered Flip-flop 517 11.5.4 Master–slave Flip-flop 519 11.6 Flip-flop Specifications 520 11.7 Transistor Schemes of Logic Cells 522 11.7.1 CMOS Inverter 522 11.7.2 Dynamic Response of CMOS Inverters 526 11.7.3 Power Consumption 529 11.7.4 NOR and NAND 530 11.7.5 Pass-gate Logic 532 11.7.6 Tri-state Gates 534 11.7.7 Dynamic Logic Circuits 535 Problems 536 12 Feedback 539 12.1 Introduction 539 12.2 General Configuration 540 12.2.1 Linear Feedback Systems 541 12.3 Properties of Negative Feedback 543 12.3.1 Gain Sensitivity 545 12.3.2 Bandwidth Improvement 545 12.3.3 Reducing Distortion 547 12.3.4 Noise Behavior 549 12.4 Types of Feedback 551 12.4.1 Real Input and Output Ports 553 12.4.2 Input and Output Resistances 555 12.5 Stability 559 12.5.1 Frequency Response of Feedback Circuits 559 12.5.2 Gain and Phase Margins 562 12.5.3 Compensation of Operational Amplifiers 563 12.6 Feedback Networks 566 Problems 568 13 Power Conversion and Power Management 571 13.1 Introduction 571 13.2 Voltage Rectifiers 572 13.2.1 Half-wave Rectifier 573 13.2.2 Full-wave Rectifier 577 13.3 Voltage Regulators 581 13.3.1 Zener Regulator 581 13.3.2 Series Linear Regulator 583 13.3.3 Series Linear Regulator with Adjustable Voltage 588 13.3.4 Supply of Active Blocks and Drop-out Voltage 590 13.3.5 Low Drop-out (LDO) Voltage Regulator 591 13.3.6 Protection Circuits 593 13.4 Switched Capacitor Regulator 595 13.4.1 Power Consumed by SC Regulators 597 13.4.2 Generation of Negative Voltages 599 13.4.3 Voltage Ripple 600 13.5 Charge Pump 601 13.6 Switching Regulators 604 13.6.1 Buck Converter 605 13.6.2 Boost Converter 607 13.6.3 Buck–boost Converter 610 13.6.4 Loop Control and Switches 611 13.6.5 Efficiency of Switching Regulator 613 13.7 Power Management 615 13.7.1 Rechargeable Batteries 615 13.7.2 Power Harvesting 618 13.7.3 Power Management Techniques 620 Problems 622 14 Signal Generation and Signal Measurement 623 14.1 Introduction 623 14.2 Generation of Simple Waveforms 624 14.3 Oscillators 627 14.3.1 Wien-bridge Oscillator 629 14.3.2 Phase-shift Oscillator 630 14.3.3 Ring Oscillator 631 14.3.4 Tank and Harmonic Oscillator 634 14.3.5 Digitally Controlled and Voltage-controlled Oscillator (VCO) 636 14.3.6 Quartz Oscillator 638 14.3.7 Phase Noise and Jitter 640 14.3.8 Phase-locked Oscillator 642 14.4 DAC-based Signal Generator 647 14.5 Signal Measurement 649 14.5.1 Multimeter 651 14.5.2 Oscilloscope 652 14.5.3 Logic Analyzer 655 14.6 Spectrum Analyzer 657 Problems 658 Index 661

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis practical text is an essential source of information for those wanting to know how to deal with the variability that exists in every engineering situation. Using typical engineering data, it presents the basic statistical methods that are relevant, in simple numerical terms.Trade Review"This book appeals to students in all areas of engineering and also managers concerned with the quality of manufactured products. Academic engineers can use this text to teach their students basic practical skills in quality management and statistical engineering, without getting involved in the complex mathematical theory of probability on which statistical science is dependent." (Zentralblatt MATH, 1 August 2013) "This is a timely text that helps to support the development of these important skills. Its no-nonsense and useful approach gives a flavour of the main statistical tools and techniques in basic language." (Quality World, December 2009) "It deserves to become a standard text to encourage the best in industrial practice." (Engineering & Technology, November 2009)Table of ContentsAbout the Author vii Foreword ix Preface xi Acknowledgements xiii 1 Nature of Variability 1 2 Basic Statistical Methods 9 2.1 Variance 9 2.2 Divisor ‘n’ or ‘n-1’? 11 2.3 Covariance and Correlation 13 2.4 Normal Distribution 14 2.5 Cumulative Frequency Distributions 18 2.6 Binomial Distribution 20 2.7 Poisson Distribution 25 2.8 Chi-squared Distribution 26 Bibliography 31 3 Production 33 3.1 Sampling Inspection 34 3.2 Control Charts 37 3.3 Cusum Charts 40 3.4 Significance Tests 43 3.5 Analysis of Variance 49 3.6 Linear Regression 52 Bibliography 57 4 Engineering Design 61 4.1 Variance Synthesis 61 4.2 Factors of Safety 68 4.3 Tolerances 69 4.4 The Future 71 Bibliography 72 5 Research and Development 75 5.1 Design of Experiments 76 5.2 Evolutionary Operation 95 5.3 Multiple Regression 96 5.4 More Statistical Methods 111 Bibliography 115 6 Background 119 6.1 Measurement 119 6.2 Statistical Computing 121 Bibliography 127 7 Quality Management 129 7.1 Quality Planning 129 7.2 Quality Organisation 135 7.3 Directing the Quality Function 137 7.4 Controlling the Quality Function 140 7.5 Statistical Engineering 141 Bibliography 142 8 Conclusion 145 Appendix A: Guidelines 147 Appendix B: Recommended Books 151 Appendix C: Periodicals 161 Appendix D: Supplementary Bibliography 165 Appendix E: Statistical Tables 171 Index 173

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis text outlines the concepts of modern control theory applied to the design and analysis of general flight control systems in a concise and mathematically rigorous style. It presents a comprehensive treatment of atmospheric and space flight control systems including aircraft, rockets and entry vehicles and spacecraft.Table of ContentsSeries Preface xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Notation and Basic Definitions 1 1.2 Control Systems 3 1.2.1 Linear Tracking Systems 7 1.2.2 Linear Time-Invariant Tracking Systems 9 1.3 Guidance and Control of Flight Vehicles 10 1.4 Special Tracking Laws 13 1.4.1 Proportional Navigation Guidance 13 1.4.2 Cross-Product Steering 16 1.4.3 Proportional-Integral-Derivative Control 19 1.5 Digital Tracking System 24 1.6 Summary 25 Exercises 26 References 28 2 Optimal Control Techniques 29 2.1 Introduction 29 2.2 Multi-variable Optimization 31 2.3 Constrained Minimization 33 2.3.1 Equality Constraints 34 2.3.2 Inequality Constraints 38 2.4 Optimal Control of Dynamic Systems 41 2.4.1 Optimality Conditions 43 2.5 The Hamiltonian and the Minimum Principle 44 2.5.1 Hamilton–Jacobi–Bellman Equation 45 2.5.2 Linear Time-Varying System with Quadratic Performance Index 47 2.6 Optimal Control with End-Point State Equality Constraints 48 2.6.1 Euler–Lagrange Equations 50 2.6.2 Special Cases 50 2.7 Numerical Solution of Two-Point Boundary Value Problems 52 2.7.1 Shooting Method 54 2.7.2 Collocation Method 57 2.8 Optimal Terminal Control with Interior Time Constraints 61 2.8.1 Optimal Singular Control 62 2.9 Tracking Control 63 2.9.1 Neighboring Extremal Method and Linear Quadratic Control 64 2.10 Stochastic Processes 69 2.10.1 Stationary Random Processes 75 2.10.2 Filtering of Random Noise 77 2.11 Kalman Filter 77 2.12 Robust Linear Time-Invariant Control 81 2.12.1 LQG/LTR Method 82 2.12.2 H2/H?E?E Design Methods 89 2.13 Summary 96 Exercises 98 References 101 3 Optimal Navigation and Control of Aircraft 103 3.1 Aircraft Navigation Plant 104 3.1.1 Wind Speed and Direction 110 3.1.2 Navigational Subsystems 112 3.2 Optimal Aircraft Navigation 115 3.2.1 Optimal Navigation Formulation 116 3.2.2 Extremal Solution of the Boundary-Value Problem: Long-Range Flight Example 119 3.2.3 Great Circle Navigation 121 3.3 Aircraft Attitude Dynamics 128 3.3.1 Translational and Rotational Kinetics 132 3.3.2 Attitude Relative to the Velocity Vector 135 3.4 Aerodynamic Forces and Moments 136 3.5 Longitudinal Dynamics 139 3.5.1 Longitudinal Dynamics Plant 142 3.6 Optimal Multi-variable Longitudinal Control 145 3.7 Multi-input Optimal Longitudinal Control 147 3.8 Optimal Airspeed Control 148 3.8.1 LQG/LTR Design Example 149 3.8.2 H?E?E Design Example 160 3.8.3 Altitude and Mach Control 166 3.9 Lateral-Directional Control Systems 173 3.9.1 Lateral-Directional Plant 173 3.9.2 Optimal Roll Control 177 3.9.3 Multi-variable Lateral-Directional Control: Heading-Hold Autopilot 180 3.10 Optimal Control of Inertia-Coupled Aircraft Rotation 183 3.11 Summary 189 Exercises 192 References 194 4 Optimal Guidance of Rockets 195 4.1 Introduction 195 4.2 Optimal Terminal Guidance of Interceptors 195 4.3 Non-planar Optimal Tracking System for Interceptors: 3DPN 199 4.4 Flight in a Vertical Plane 208 4.5 Optimal Terminal Guidance 211 4.6 Vertical Launch of a Rocket (Goddard’s Problem) 216 4.7 Gravity-Turn Trajectory of Launch Vehicles 219 4.7.1 Launch to Circular Orbit: Modulated Acceleration 220 4.7.2 Launch to Circular Orbit: Constant Acceleration 227 4.8 Launch of Ballistic Missiles 228 4.8.1 Gravity-Turn with Modulated Forward Acceleration 232 4.8.2 Modulated Forward and Normal Acceleration 233 4.9 Planar Tracking Guidance System 237 4.9.1 Stability, Controllability, and Observability 241 4.9.2 Nominal Plant for Tracking Gravity-Turn Trajectory 243 4.10 Robust and Adaptive Guidance 247 4.11 Guidance with State Feedback 250 4.11.1 Guidance with Normal Acceleration Input 250 4.12 Observer-Based Guidance of Gravity-Turn Launch Vehicle 254 4.12.1 Altitude-Based Observer with Normal Acceleration Input 255 4.12.2 Bi-output Observer with Normal Acceleration Input 260 4.13 Mass and Atmospheric Drag Modeling 266 4.14 Summary 274 Exercises 275 References 275 5 Attitude Control of Rockets 277 5.1 Introduction 277 5.2 Attitude Control Plant 277 5.3 Closed-Loop Attitude Control 281 5.4 Roll Control System 281 5.5 Pitch Control of Rockets 282 5.5.1 Pitch Program 282 5.5.2 Pitch Guidance and Control System 283 5.5.3 Adaptive Pitch Control System 288 5.6 Yaw Control of Rockets 294 5.7 Summary 295 Exercises 295 Reference 296 6 Spacecraft Guidance Systems 297 6.1 Introduction 297 6.2 Orbital Mechanics 297 6.2.1 Orbit Equation 298 6.2.2 Perifocal and Celestial Frames 299 6.2.3 Time Equation 301 6.2.4 Lagrange’s Coefficients 304 6.3 Spacecraft Terminal Guidance 305 6.3.1 Minimum Energy Orbital Transfer 307 6.3.2 Lambert’s Theorem 311 6.3.3 Lambert’s Problem 313 6.3.4 Lambert Guidance of Rockets 322 6.3.5 Optimal Terminal Guidance of Re-entry Vehicles 327 6.4 General Orbital Plant for Tracking Guidance 334 6.5 Planar Orbital Regulation 339 6.6 Optimal Non-planar Orbital Regulation 345 6.7 Summary 352 Exercises 352 References 355 7 Optimal Spacecraft Attitude Control 357 7.1 Introduction 357 7.2 Terminal Control of Spacecraft Attitude 357 7.2.1 Optimal Single-Axis Rotation of Spacecraft 358 7.3 Multi-axis Rotational Maneuvers of Spacecraft 364 7.4 Spacecraft Control Torques 375 7.4.1 Rocket Thrusters 375 7.4.2 Reaction Wheels, Momentum Wheels and Control Moment Gyros 377 7.4.3 Magnetic Field Torque 378 7.5 Satellite Dynamics Plant for Tracking Control 379 7.6 Environmental Torques 380 7.6.1 Gravity-Gradient Torque 382 7.7 Multi-variable Tracking Control of Spacecraft Attitude 383 7.7.1 Active Attitude Control of Spacecraft by Reaction Wheels 385 7.8 Summary 389 Exercises 389 References 390 Appendix A: Linear Systems 391 A.1 Definition 391 A.2 Linearization 392 A.3 Solution to Linear State Equations 392 A.3.1 Homogeneous Solution 393 A.3.2 General Solution 393 A.4 Linear Time-Invariant System 394 A.5 Linear Time-Invariant Stability Criteria 395 A.6 Controllability of Linear Time-Invariant Systems 395 A.7 Observability of Linear Time-Invariant Systems 395 A.8 Transfer Matrix 396 A.9 Singular Value Decomposition 396 A.10 Linear Time-Invariant Control Design 397 A.10.1 Regulator Design by Eigenstructure Assignment 397 A.10.2 Regulator Design by Linear Optimal Control 398 A.10.3 Linear Observers and Output Feedback Compensators 398 References 400 Appendix B: Stability 401 B.1 Preliminaries 401 B.2 Stability in the Sense of Lagrange 402 B.3 Stability in the Sense of Lyapunov 404 B.3.1 Asymptotic Stability 406 B.3.2 Global Asymptotic Stability 406 B.3.3 Lyapunov’s Theorem 407 B.3.4 Krasovski’s Theorem 408 B.3.5 Lyapunov Stability of Linear Systems 408 References 408 Appendix C: Control of Underactuated Flight Systems 409 C.1 Adaptive Rocket Guidance with Forward Acceleration Input 409 C.2 Thrust Saturation and Rate Limits (Increased Underactuation) 415 C.3 Single- and Bi-output Observers with Forward Acceleration Input 417 References 432 Index 433

Read more less

Book SynopsisFollowing the success of the first edition, this thoroughly updated second edition of Image Processing: The Fundamentals will ensure that it remains the ideal text for anyone seeking an introduction to the essential concepts of image processing. New material includes image processing and colour, sine and cosine transforms, Independent Component Analysis (ICA), phase congruency and the monogenic signal and several other new topics. These updates are combined with coverage of classic topics in image processing, such as orthogonal transforms and image enhancement, making this a truly comprehensive text on the subject. Key features: Presents material at two levels of difficulty: the main text addresses the fundamental concepts and presents a broad view of image processing, whilst more advanced material is interleaved in boxes throughout the text, providing further reference for those who wish to examine each technique in depth. Contains a largTrade Review"Although many books are available in the area of image processing, this book Image Processing, the Fundamentals by Maria Petrou and Costas Petrou explains this subject in a distinctive way. In this book, the authors have attempted to capture new insights with a lot of examples in all the fundamental topics of image processing." (IAPR Newsletter, 1 January 2011) "This book is an ideal teaching resource for both undergraduate and postgraduate students. It will also be of value to researchers of various disciplines from medicine to mathematics with a professional interest in image processing." (Zentralblatt MATH, 2010) Table of ContentsPreface xxiii 1 Introduction 1 2 Image Transformations 47 2.1 Singular value decomposition 51 2.2 Haar, Walsh and Hadamard transforms 74 2.3 Discrete Fourier transform 94 2.4 The even symmetric discrete cosine transform (EDCT) 138 2.5 The odd symmetric discrete cosine transform (ODCT) 149 2.6 The even antisymmetric discrete sine transform (EDST) 157 2.7 The odd antisymmetric discrete sine transform (ODST) 167 3 Statistical Description of Images 177 3.1 Random fields 178 3.2 Karhunen-Loeve transform 201 3.3 Independent component analysis 234 4 Image Enhancement 293 4.1 Elements of linear filter theory 294 4.2 Reducing high frequency noise 311 4.3 Reducing low frequency interference 351 4.4 Histogram manipulation 367 4.5 Generic deblurring algorithms 383 5 Image Restoration 395 5.1 Homogeneous linear image restoration: inverse filtering 396 5.2 Homogeneous linear image restoration: Wiener filtering 419 5.3 Homogeneous linear image restoration: Constrained matrix inversion 436 5.4 Inhomogeneous linear image restoration: the whirl transform 468 5.5 Nonlinear image restoration: MAP estimation 490 5.6 Geometric image restoration 513 6 Image Segmentation and Edge Detection 527 6.1 Image segmentation 528 6.2 Edge detection 591 6.3 Phase congruency and the monogenic signal 625 7 Image Processing for Multispectral Images 669 7.1 Image preprocessing for multispectral images 671 7.2 The physics and psychophysics of colour vision 700 7.3 Colour image processing in practice 742 Bibliographical notes 775 References 777 Index 781

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a broad survey of models and efficient algorithms for Nonnegative Matrix Factorization (NMF). This includes NMF's various extensions and modifications, especially Nonnegative Tensor Factorizations (NTF) and Nonnegative Tucker Decompositions (NTD).Trade Review"[A] focus on the algorithms that are most useful in practice and aim to derive and implement, in MATLAB, efficient and simple iterative algorithms that work with real-world data." (Book News, December 2009)Table of ContentsPreface. Acknowledgments. Glossary of Symbols and Abbreviations. 1 Introduction – Problem Statements and Models. 1.1 Blind Source Separation and Linear Generalized Component Analysis. 1.2 Matrix Factorization Models with Nonnegativity and Sparsity Constraints. 1.2.1 Why Nonnegativity and Sparsity Constraints? 1.2.2 Basic NMF Model. 1.2.3 Symmetric NMF. 1.2.4 Semi-Orthogonal NMF. 1.2.5 Semi-NMF and Nonnegative Factorization of Arbitrary Matrix. 1.2.6 Three-factor NMF. 1.2.7 NMF with Offset (Affine NMF). 1.2.8 Multi-layer NMF. 1.2.9 Simultaneous NMF. 1.2.10 Projective and Convex NMF. 1.2.11 Kernel NMF. 1.2.12 Convolutive NMF. 1.2.13 Overlapping NMF. 1.3 Basic Approaches to Estimate Parameters of Standard NMF. 1.3.1 Large-scale NMF. 1.3.2 Non-uniqueness of NMF and Techniques to Alleviate the Ambiguity Problem. 1.3.3 Initialization of NMF. 1.3.4 Stopping Criteria. 1.4 Tensor Properties and Basis of Tensor Algebra. 1.4.1 Tensors (Multi-way Arrays) – Preliminaries. 1.4.2 Subarrays, Tubes and Slices. 1.4.3 Unfolding – Matricization. 1.4.4 Vectorization. 1.4.5 Outer, Kronecker, Khatri-Rao and Hadamard Products. 1.4.6 Mode-n Multiplication of Tensor by Matrix and Tensor by Vector, Contracted Tensor Product. 1.4.7 Special Forms of Tensors. 1.5 Tensor Decompositions and Factorizations. 1.5.1 Why Multi-way Array Decompositions and Factorizations? 1.5.2 PARAFAC and Nonnegative Tensor Factorization. 1.5.3 NTF1 Model. 1.5.4 NTF2 Model. 1.5.5 Individual Differences in Scaling (INDSCAL) and Implicit Slice Canonical Decomposition Model (IMCAND). 1.5.6 Shifted PARAFAC and Convolutive NTF. 1.5.7 Nonnegative Tucker Decompositions. 1.5.8 Block Component Decompositions. 1.5.9 Block-Oriented Decompositions. 1.5.10 PARATUCK2 and DEDICOM Models. 1.5.11 Hierarchical Tensor Decomposition. 1.6 Discussion and Conclusions. 2 Similarity Measures and Generalized Divergences. 2.1 Error-induced Distance and Robust Regression Techniques. 2.2 Robust Estimation. 2.3 Csiszár Divergences. 2.4 Bregman Divergence. 2.4.1 Bregman Matrix Divergences. 2.5 Alpha-Divergences. 2.5.1 Asymmetric Alpha-Divergences. 2.5.2 Symmetric Alpha-Divergences. 2.6 Beta-Divergences. 2.7 Gamma-Divergences. 2.8 Divergences Derived from Tsallis and Rényi Entropy. 2.8.1 Concluding Remarks. 3 Multiplicative Iterative Algorithms for NMF with Sparsity Constraints. 3.1 Extended ISRA and EMML Algorithms: Regularization and Sparsity. 3.1.1 Multiplicative NMF Algorithms Based on the Squared Euclidean Distance. 3.1.2 Multiplicative NMF Algorithms Based on Kullback-Leibler I-Divergence. 3.2 Multiplicative Algorithms Based on Alpha-Divergence. 3.2.1 Multiplicative Alpha NMF Algorithm. 3.2.2 Generalized Multiplicative Alpha NMF Algorithms. 3.3 Alternating SMART: Simultaneous Multiplicative Algebraic Reconstruction Technique. 3.3.1 Alpha SMART Algorithm. 3.3.2 Generalized SMART Algorithms. 3.4 Multiplicative NMF Algorithms Based on Beta-Divergence. 3.4.1 Multiplicative Beta NMF Algorithm. 3.4.2 Multiplicative Algorithm Based on the Itakura-Saito Distance. 3.4.3 Generalized Multiplicative Beta Algorithm for NMF. 3.5 Algorithms for Semi-orthogonal NMF and Orthogonal Three-Factor NMF. 3.6 Multiplicative Algorithms for Affine NMF. 3.7 Multiplicative Algorithms for Convolutive NMF. 3.7.1 Multiplicative Algorithm for Convolutive NMF Based on Alpha-Divergence. 3.7.2 Multiplicative Algorithm for Convolutive NMF Based on Beta-Divergence. 3.7.3 Efficient Implementation of CNMF Algorithm. 3.8 Simulation Examples for Standard NMF. 3.9 Examples for Affine NMF. 3.10 Music Analysis and Decomposition Using Convolutive NMF. 3.11 Discussion and Conclusions. 4 Alternating Least Squares and Related Algorithms for NMF and SCA Problems. 4.1 Standard ALS Algorithm. 4.1.1 Multiple Linear Regression – Vectorized Version of ALS Update Formulas. 4.1.2 Weighted ALS. 4.2 Methods for Improving Performance and Convergence Speed of ALS Algorithms. 4.2.1 ALS Algorithm for Very Large-scale NMF. 4.2.2 ALS Algorithm with Line-Search. 4.2.3 Acceleration of ALS Algorithm via Simple Regularization. 4.3 ALS Algorithm with Flexible and Generalized Regularization Terms. 4.3.1 ALS with Tikhonov Type Regularization Terms. 4.3.2 ALS Algorithms with Sparsity Control and Decorrelation. 4.4 Combined Generalized Regularized ALS Algorithms. 4.5 Wang-Hancewicz Modified ALS Algorithm. 4.6 Implementation of Regularized ALS Algorithms for NMF. 4.7 HALS Algorithm and its Extensions. 4.7.1 Projected Gradient Local Hierarchical Alternating Least Squares (HALS) Algorithm. 4.7.2 Extensions and Implementations of the HALS Algorithm. 4.7.3 Fast HALS NMF Algorithm for Large-scale Problems. 4.7.4 HALS NMF Algorithm with Sparsity, Smoothness and Uncorrelatedness Constraints. 4.7.5 HALS Algorithm for Sparse Component Analysis and Flexible Component Analysis. 4.7.6 Simplified HALS Algorithm for Distributed and Multi-task Compressed Sensing. 4.7.7 Generalized HALS-CS Algorithm. 4.7.8 Generalized HALS Algorithms Using Alpha-Divergence. 4.7.9 Generalized HALS Algorithms Using Beta-Divergence. 4.8 Simulation Results. 4.8.1 Underdetermined Blind Source Separation Examples. 4.8.2 NMF with Sparseness, Orthogonality and Smoothness Constraints. 4.8.3 Simulations for Large-scale NMF. 4.8.4 Illustrative Examples for Compressed Sensing. 4.9 Discussion and Conclusions. 5 Projected Gradient Algorithms. 5.1 Oblique Projected Landweber (OPL) Method. 5.2 Lin’s Projected Gradient (LPG) Algorithm with Armijo Rule. 5.3 Barzilai-Borwein Gradient Projection for Sparse Reconstruction (GPSR-BB). 5.4 Projected Sequential Subspace Optimization (PSESOP). 5.5 Interior Point Gradient (IPG) Algorithm. 5.6 Interior Point Newton (IPN) Algorithm. 5.7 Regularized Minimal Residual Norm Steepest Descent Algorithm (RMRNSD). 5.8 Sequential Coordinate-Wise Algorithm (SCWA). 5.9 Simulations. 5.10 Discussions. 6 Quasi-Newton Algorithms for Nonnegative Matrix Factorization. 6.1 Projected Quasi-Newton Optimization. 6.1.1 Projected Quasi-Newton for Frobenius Norm. 6.1.2 Projected Quasi-Newton for Alpha-Divergence. 6.1.3 Projected Quasi-Newton for Beta-Divergence. 6.1.4 Practical Implementation. 6.2 Gradient Projection Conjugate Gradient. 6.3 FNMA algorithm. 6.4 NMF with Quadratic Programming. 6.4.1 Nonlinear Programming. 6.4.2 Quadratic Programming. 6.4.3 Trust-region Subproblem. 6.4.4 Updates for A. 6.5 Hybrid Updates. 6.6 Numerical Results. 6.7 Discussions. 7 Multi-Way Array (Tensor) Factorizations and Decompositions. 7.1 Learning Rules for the Extended Three-way NTF1 Problem. 7.1.1 Basic Approaches for the Extended NTF1 Model. 7.1.2 ALS Algorithms for NTF1. 7.1.3 Multiplicative Alpha and Beta Algorithms for the NTF1 Model. 7.1.4 Multi-layer NTF1 Strategy. 7.2 Algorithms for Three-way Standard and Super Symmetric Nonnegative Tensor Factorization. 7.2.1 Multiplicative NTF Algorithms Based on Alpha- and Beta-Divergences. 7.2.2 Simple Alternative Approaches for NTF and SSNTF. 7.3 Nonnegative Tensor Factorizations for Higher-Order Arrays. 7.3.1 Alpha NTF Algorithm. 7.3.2 Beta NTF Algorithm. 7.3.3 Fast HALS NTF Algorithm Using Squared Euclidean Distance. 7.3.4 Generalized HALS NTF Algorithms Using Alpha- and Beta-Divergences. 7.3.5 Tensor Factorization with Additional Constraints. 7.4 Algorithms for Nonnegative and Semi-Nonnegative Tucker Decompositions. 7.4.1 Higher Order SVD (HOSVD) and Higher Order Orthogonal Iteration (HOOI) Algorithms. 7.4.2 ALS Algorithm for Nonnegative Tucker Decomposition. 7.4.3 HOSVD, HOOI and ALS Algorithms as Initialization Tools for Nonnegative Tensor Decomposition. 7.4.4 Multiplicative Alpha Algorithms for Nonnegative Tucker Decomposition. 7.4.5 Beta NTD Algorithm. 7.4.6 Local ALS Algorithms for Nonnegative TUCKER Decompositions. 7.4.7 Semi-Nonnegative Tucker Decomposition. 7.5 Nonnegative Block-Oriented Decomposition. 7.5.1 Multiplicative Algorithms for NBOD. 7.6 Multi-level Nonnegative Tensor Decomposition - High Accuracy Compression and Approximation. 7.7 Simulations and Illustrative Examples. 7.7.1 Experiments for Nonnegative Tensor Factorizations. 7.7.2 Experiments for Nonnegative Tucker Decomposition. 7.7.3 Experiments for Nonnegative Block-Oriented Decomposition. 7.7.4 Multi-Way Analysis of High Density Array EEG – Classification of Event Related Potentials. 7.7.5 Application of Tensor Decompositions in Brain Computer Interface – Classification of Motor Imagery Tasks. 7.7.6 Image and Video Applications. 7.8 Discussion and Conclusions. 8 Selected Applications. 8.1 Clustering. 8.1.1 Semi-Binary NMF. 8.1.2 NMF vs. Spectral Clustering. 8.1.3 Clustering with Convex NMF. 8.1.4 Application of NMF to Text Mining. 8.1.5 Email Surveillance. 8.2 Classification. 8.2.1 Musical Instrument Classification. 8.2.2 Image Classification. 8.3 Spectroscopy. 8.3.1 Raman Spectroscopy. 8.3.2 Fluorescence Spectroscopy. 8.3.3 Hyperspectral Imaging. 8.3.4 Chemical Shift Imaging. 8.4 Application of NMF for Analyzing Microarray Data. 8.4.1 Gene Expression Classification. 8.4.2 Analysis of Time Course Microarray Data. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisHolographic Data Storage: From Theory to Practical Systems is a primer on the design and building of a holographic data storage system covering the physics, Servo, Data Channel, Recording Materials, and optics behind holographic storage, the requirements of a functioning system, and its integration into real-life systems. Later chapters highlight recent developments in holographic storage which have enabled readiness for commercial implementation and discuss the general outlook for the technology, including the transition from professional to consumer markets and the possibilities for mass reproduction.Table of ContentsForeword. Preface. List of Contributors. 1 Introduction (Kevin Curtis, Lisa Dhar and Liz Murphy). 1.1 The Road to Holographic Data Storage. 1.2 Holographic Data Storage. 1.3 Holographic Data Storage Markets. 1.4 Summary. Acknowledgements. References. 2 Introduction to Holographic Data Recording (William Wilson, Alan Hoskins, Mark Ayres, Adrian Hill and Kevin Curtis). 2.1 Introduction. 2.2 Brief History of Holography. 2.3 Holographic Basics. 2.4 Volume Holograms. 2.5 Multiplexing Techniques. 2.6 Address Space Limitations on Holographic Densities. 2.7 Summary. References. 3 Drive Architectures (Kevin Curtis, Adrian Hill and Mark Ayres). 3.1 Introduction. 3.2 Collinear/Coaxial Architecture. 3.3 InPhase Architecture. 3.4 Monocular Architecture. Acknowledgements. References. 4 Drive Components (Kevin Curtis and Brad Sissom). 4.1 Introduction. 4.2 Laser. 4.3 SLM. 4.4 Image Sensor. 4.5 Beam Scanners. 4.6 Isoplanatic Lenses. 4.7 Polytopic Filter. Acknowledgements. References. 5 Materials for Holography (Kevin Curtis, Lisa Dhar and William Wilson). 5.1 Introduction. 5.2 Requirements for Materials for HDS. 5.3 Candidate Material Systems. 5.4 Summary. References. 6 Photopolymer Recording Materials (Fred Askham and Lisa Dhar). 6.1 Introduction to Photopolymers. 6.2 Photopolymer Design. 6.3 Holographic Recording in Photopolymers. 6.4 Rewritable. References. 7 Media Manufacturing (David Michaels and Lisa Dhar). 7.1 Introduction. 7.2 Tapestry Media Overview. 7.3 Media Manufacturing Process. 7.4 Specifications for the Tapestry Media. 7.5 Manufacturing of Higher Performance Tapestry Media. Acknowledgements. References. 8 Media Testing (Kevin Curtis, Lisa Dhar, Alan Hoskins, Mark Ayres and Edeline Fotheringham). 8.1 Introduction. 8.2 Plane Wave Material Testing. 8.3 Bulk Index Measurements. 8.4 Scatter Tester. 8.5 Spectrophotometers/Spectrometers. 8.6 Scanning Index Microscope. 8.7 Interferometers. 8.8 Research Edge Wedge Tester. 8.9 Defect Detection. 8.10 Digital Testing of Media Properties. 8.11 Accelerated Lifetime Testing. Acknowledgements. References. 9 Tapestry Drive Implementation (Kevin Curtis, Ken Anderson, Adrian Hill and Aaron Wegner). 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 Optical Implementation. 9.3 Mechanical Implementation. 9.4 Electronics and Firmware. 9.5 Basic Build Process. 9.6 Defect Detection. 9.7 Read and Write Transfer Rate Models. 9.8 Summary. Acknowledgements. References. 10 Data Channel Modeling (Lakshmi Ramamoorthy, V. K. Vijaya Kumar, Alan Hoskins and Kevin Curtis). 10.1 Introduction. 10.2 Physical Model. 10.3 Channel Identification. 10.4 Simple Channel Models. Acknowledgements. References. 11 Data Channel (Adrian Hill, Mark Ayres, Kevin Curtis and Tod Earhart). 11.1 Overview. 11.2 Data Page Formatting. 11.3 Data Channel Metrics. 11.4 Oversampled Detection. 11.5 Page Level Error Correction. 11.6 Fixed-Point Simulation of Data Channel. 11.7 Logical Format. Acknowledgements. References. 12 Future Data Channel Research (Mark Ayres and Kevin Curtis). 12.1 Introduction. 12.2 Homodyne Detection. 12.3 Phase Quadrature Holographic Multiplexing. 12.4 Other Research Directions. Acknowledgements. References. 13 Writing Strategies and Disk Formatting (Kevin Curtis, Edeline Fotheringham and Paul Smith). 13.1 Introduction. 13.2 Media Consumption. 13.3 Scheduling and Write Pre-compensation. 13.4 Media Formatting. Acknowledgements. References. 14 Servo and Drive Control (Alan Hoskins, Mark Ayres and Kevin Curtis). 14.1 Introduction. 14.2 Holographic System Tolerances. 14.3 Algorithms. 14.4 Drive Controls. Acknowledgements. References. 15 Holographic Read Only Memories (Ernest Chuang and Kevin Curtis). 15.1 Introduction. 15.2 System Design Considerations. 15.3 Reader Design. 15.4 Media Design. 15.5 Two-Step Mastering. 15.6 Mastering and Replicating Disk Media. 15.7 Sub-mastering System. 15.8 Mastering System. 15.9 Replicating System. 15.10 Margin Tester System. 15.11 Experimental Results. 15.12 Asymmetric Phase Conjugation. 15.13 Non Fourier Plane Polytopic Filter Designs. 15.14 Cost Estimates. 15.15 Product Roadmap. 15.16 Summary and Future Improvements. Acknowledgements. References. 16 Future Developments (Kevin Curtis, Lisa Dhar, Liz Murphy and Adrian Hill). 16.1 Technology Evolution. 16.2 New Applications. 16.3 Summary. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisNetwork Routing: Fundamentals, Applications and Emerging Technologies serves as single point of reference for both advanced undergraduate and graduate students studying network routing, covering both the fundamental and more moderately advanced concepts of routing in traditional data networks such as the Internet, and emerging routing concepts currently being researched and developed, such as cellular networks, wireless ad hoc networks, sensor networks, and low power networks.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Foreword xv Preface xvii About the Companion Website xxi Part I Fundamental Concepts 1 1 Introduction to Network Routing 3 1.1 Introduction to Networks 3 1.2 Network Architecture and Standards 6 1.3 Glimpse at the Network Layer 13 1.4 Addressing in TCP/IP Networks 16 1.5 Overview of Routing 20 1.6 Delivery, Forwarding, Routing, and Switching 21 1.7 Routing Taxonomy 23 1.8 Host Mobility and Routing 26 References 27 Abbreviations/Terminologies 28 Questions 30 Exercises 32 2 Basic Routing Algorithms 35 2.1 Introduction to Routing Algorithms 35 2.2 Routing Strategies 40 2.2.1 Non]Adaptive Algorithms 43 2.2.2 Adaptive Algorithms 44 2.2.3 Flooding 44 2.3 Static Shortest Path Routing Algorithms 47 2.4 Dynamic Shortest Path Routing Algorithms 50 2.5 Stochastic Routing Algorithms 53 References 55 Abbreviations/Terminologies 55 Questions 56 Exercises 57 3 Fundamental Routing Protocols 59 3.1 Routing Protocols 59 3.2 Distance Vector Routing 61 3.2.1 Working of the Protocol 61 3.2.2 Convergence of Distance Vector Table 62 3.2.3 Issues in Distance Vector Routing 63 3.2.4 Improvements in Distance Vector Routing 67 3.2.5 Advantages and Disadvantages 68 3.3 Link State Routing 68 3.3.1 Working of the Protocol 68 3.3.2 Routing Tables 70 3.4 Path Vector Routing 71 3.4.1 Working of the Protocol 72 3.4.2 Advantages and Disadvantages 74 3.5 Unicast, Multicast, and Broadcast Routing 77 References 82 Abbreviations/Terminologies 83 Questions 83 Exercises 84 Part II Routing with Quality]of]Service and Traffic Engineering 89 4 Quality]of]Service Routing 91 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 QoS Measures 95 4.3 Differentiated and Integrated Services 97 4.4 QoS Routing Algorithms 103 4.5 QoS Unicast Routing Protocols 106 4.6 QoS Multicast Routing Protocols 108 4.7 QoS Best]Effort Routing 112 References 113 Abbreviations/Terminologies 116 Questions 117 5 Routing and MPLS Traffic Engineering 119 5.1 MPLS Fundamentals 119 5.2 Traffic Engineering Routing Algorithms 120 5.3 Minimum Interference Routing Algorithm 121 5.3.1 The Algorithm 122 5.3.2 Limitations of MIRA 123 5.4 Profile]Based Routing Algorithm 124 5.5 Dynamic Online Routing Algorithm 125 5.6 Wang et al.’s Algorithm 126 5.7 Random Races Algorithm 126 References 127 Abbreviations/Terminologies 128 Questions 128 Exercises 129 Part III Routing on the Internet 131 6 Interior Gateway Protocols 133 6.1 Introduction 133 6.2 Distance Vector Protocols 135 6.2.1 Routing Information Protocol 137 6.2.2 Interior Gateway Routing Protocol 141 6.3 Link State Protocols 143 6.3.1 Open Shortest Path First Protocol 144 6.3.2 Intermediate System to Intermediate System Protocol 148 References 152 Abbreviations/Terminologies 152 Questions 153 Exercises 155 7 Exterior Gateway Protocol 159 7.1 Introduction 159 7.1.1 Hosts vs Gateways 161 7.1.2 Gateway]to]Gateway Protocol 162 7.1.3 Autonomous System 163 7.1.4 Characteristics of EGP 165 7.2 Exterior Gateway Protocol 166 7.2.1 Evolution of EGP Standards 166 7.2.2 EGP Terminology and Topology 166 7.2.3 EGP Operation Model 167 7.3 Border Gateway Protocol 169 7.3.1 Router Connectivity and Terminology 169 7.3.2 Routing Information Base 181 7.3.3 BGP Operation 182 7.3.4 Decision Process 184 7.3.5 Route Selection Process 185 References 188 Abbreviations/Terminologies 189 Questions 190 Exercises 191 Part IV Other Routing Contexts 195 8 Routing in ATM Networks 197 8.1 Introduction 197 8.1.1 ATM Frames 199 8.1.2 ATM Connection 199 8.1.3 ATM Architecture 203 8.1.4 Service Categories 204 8.2 PNNI Routing 206 8.2.1 PNNI Interface 207 8.2.2 PNNI Hierarchy 207 8.2.3 Building the Network Topology 209 8.2.4 Peer Group Leader 210 8.2.5 Advertizing Topology 211 8.2.6 Setting up Connection 212 References 213 Abbreviations/Terminologies 213 Questions 214 Exercises 216 9 Routing in Cellular Wireless Networks 219 9.1 Introduction 219 9.2 Basics of Cellular Wireless Networks 220 9.3 Resource Allocation 229 9.4 Routing in GSM Networks 231 9.4.1 Architecture 232 9.4.2 Call Routing 234 9.5 Challenges in Mobile Computing 235 References 238 Abbreviations/Terminologies 240 Questions 241 Exercises 242 10 Routing in Wireless Ad Hoc Networks 245 10.1 Introduction 245 10.1.1 Basics of Wireless Ad Hoc Networks 248 10.1.2 Issues with Existing Protocols 256 10.2 Table]Driven (Proactive) Routing Protocols 258 10.3 On]Demand (Reactive) Routing Protocols 260 10.4 Hybrid Routing Protocols 266 10.5 Hierarchical Routing Protocols 267 10.6 Geographic Routing Protocols 268 10.7 Power]Aware Routing Protocols 274 References 276 Abbreviations/Terminologies 278 Questions 280 Exercises 281 11 Routing in Wireless Sensor Networks 285 11.1 Basics of Wireless Sensor Networks 285 11.1.1 Hardware Architecture of Sensor Node 287 11.1.2 Network Topology 289 11.1.3 Design Factors 290 11.1.4 Classification of Routing Protocol 292 11.2 Routing Challenges in Wireless Sensor Networks 293 11.2.1 Self]Healing Networks 295 11.2.2 Security Threats 296 11.3 Flat Routing Protocols 297 11.4 Hierarchical Routing Protocols 303 11.5 Location]Based Routing Protocols 308 11.6 Multipath Routing Protocols 310 11.7 Query]Based Routing Protocols 312 11.8 Negotiation]Based Routing Protocols 314 11.9 QoS Routing Protocols 315 11.9.1 Challenges 316 11.9.2 Approach to QoS Routing 316 11.9.3 Protocols 317 References 317 Abbreviations/Terminologies 321 Questions 322 Exercises 324 12 Routing in 6LoWPAN 327 12.1 Introduction 327 12.1.1 IP for Smart Objects 328 12.1.2 6LoWPAN 329 12.1.3 ZigBee 330 12.1.4 ZigBee vs 6LoWPAN 330 12.2 6LoWPAN Fundamentals 331 12.2.1 Architecture 332 12.2.2 Header Format and Compression 332 12.2.3 Network Topology 335 12.2.4 Neighbor Discovery 335 12.2.5 Routing 336 12.3 Interoperability of 6LoWPAN 337 12.4 Applications 338 12.5 Security Considerations and Research Areas 341 References 342 Abbreviations/Terminologies 345 Questions 346 Exercises 348 Part V Advanced Concepts 349 13 Security in Routing 351 13.1 Introduction 351 13.1.1 Network Sniffer 353 13.1.2 Denial of Service Attack 357 13.1.3 Social Engineering 358 13.1.4 Packet Filtering 359 13.2 Attack Surface 360 13.2.1 Types of Attack Surface 361 13.2.2 Attack Surface and System Resources 361 13.2.3 Attack Surface Metric 362 13.2.4 Reduction in Attack Surface 362 13.3 Networked Battlefield 363 13.4 Mobile Agents 365 13.4.1 Architecture and Framework 368 13.4.2 Life Cycle 369 13.4.3 Challenges 370 13.5 Cognitive Security 370 13.5.1 Solution Concept 371 13.5.2 Cognitive Capabilities 372 13.5.3 General Capabilities 373 References 373 Abbreviations/Terminologies 374 Questions 375 Exercises 376 14 Reliability and Fault]Tolerant and Delay]Tolerant Routing 377 14.1 Fundamentals of Network Reliability 377 14.1.1 Importance of Reliability Calculation 378 14.1.2 Methods to Calculate the Reliability of a Network 379 14.2 Fault Tolerance 390 14.2.1 Fault]Tolerant Network 394 14.2.2 Autonomic Network 394 14.3 Network Management for Fault Detection 398 14.3.1 Traditional Network Management 399 14.3.2 Mobile Agent 400 14.3.3 Policy]Based Network Management 401 14.4 Wireless Tactical Networks 402 14.5 Routing in Delay]Tolerant Networks 403 14.5.1 Applications 404 14.5.2 Routing Protocols 404 References 405 Abbreviations/Terminologies 407 Questions 408 Exercises 409 Index 411

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides comprehensive, up-to-date coverage of the key MPEG standards used in the evolving digital multimedia landscape for the generation, storage, distribution, dissemination, and delivery of multimedia data to various platforms.Trade Review"The book will interest researchers, design engineers, developers, IT consultants, telecom system developers, and computer science and engineering students." (Booknews, 1 April 2011) "This book provides a comprehensive examination of the use of MPEG-2, MPEG-4, MPEG-7, MPEG-21, and MPEG-A standards, providing a detailed reference to their application." (TMCnet.com, 15 March 2011)Table of ContentsList of Contributors. MPEG Standards in Practice. 1 HD Video Remote Collaboration Application (Beomjoo Seo, Xiaomin Liu, and Roger Zimmermann). 1.1 Introduction. 1.2 Design and Architecture. 1.3 HD Video Acquisition. 1.4 Network and Topology Considerations. 1.5 Real-Time Transcoding. 1.6 HD Video Rendering. 1.7 Other Challenges. 1.8 Other HD Streaming Systems. 1.9 Conclusions and Future Directions. References. 2 MPEG Standards in Media Production, Broadcasting and Content Management (Andreas U. Mauthe and Peter Thoma). 2.1 Introduction. 2.2 Content in the Context of Production and Management. 2.3 MPEG Encoding Standards in CMS and Media Production. 2.4 MPEG-7 and Beyond. 2.5 Conclusions. References. 3 Quality Assessment of MPEG-4 Compressed Videos (Anush K. Moorthy and Alan C. Bovik). 3.1 Introduction. 3.2 Previous Work. 3.3 Quality Assessment of MPEG-4 Compressed Video. 3.4 MPEG-4 Compressed Videos in Wireless Environments. 3.5 Conclusion. References. 4 Exploiting MPEG-4 Capabilities for Personalized Advertising in Digital TV (Martín López-Nores, Yolanda Blanco-Fernández, Alberto Gil-Solla, Manuel Ramos-Cabrer, and José J. Pazos-Arias). 4.1 Introduction. 4.2 Related Work. 4.3 Enabling the New Advertising Model. 4.4 An Example. 4.5 Experimental Evaluation. 4.6 Conclusions. Acknowledgments. References. 5 Using MPEG Tools in Video Summarization (Luis Herranz and José M. Martínez). 5.1 Introduction. 5.2 Related Work. 5.3 A Summarization Framework Using MPEG Standards. 5.4 Generation of Summaries Using MPEG-4 AVC. 5.5 Description of Summaries in MPEG-7. 5.6 Integrated Summarization and Adaptation Framework in MPEG-4 SVC. 5.7 Experimental Evaluation. 5.8 Conclusions. References. 6 Encryption Techniques for H.264 Video (Bai-Ying Lei, Kwok-Tung Lo, and Jian Feng). 6.1 Introduction. 6.2 Demands for Video Security. 6.3 Issues on Digital Video Encryption. 6.4 Previous Work on Video Encryption. 6.5 H.264 Video Encryption Techniques. 6.6 A H.264 Encryption Scheme Based on CABAC and Chaotic Stream Cipher. 6.7 Concluding Remarks and Future Works. Acknowledgments. References. 7 Optimization Methods for H.264/AVC Video Coding (Dan Grois, Evgeny Kaminsky, and Ofer Hadar). 7.1 Introduction to Video Coding Optimization Methods. 7.2 Rate Control Optimization. 7.3 Computational Complexity Control Optimization. 7.4 Joint Computational Complexity and Rate Control Optimization. 7.5 Transform Coding Optimization. 7.6 Summary. References. 8 Spatiotemporal H.264/AVC Video Adaptation with MPEG-21 (Razib Iqbal and Shervin Shirmohammadi). 8.1 Introduction. 8.2 Background. 8.3 Literature Review. 8.4 Compressed-Domain Adaptation of H.264/AVC Video. 8.5 On-line Video Adaptation for P2P Overlays. 8.6 Quality of Experience (QoE). 8.7 Conclusion. References. 9 Image Clustering and Retrieval Using MPEG-7 (Rajeev Agrawal, William I. Grosky, and Farshad Fotouhi). 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 Usage of MPEG-7 in Image Clustering and Retrieval. 9.3 Multimodal Vector Representation of an Image Using MPEG-7 Color Descriptors. 9.4 Dimensionality Reduction of Multimodal Vector Representation Using a Nonlinear Diffusion Kernel. 9.5 Experiments. 9.6 Conclusion. References. 10 MPEG-7 Visual Descriptors and Discriminant Analysis (Jun Zhang, Lei Ye, and Jianhua Ma). 10.1 Introduction. 10.2 Literature Review. 10.3 Discriminant Power of Single Visual Descriptor. 10.4 Discriminant Power of the Aggregated Visual Descriptors. 10.5 Conclusions. References. 11 An MPEG-7 Profile for Collaborative Multimedia Annotation (Damon Daylamani Zad and Harry Agius). 11.1 Introduction. 11.2 MPEG-7 as a Means for Collaborative Multimedia Annotation. 11.3 Experiment Design. 11.4 Research Method. 11.5 Results. 11.6 MPEG-7 Profile. 11.7 Related Research Work. 11.8 Concluding Discussion. Acknowledgment. References. 12 Domain Knowledge Representation in Semantic MPEG-7 Descriptions (Chrisa Tsinaraki and Stavros Christodoulakis). 12.1 Introduction. 12.2 MPEG-7-Based Domain Knowledge Representation. 12.3 Domain Ontology Representation. 12.4 Property Representation. 12.5 Class Representation. 12.6 Representation of Individuals. 12.7 Representation of Axioms. 12.8 Exploitation of the Domain Knowledge Representation in Multimedia Applications and Services. 12.9 Conclusions. References. 13 Survey of MPEG-7 Applications in the Multimedia Lifecycle (Florian Stegmaier, Mario Döller, and Harald Kosch). 13.1 MPEG-7 Annotation Tools. 13.2 MPEG-7 Databases and Retrieval. 13.3 MPEG-7 Query Language. 13.4 MPEG-7 Middleware. 13.5 MPEG-7 Mobile. 13.6 Summarization and Outlook. References. 14 Using MPEG Standards for Content-Based Indexing of Broadcast Television, Web, and Enterprise Content (David Gibbon, Zhu Liu, Andrea Basso, and Behzad Shahraray.). 14.1 Background on Content-Based Indexing and Retrieval. 14.2 MPEG-7 and MPEG-21 in ETSI TV-Anytime. 14.3 MPEG-7 and MPEG-21 in ATIS IPTV Specifications. 14.4 MEPG-21 in the Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA). 14.5 Content Analysis for MPEG-7 Metadata Generation. 14.6 Representing Content Analysis Results Using MPEG-7. 14.7 Extraction of Audio Features and Representation in MPEG-7. 14.8 Summary. References. 15 MPEG-7/21: Structured Metadata for Handling and Personalizing Multimedia Content (Benjamin Köhncke and Wolf-Tilo Balke). 15.1 Introduction. 15.2 The Digital Item Adaptation Framework for Personalization. 15.3 Use Case Scenario. 15.4 Extensions of MPEG-7/21 Preference Management. 15.5 Example Application. 15.6 Summary. References. 16 A Game Approach to Integrating MPEG-7 in MPEG-21 for Dynamic Bandwidth Dealing (Anastasis A. Sofokleous and Marios C. Angelides). 16.1 Introduction. 16.2 Related Work. 16.3 Dealing Bandwidth Using Game Theory. 16.4 An Application Example. 16.5 Concluding Discussion. References. 17 The Usage of MPEG-21 Digital Items in Research and Practice (Hermann Hellwagner and Christian Timmerer). 17.1 Introduction. 17.2 Overview of the Usage of MPEG-21 Digital Items. 17.3 Universal Plug and Play (UPnP): DIDL-Lite. 17.4 Microsoft's Interactive Media Manager (IMM). 17.5 The DANAE Advanced MPEG-21 Infrastructure. 17.6 MPEG-21 in the European Projects ENTHRONE and AXMEDIS. 17.7 Information Asset Management in a Digital Library. 17.8 Conclusions. References. 18 Distributing Sensitive Information in the MPEG-21 Multimedia Framework (Nicholas Paul Sheppard). 18.1 Introduction. 18.2 Digital Rights Management in MPEG-21. 18.3 MPEG-21 in Copyright Protection. 18.4 MPEG-21 in Enterprise Digital Rights Management. 18.5 MPEG-21 in Privacy Protection. 18.6 Conclusion. Acknowledgments. References. 19 Designing Intelligent Content Delivery Frameworks Using MPEG-21 (Samir Amir, Ioan Marius Bilasco, Thierry Urruty, Jean Martinet and Chabane Djeraba). 19.1 Introduction. 19.2 CAM Metadata Framework Requirements. 19.3 CAM Metadata Model. 19.4 Study of the Existing Multimedia Standards. 19.5 CAM Metadata Encoding Using MPEG-21/7. 19.6 Discussion. 19.7 Conclusion and Perspectives. References. 20 NinSuna: a Platform for Format-Independent Media Resource Adaptation and Delivery (Davy Van Deursen, Wim Van Lancker, Chris Poppe, and Rik Van de Walle). 20.1 Introduction. 20.2 Model-Driven Content Adaptation and Packaging. 20.3 The NinSuna Platform. 20.4 Directions for Future Research. 20.5 Discussion and Conclusions. Acknowledgments. References. 21 MPEG-A and Its Open Access Application Format (Florian Schreiner and Klaus Diepold). 21.1 Introduction. 21.2 The MPEG-A Standards. 21.3 The Open Access Application Format. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis is the first book focusing on radio channel measurements and characterization with specific analysis of MIMO and bidirectional channels. It discusses the physical and technical considerations involved in the proper assessment of radio channel characteristics for efficient radio system planning, design, and implementation.Table of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv List of Symbols xvii Acronyms and Abbreviations xix 1 Radio Wave Fundamentals 1 1.1 Maxwell’s Equations 1 1.2 Free Space Propagation 3 1.3 Uniform Plane Wave Propagation 3 1.4 Propagation of Electromagnetic Waves in Isotropic and Homogeneous Media 5 1.5 Wave Polarization 8 1.6 Propagation Mechanisms 11 1.6.1 Reflection by an Isotropic Material 12 1.6.2 Reflection/Refraction by an Anisotropic Material 18 1.6.3 Diffuse Reflection/Scattering 19 1.6.4 Diffraction 20 1.7 Propagation in the Earth’s Atmosphere 21 1.7.1 Properties of the Earth’s Atmosphere 21 1.7.2 Radio Waves in the Ionosphere 25 1.8 Frequency Dispersion of Radio Waves 29 1.8.1 Phase Velocity versus Group Velocity 30 1.8.2 Group Path versus Phase Path 31 1.8.3 Phase Path Stability: Doppler Shift/Dispersion 32 References 33 2 Radio Wave Transmission 35 2.1 Free Space Transmission 35 2.1.1 Path Loss 35 2.1.2 Relating Power to the Electric Field 37 2.2 Transmission Loss of Radio Waves in the Earth’s Atmosphere 38 2.2.1 Attenuation due to Gases in the Lower Atmosphere and Rain: Troposphere 38 2.2.2 Attenuation of Radio Waves in an Ionized Medium: Ionosphere 41 2.3 Attenuation Due to Propagation into Buildings 43 2.4 Transmission Loss due to Penetration into Vehicles 46 2.5 Diffraction Loss 49 2.5.1 Fundamentals of Diffraction Loss: Huygen’s Principle 49 2.5.2 Diffraction Loss Due to a Single Knife Edge: Fresnel Integral Approach 50 2.6 Diffraction Loss Models 54 2.6.1 Single Knife Edge Diffraction Loss 54 2.6.2 Multiple Edge Diffraction Loss 55 2.7 Path Loss Due to Scattering 57 2.8 Multipath Propagation: Two-Ray Model 57 2.8.1 Two-Ray Model in a Nondispersive Medium 58 2.8.2 Two-Ray Model due to LOS and Ground Reflected Wave: Plane Earth Model 59 2.8.3 Two-Ray Propagation via the Ionosphere 63 2.9 General Multipath Propagation 66 2.9.1 Time Dispersion due to Multipath Propagation 66 2.9.2 Effects of Multipath Propagation in Frequency, Time and Space 69 2.10 Shadow Fading: Medium Scale 77 2.11 Measurement-Based Large-Scale Path Loss Models 78 References 82 3 Radio Channel Models 85 3.1 System Model for Ideal Channel: Linear Time-Invariant (LTI) Model 85 3.2 Narrowband Single Input–Single Output Channels 87 3.2.1 Single-Path Model 87 3.2.2 Multipath Scattering Model 88 3.3 Wideband Single Input–Single Output Channels 93 3.3.1 Single-Path Time-Invariant Frequency Dispersive Channel Model 93 3.3.2 Single-Path Time-Variant Frequency Dispersive Channel 98 3.3.3 Multipath Model in a Nonfrequency Dispersive Time-Invariant Channel 99 3.3.4 Multipath Propagation in a Nonfrequency Dispersive Time-Variant Channel 104 3.3.5 Multipath Propagation in a Frequency Dispersive Time-Variant Channel 106 3.4 System Functions in a Linear Randomly Time-Variant Channel 106 3.5 Simplified Channel Functions 108 3.5.1 The Wide-Sense Stationary (WSS) Channel 108 3.5.2 The Uncorrelated Scattering Channel (US) 109 3.5.3 The Wide-Sense Stationary Uncorrelated Scattering Channel (WSSUS) 109 3.6 Coherence Functions 110 3.7 Power Delay Profile and Doppler Spectrum 111 3.8 Parameters of the Power Delay Profile and Doppler Spectrum 111 3.8.1 First and Second Order Moments 111 3.8.2 Delay Window and Delay Interval 114 3.8.3 Angular Dispersion 115 3.9 The Two-Ray Model Revisited in a Stochastic Channel 115 3.10 Multiple Input–Multiple Output Channels 115 3.10.1 Desirable Channel Properties for Narrowband MIMO Systems 116 3.10.2 MIMO Capacity for Spatial Multiplexing 118 3.11 Capacity Limitations for MIMO Systems 120 3.12 Effect of Correlation Using Stochastic Models 120 3.12.1 Capacity Expressions Based on Stochastic Correlation Models 121 3.12.2 Capacity Expressions Based on Uniform and Exponential Correlation Models 122 3.12.3 The Kronecker Stochastic Model 123 3.13 Correlation Effects with Physical Channel Models 123 3.13.1 Distributed Scattering Model 124 3.13.2 Single-Ring Model 125 3.13.3 Double-Ring Model 126 3.13.4 COST 259 Models 127 3.13.5 Multidimensional Parametric Channel Model 127 3.13.6 Effect of Antenna Separation, Antenna Coupling and Angular Spread on Channel Capacity 128 3.13.7 Effect of Mutual Coupling 130 3.14 Effect of Number of Scatterers on Channel Capacity 134 3.14.1 Free Space Propagation 135 3.14.2 Limited Number of Multipath Components 136 3.15 Keyholes 137 3.16 Rician Channels 141 3.17 Wideband MIMO Channels 143 3.17.1 Wideband Channel Model 145 References 145 4 Radio Channel Sounders 149 4.1 Echoes of Sound and Radio 149 4.2 Definitions and Objectives of Radio Sounders and Radar 151 4.2.1 Modes of Operation 151 4.2.2 Basic Parameters 152 4.3 Waveforms 152 4.4 Single-Tone CW Waveforms 153 4.4.1 Analysis of a Single-Tone System 153 4.5 Single-Tone Measurements 158 4.5.1 Measurement Configurations 158 4.5.2 Triggering of Data Acquisition 160 4.5.3 Strategy of CW Measurements 162 4.6 Spaced Tone Waveform 164 4.7 Pulse Waveform 166 4.7.1 Properties of the Pulse Waveform 167 4.7.2 Factors Affecting the Resolution of Pulse Waveforms 171 4.7.3 Typical Configuration of a Pulse Sounder 171 4.7.4 Practical Considerations for Pulse Sounding 171 4.8 Pulse Compression Waveforms 174 4.8.1 Ideal Correlation Properties of Pulse Compression Sounding Waveforms 175 4.8.2 Pulse Compression Detectors 177 4.8.3 Comment on Pulse Compression Detectors 180 4.9 Coded Pulse Signals 182 4.9.1 Barker Codes (1953) 182 4.9.2 PRBS Codes 184 4.9.3 PRBS Related Codes: Gold Codes 192 4.9.4 Kasami Code 194 4.9.5 Loosely Synchronous Codes 196 4.10 Serial Correlation Detection of Coded Transmission 196 4.10.1 Sliding Correlator 196 4.10.2 Stepped Cross Correlator 198 4.11 Comment Regarding Coded Transmission 198 4.12 Frequency Modulated Continuous Wave (FMCW) Signal 199 4.12.1 Matched Filter Detector 199 4.12.2 Heterodyne Detector of FMCW Signals 203 4.12.3 Practical Consideration of Detection Methods of FMCW Signals 207 4.13 Range Doppler Ambiguity of Chirp Signals: Advanced Waveforms 207 4.13.1 Three-Cell Structure 208 4.13.2 Multiple WRF Structure 210 4.13.3 Target Movement 211 4.13.4 Doppler Shift Estimation 211 4.14 Architectures of Chirp Sounders 213 4.15 Monostatic Operation of FMCW Sounder/Radar 217 4.15.1 Reduction of Effective Mean Received Power 218 4.15.2 Spreading of the Spectrum and Interference 219 4.15.3 Blind Ranges and Range Ambiguity 220 4.15.4 Selection Criteria for Switching Sequences 221 4.15.5 Considerations for Edge Weighting 224 4.15.6 Length of the Window 224 4.15.7 Window Functions 224 4.15.8 Interpolation and Quantization 225 4.16 Single and Multiple Antenna Sounder Architectures 225 4.16.1 Single Input Single Output (SISO) Sounders 226 4.16.2 MISO, SIMO and MIMO Measurements with SISO Sounders 227 4.16.3 Semi-Sequential MIMO Sounders 228 4.16.4 Parallel MIMO Sounders 228 4.17 Ultra-wideband (UWB) Channel Sounders 232 4.18 Sounder Design 233 4.18.1 Sounder for Indoor Radio Channels in the UHF Band 239 4.18.2 Sounder for UHF Frequency Division Duplex Links for Outdoor Radio Channels 239 4.18.3 Sounder for Multiple Frequency Links for Outdoor Radio Channels 239 4.19 Performance Tests of a Channel Sounder and Calibration 239 4.19.1 Ambiguity Function 241 4.19.2 Linearity Test 242 4.19.3 Frequency Response 243 4.19.4 Calibration of Automatic Gain Control 243 4.19.5 Isolation between Multiple Channels 245 4.19.6 Sensitivity and Dynamic Range 246 4.19.7 Effect of Interference on the Dynamic Range 249 4.19.8 Stability of Frequency Sources 251 4.19.9 Temperature Variations 251 4.20 Overall Data Acquisition and Calibration 251 References 251 5 Data Analysis 255 5.1 Data Validation 255 5.2 Spectral Analysis via the Discrete Fourier Transform 256 5.3 DFT Analysis of the FMCW Channel Sounder Using a Heterodyne Detector 259 5.3.1 Snapshot Impulse Response Analysis 260 5.3.2 Frequency Response Analysis 263 5.3.3 Estimation of the Delay Doppler Function 266 5.4 Spectral Analysis of Network Analyzer Data via the IDFT 268 5.5 DFT Analysis of CW Measurements for Estimation of the Doppler Spectrum 268 5.6 Estimation of the Channel Frequency Response via the Hilbert Transform 269 5.7 Parametric Modelling 269 5.7.1 ARMA Modelling 271 5.7.2 AR Modelling 271 5.7.3 Practical Implementation of Parametric Modelling 271 5.7.4 Parametric Modelling for Interference Reduction 272 5.7.5 Parametric Modelling for Enhancement of Multipath Resolution 274 5.8 Estimation of Power Delay Profile 276 5.8.1 Noise Threshold 277 5.8.2 Stationarity Test 280 5.9 Small-Scale Characterization 286 5.9.1 Time Domain Parameters 287 5.9.2 Estimation of the Coherent Bandwidth 288 5.9.3 Statistical Modelling of the Time Variations of the Channel Response 291 5.10 Medium/Large-Scale Characterization 292 5.10.1 CDF Representation 292 5.10.2 Estimation of Path Loss 293 5.10.3 Relating RMS Delay Spread to Path Loss and Distance 296 5.10.4 Frequency Dependence of Channel Parameters 299 5.11 Multiple Antenna Array Processing for Estimation of Direction of Arrival 301 5.11.1 Theoretical Considerations for the Estimation of Direction of Arrival 303 5.11.2 Spectral-Based Array Processing Techniques 308 5.11.3 Parametric Methods 312 5.11.4 Joint Parametric Techniques 316 5.12 Practical Considerations of DOA Estimation 319 5.12.1 Choice of Antenna Array 320 5.12.2 Array Calibration 322 5.12.3 Estimation of Direction of Arrival 326 5.12.4 Estimation of Direction of the Arrival/Direction of Departure 331 5.13 Estimation of MIMO Capacity 333 References 333 6 Radio Link Performance Prediction 337 6.1 Radio Link Simulators 337 6.2 Narrowband Stochastic Radio Channel Simulator 338 6.2.1 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Simulator 339 6.2.2 Filtered Noise Method 339 6.2.3 Sum of Sinusoids Method (Jakes Method) 341 6.2.4 Frequency Domain Method 343 6.2.5 Reverberation Chambers (or Mode-Stirred Chambers) 344 6.3 Wideband Stochastic Channel Simulator 346 6.3.1 Time Domain Channel Simulators 346 6.3.2 Frequency Domain Simulators 348 6.4 Frequency Domain Implementation Using Fast Convolution 349 6.5 Channel Block Realization from Measured Data 351 6.6 Theoretical Prediction of System Performance in Additive White Gaussian Noise 353 6.6.1 Matched Filter and Correlation Detector 354 6.6.2 Bit Error Rate of the Matched Filter Detector in AWGN 356 6.6.3 Bit Error Rate with Noncoherent Detectors 357 6.6.4 Comparison of BER of Coherent and Noncoherent Detectors 358 6.6.5 Higher Order Modulation 358 6.7 Prediction of System Performance in Fading Channels 361 6.7.1 Narrowband Signals 361 6.7.2 Wideband Signals 363 6.8 Bit Error Rate Prediction for Wireless Standards 364 6.8.1 IEEE 802.16-d Standard 365 6.8.2 IEEE 802.11-a Standard 371 6.8.3 Third Generation WCDMA Standard 372 6.9 Enhancement of Performance Using Diversity Gain 376 6.9.1 Diversity Combining Methods 377 6.9.2 Diversity Gain Prediction of Rayleigh Fading Channels from Measurements in a Reverberation Chamber 382 References 383 Appendix 1 385 A. 1 Probability Distribution Functions 385 A. 2 The Gaussian (Normal) Distribution 385 A. 3 The Rayleigh Distribution 387 A. 4 The Rician Distribution 388 A. 5 The Nakagami m-Distribution 389 A. 6 The Weibull Distribution 390 A. 7 The Log-Normal Distribution 390 A. 8 The Suzuki Distribution 391 A. 9 The Chi-Square Distribution 391 References 391 Appendix 2 393 Index 395

Read more less

Book SynopsisTriple Playis a combination of Internet access, voice communication (telephony), and entertainment services such as IP television and video on demand. The erosion of the traditional voice service, together with the ever-increasing competition between companies, is pushing the telecommunications industry towards a major shift in its business models. Customers want more services in a more flexible way. Today, this shift can only be carried out by offering converged services built around the Internet Protocol (IP). Triple Play, a bundle of voice, video, and data services for residential customers, is the basis of this new strategy. Hens and Caballero explain how and why the telecommunications industry is facing this change, how to define, implement and offer these new services, and describes the technology behind the converged network. Triple Play analyses a number of business strategies to minimise costs, while migrating infrastructures and oTable of ContentsPreface. Chapter 1. Business Strategies. 1.1 Expanding Telco Businesses. 1.2 Triple Play Applications. 1.3 Driving Factors of Triple Play. 1.4 Telcos Strategies. 1.5 Infrastructures. 1.6 Triple Play Market. 1.7 Conclusions. Chapter 2. IP Telephony. 2.1 Coding of Voice Signals. 2.2 Network Performance Parameters. 2.3 Opinion Quality Rating. 2.4 Objective Quality Assessment. 2.5 Market Segments. Chapter 3. Audiovisual Services. 3.1 Digital Television. 3.2 Questioning the IPTV Business Models. 3.3 Regulatory Framework. 3.4 Architectural Design. 3.5 Television and Video Services and Applications. 3.6 Formats and Protocols. 3.7 How a Codec Works. 3.8 Windows Media and VC-1. 3.9 Service Provision. 3.10 Service Assurance. Chapter 4. Signalling. 4.1 The Real-time Transport Protocol. 4.2 The Real-time Control Protocol. 4.3 The Session Initiation Protocol. Chapter 5. IP Multicasting. 5.1 IP Multicast Groups and their Management. 5.2 Multicast Routing. Chapter 6. QoS in Packet Networks. 6.1 QoS Basics. 6.2 End-to-end Performance Parameters. 6.3 Marking. 6.4 Scheduling. 6.5 Congestion Avoidance. 6.6 Congestion Control and Recovery. Chapter 7. QoS Architectures. 7.1 QoS in ATM Networks. 7.2 QoS in IP Networks. Chapter 8. Broadband Access. 8.1 Broadband Services Over Copper. 8.2 The Passive Optical Network. 8.3 Ethernet in the First Mile 8.4 Service Provisioning. Chapter 9. Quadruple Play. 9.1 Cellular Communications Overview. 9.2 Wireless Communications Overview. 9.3 The IP Multimedia Subsystem. Chapter 10. Carrier-class Ethernet. 10.1 Ethernet as a MAN/WAN Service. 10.2 End-to-End Ethernet. 10.3 Limitations of Bridged Networks. 10.4 Multiprotocol Label Switching. 10.5 Migration. Chapter 11. Next-generation SDH/SONET. 11.1 Streaming Forces. 11.2 Legacy and Next-generation SDH. 11.3 The Next-generation Challenge. 11.4 Core Transport Services. 11.5 Generic Framing Procedure. 11.6 Concatenation. 11.7 Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. 11.8 Conclusions. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisComprehensive reference to successful service design for the telecommunications industry Telecommunications companies operate in increasingly competitive environments. The companies that survive and excel are those offering the most compelling range of products and services. These services are complex since they touch all aspects of business. Service design and implementation skills are therefore the key for staying on top of the competition. Successful Service Design for Telecommunications provides a comprehensive guide into service design and implementation. The author provides a consistent approach to designing scalable and operable processes that can be used when designing a variety of technologically based services; offering concepts, principles and numerous examples that the readers can easily adapt to their technological environment. Key features: Defines what telecommunications services are from business, technical and operatiTable of ContentsChapter 1. Introduction. 1.1 Who is this book for?. 1.2 Structure of the book and who should read which chapter 1.3 Definitions. Chapter 2. What is Service Design?. 2.1 What is a service?. 2.2 What is the difference between a service and a product?. 2.3 Service vs. network capabilities. 2.4 What are the difference between a service and an application?. 2.5 Intra-domain vs. Inter-domain services. 2.6 What is Service Design and what is the role of a Service Designer?. Chapter 3. Service – a Business Perspective. 3.1 Pre-conditions for service design. 3.2 Business requirements. 3.3 Market or marketing requirements. 3.4 Reporting requirements. 3.5 Security requirements. 3.6 Functional requirements. 3.7 Network planning requirements. 3.8 Non-functional requirements. 3.9 Regulatory, licensing and legislation considerations. 3.10 Financial constraints. 3.11 Physical location and space of network equipment and systems. 3.12 Service description template - a service description that fully defines the service 3.13 The success criteria for a service. Chapter 4. Service Design Process. 4.1 What are they key steps to develop new services and service enhancements?. 4.2 How should the process link to business approvals at various Phases of the development? 4.3 Organizational changes and structure required to develop new services. 4.4 Resource requirement for designing services. 4.5 How you can use the service development process for one off customer requests? 4.6 Programme management structure. 4.7 Documentation and control structure for Service Design. Chapter 5. Service Design – What needs to be done. . 5.1 Performing rapid impact analysis. 5.2 Performing feasibilities studies. 5.3 Design and develop. 5.4 Implementation and test 5.5 Service launch and operate. 5.6 Service withdrawal Chapter 6. Service Building Blocks. 6.1 The Building Blocks. 6.2 Conceptual network architecture for fixed and 3G mobile services. 6.3 Interactions between the network and the support systems. 6.4 System functions required for all services. 6.5 Operational support processes for all services. 6.7 Summary. Chapter 7. Network Design and Development 7.1 Network requirements. 7.2 Technical network considerations. 7.3 Service network design. 7.4 Network security. 7.5 Network Inventory. 7.6 Capacity planning, network planning and optimisation. 7.7 Service configuration in network elements. Chapter 8. System Functions and Development Systems requirements and methodology. 8.1 Inter-relationships between the functional areas in the systems domain. 8.2 Customer creation, order management and service termination. 8.3 Customer network provisioning and network termination. 8.4 Customer service provisioning (including moving, additions and changes) 8.5 End users creation and order management 8.6 End user network provisioning. 8.7 End users’ service provisioning, service control (esp. in QoS based services) and service termination 8.8 Billing, charging and rating. 8.9 Service accounting, revenue reporting, OLO bill reconciliation and revenue assurance 8.10 Fault management 8.11 Network management (monitoring and collecting events from the network) and service management 8.12 Performance management 8.13 Capacity management, traffic management and network planning. 8.14 Reporting. 8.15 System support and management Chapter 9. Operational Support Processes. 9.1 Sales engagement processes. 9.2 Customer service processes. 9.3 Service and network provisioning. 9.4 Service management processes. 9.5 Network management and maintenance processes. 9.6 Network traffic management, network capacity management and network planning processes 9.7 System support and maintenance process. 9.8 Revenue assurance processes. 9.9 Process mappings to eTOM model Chapter 10. Implementation Strategy. 10.1 What is implementation?. 10.2 What is implementation strategy?. 10.3 Why do we need an implementation strategy?. 10.4 What are the steps and approach to take when defining an implementation strategy? 10.5 Implementation strategy example. Chapter 11. Service Integration and Service Launch. 11.1 Service Integration Model 11.2 Service Integration Strategy. 11.3 Test Environment vs Live Service Environment 11.4 Post Service Launch Reviews. Chapter 12. Service Withdrawal, Migration and Termination. 12.1 Service Withdrawal 12.2 Service Migration. 12.3 Service Termination. 13 Glossary. 14 References. 15 Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisDigital signal processing plays a central role in the development of modern communication and information processing systems. The theory and application of signal processing is concerned with the identification, modelling and utilisation of patterns and structures in a signal process.Table of ContentsPreface xix Acknowledgements xxiii Symbols xxv Abbreviations xxix 1 Introduction 1 2 Noise and Distortion 35 3 Information Theory and Probability Models 51 4 Bayesian Inference 107 5 Hidden Markov Models 147 6 Least Square Error Wiener-Kolmogorov Filters 173 7 Adaptive Filters: Kalman, RLS, LMS 193 8 Linear Prediction Models 227 9 Eigenvalue Analysis and Principal Component Analysis 257 10 Power Spectrum Analysis 271 11 Interpolation – Replacement of Lost Samples 295 12 Signal Enhancement via Spectral Amplitude Estimation 321 13 Impulsive Noise: Modelling, Detection and Removal 341 14 Transient Noise Pulses 359 15 Echo Cancellation 371 16 Channel Equalisation and Blind Deconvolution 391 17 Speech Enhancement: Noise Reduction, Bandwidth Extension and Packet Replacement 423 18 Multiple-Input Multiple-Output Systems, Independent Component Analysis 467 19 Signal Processing in Mobile Communication 491 Bibliography 508 Index 509

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book introduces the basic concepts necessary to understand Single Event phenomena which could cause random performance errors and catastrophic failures to electronics devices. As miniaturization of electronics components advances, electronics components are more susceptible in the radiation environment.Table of Contents1. Introduction 1 1.1 Background 1 1.2 Analysis of Single Event Experiments 7 1.2.1 Analysis of Data Integrity and Initial Data Corrections 7 1.2.2 Analysis of Charge Collection Experiments 7 1.2.3 Analysis of Device Characteristics from Cross-Section Data 7 1.2.4 Analysis of Parametric Studies of Device Sensitivity 8 1.3 Modeling Space and Avionics See Rates 8 1.3.1 Modeling the Radiation Environment at the Device 8 1.3.2 Modeling the Charge Collection at the Device 9 1.3.3 Modeling the Electrical Characteristic and Circuit Sensitivity for Upset 9 1.4 Overview of this Book 10 1.5 Scope of this Book 11 2. Foundations of Single Event Analysis and Prediction 13 2.1 Overview of Single Particle Effects 13 2.2 Particle Energy Deposition 15 2.3 Single Event Environments 18 2.3.1 The Solar Wind and the Solar Cycle 19 2.3.2 The Magnetosphere Cosmic Ray and Trapped Particle Motion 22 2.3.3 Galactic Cosmic Rays 24 2.3.4 Protons Trapped by the Earth’s Magnetic Fields 42 2.3.5 Solar Events 46 2.3.6 Ionization in the Atmosphere 48 2.4 Charge Collection and Upset 58 2.5 Effective Let 60 2.6 Charge Collection Volume and the Rectangular Parallelepiped (RPP) 61 2.7 Upset Cross Section Curves 62 2.8 Critical Charge 62 2.8.1 Critical Charge and LET Threshold 63 2.8.2 Critical Charge of an Individual Transistor Two Transistors in a Cell 64 2.8.3 Critical Charge from Circuit Modeling Studies 65 2.8.4 Sensitivity Distribution Across the Device 65 2.8.5 Intracell Variation 66 2.8.6 Summary Discussion of Critical Charge 66 2.9 Upset Sensitivity and Feature Size 67 2.10 Cross-Section Concepts 67 2.10.1 Nuclear Physics Cross-Section Concepts 67 2.10.2 Single Event Cross-Section Concepts 72 3. Optimizing Heavy Ion Experiments for Analysis 77 3.1 Sample Heavy Ion Data 78 3.2 Test Requirements 78 3.3 Curve Parameters 80 3.4 Angular Steps 85 3.5 Stopping Data Accumulation When You Reach the Saturation Cross Section 86 3.6 Device Shadowing Effects 88 3.7 Choice of Ions 89 3.8 Determining the LET in the Device 91 3.9 Energy Loss Spread 94 3.10 Data Requirements 95 3.10.1 Desired Precision 95 3.10.2 Desired Accuracy 97 3.11 Experimental Statistics and Uncertainties 97 3.12 Effect of Dual Thresholds 98 3.13 Fitting Cross-Section Data 99 3.14 Other Sources of Error and Uncertainties 101 4. Optimizing Proton Testing 103 4.1 Monitoring the Beam Intensity and Uniformity 103 4.2 Total Dose Limitations on Testing 104 4.3 Shape of the Cross-Section Curve 105 5. Data Qualification and Interpretation 111 5.1 Data Characteristics 111 5.1.1 Illegitimate Systematic and Random Errors 111 5.1.2 Inherent Random Errors 113 5.1.3 Fractional Standard Deviation of Your Data 117 5.1.4 Rejection of Data 119 5.2 Approaches to Problem Data 121 5.2.1 Examination of Systematic Errors 121 5.2.2 An Example of Voltage Variation 134 5.2.3 Data Inconsistent with LET 135 5.2.4 Beam Contamination 135 5.2.5 No Event Observed 138 5.2.6 Sloppy or Wrong Fits to the Data 139 5.2.7 Experiment Monitoring and Planning 141 5.3 Interpretation of Heavy Ion Experiments 142 5.3.1 Modification of Effective LET by the Funnel 142 5.3.2 Effects of True RPP Shape 144 5.3.3 Fitting Data to Determine Depth and Funnel Length 149 5.3.4 Deep Device Structures 152 5.3.5 Cross-Section Curves on Rotated RPP Structures 156 5.3.6 Charge Gain Effects on Cross Section 157 5.4 Possible Problems with Least Square Fitting Using the Weibull Function 158 5.4.1 Multiple Good Fits 158 5.4.2 Reason for Inconsistent Weibull Fitting 162 6. Analysis of Various Types of SEU Data 165 6.1 Critical Charge 165 6.2 Depth and Critical Charge 166 6.3 Charge Collection Mechanisms 168 6.3.1 Drift Process and Funneling 168 6.3.2 Diffusion Process 168 6.3.3 Plasma Wire Effect 169 6.3.4 ALPHEN (Alpha-Particle–Source–Drain Penetration Effect) 169 6.3.5 Bipolar Transistor Effect 169 6.3.6 Recombination Effects 169 6.4 Charge Collection and the Cross-Section Curve 170 6.4.1 CMOS 170 6.4.2 Hardened CMOS 171 6.4.3 Bipolar Devices 171 6.4.4 CMOS-SOI 172 6.4.5 NMOS–Depletion Load 172 6.4.6 NMOS–Resistive Load 172 6.4.7 GaAs HFETs 173 6.4.8 GaAs C-Higfet 173 6.4.9 VLSI Process Variation 173 6.5 Efficacy (Variation of SEU Sensitivity within a Cell) 174 6.5.1 Cross-Section and Efficacy Curves 174 6.5.2 SEU Efficacy as a Function of Area 176 6.5.3 Efficacy and SEU Sensitivity Derived from a Pulsed Laser SEU Experiment 178 6.6 Mixed-Mode Simulations 185 6.6.1 Warren Approach 186 6.6.2 Dodd Approach 188 6.6.3 Hirose Approach 189 6.6.4 Simplified Approach of Fulkerson 189 6.6.5 The Imax F (Tmax) Approach 190 6.6.6 Circuit Level Simulation to Upset Rate Calculations 194 6.6.7 Multiple Upset Regions 194 6.6.8 Efficacy and SEU Threshold 195 6.6.9 From Efficacy to Upset Rates 197 6.7 Parametric Studies of Device Sensitivity 198 6.7.1 Data Display and Fitting 198 6.7.2 Device Parameters and SEU Sensitivity 202 6.8 Influence of Ion Species and Energy 215 6.9 Device Geometry and the Limiting Cross Section 218 6.9.1 Bulk CMOS 218 6.9.2 CMOS/SOI 218 6.9.3 SRAMs 219 6.10 Track Size Effects 220 6.11 Cross-Section Curves and the Charge Collection Processes 221 6.11.1 Efficacy Curves and the Charge-Collection Process 222 6.11.2 Inverse LET Plots and Diffusion 225 6.12 Single Event Multiple-Bit Upset 226 6.12.1 Strictly Geometrical MBUs 227 6.12.2 Proton Induced Multibit Upsets 230 6.12.3 Dual Hits for Single-Bit Upset 231 6.12.4 MBU Due to Diffusion in DRAMs 231 6.12.5 Hits to Adjacent Sensitive Regions 236 6.12.6 Multibit Upset in FPGAs 236 6.12.7 Calculation of Upset Rate for Diffusion MBUs 237 6.12.8 Geometrical MBE Rates in EDAC Words 238 6.12.9 Statistical MBE Rates in the Space Environment 240 6.12.10Impact of Geometrical Errors on System Performance 243 6.12.11Statistical MBUs in a Test Environment 246 6.13 SEU in Logic Systems 246 6.14 Transient Pulses 249 7. Cosmic Ray Single Event Rate Calculations 251 7.1 Introduction to Rate Prediction Methods 252 7.2 The RPP Approach to Heavy Ion Upset Rates 252 7.3 The Integral RPP Approach 260 7.4 Shape of the Cross-Section Curve 264 7.4.1 The Weibull Distribution 264 7.4.2 Lognormal Distributions 266 7.4.3 Exponential Distributions 267 7.5 Assumptions Behind the RPP and IRPP Methods 270 7.5.1 Device Interaction Models 270 7.5.2 Critical Charge 270 7.5.3 Mathematical Basis of Rate Equations 271 7.5.4 Chord Length Models 274 7.5.5 Bradford Formulation 276 7.5.6 Pickel Formulation 279 7.5.7 Adams Formulation 280 7.5.8 Formulation of Integral RPP Approach 282 7.5.9 HICCUP Model 284 7.5.10 Requirements for Use of IRPP 285 7.6 Effective Flux Approach 285 7.7 Upper Bound Approaches 287 7.8 Figure of Merit Upset Rate Equations 288 7.9 Generalized Figure of Merit 290 7.9.1 Correlation of the FOM with Geosynchronous Upset Rates 291 7.9.2 Determination of Device Parameters 294 7.9.3 Calculation of the Figure of Merit from Tabulated Parts Characteristics 295 7.9.4 Rate Coefficient Behind Shielding 298 7.10 The FOM and the LOG Normal Distribution 299 7.11 Monte Carlo Approaches 300 7.11.1 IBM Code 300 7.11.2 GEANT4 300 7.11.3 Neutron Induced 301 7.12 PRIVIT 302 7.13 Integral Flux Method 302 8. Proton Single Event Rate Calculations 305 8.1 Nuclear Reaction Analysis 306 8.1.1 Monte Carlo Calculations 310 8.1.2 Predictions of Proton Upset Cross Sections Based on Heavy Ion Data 311 8.2 Semiempirical Approaches and the Integral Cross-Section Calculation 313 8.3 Relationship of Proton and Heavy Ion Upsets 316 8.4 Correlation of the FOM with Proton Upset Cross Sections 317 8.5 Upsets Due to Rare High Energy Proton Reactions 318 8.6 Upset Due to Ionization by Stopping Protons Helium Ions and Iron Ions 320 9. Neutron Induced Upset 329 9.1 Neutron Upsets in Avionics 330 9.1.1 BGR Calculation 330 9.1.2 Integral Cross-Section Calculation 331 9.1.3 Figure of Merit Calculation 332 9.1.4 Upper Bound Approach 333 9.1.5 Exposure During Flights 334 9.2 Upsets at Ground Level 335 10. Upsets Produced by Heavy Ion Nuclear Reactions 337 10.1 Heavy Ion Nuclear Reactions 337 10.2 Upset Rate Calculations for Combined Ionization and Reactions 340 10.3 Heavy Nuclear Ion Reactions Summary 342 11. Samples of Heavy Ion Rate Prediction 345 11.1 Low Threshold Studies 345 11.2 Comparison of Upset Rates for Weibull and Lognormal Functions 347 11.3 Low Threshold–Medium Lc data 352 11.4 See Sensitivity and LET Thresholds 353 11.5 Choosing Area and Depth for Rate Calculations 360 11.5.1 SOI Devices 360 11.5.2 Inclusion of Funnel in CREME Calculation 361 11.6 Running CREME96 Type Codes 361 11.6.1 CREME96/FLUX 363 11.6.2 CREME96/TRANS 364 11.6.3 CREME96/LETSPEC 364 11.6.4 CREME96/HUP 365 11.6.5 CREME96 Results 366 11.7 CREME-MC and SPENVIS 367 11.8 Effect of Uncertainties in Cross Section on Upset Rates 368 12. Samples of Proton Rate Predictions 371 12.1 Trapped Protons 371 12.2 Correlation of the FOM with Proton Upset Rates 371 13. Combined Environments 375 13.1 Relative Proton and Cosmic Ray Upset Rates 375 13.2 Calculation of Combined Rates Using the Figure of Merit 375 13.3 Rate Coefficients for a Particular New Orbit 380 13.4 Rate Coefficients for Any Circular Orbit About the Earth 381 13.5 Ratio of Proton to Heavy Ion Upsets for Near Earth Circular Orbits 381 13.6 Single Events from Ground to Outer Space 383 14. Samples of Solar Events and Extreme Situations 389 15. Upset Rates in Neutral Particle Beam (NPB) Environments 395 15.1 Characteristics of NPB Weapons 395 15.2 Upsets in the NPB Beam 397 16. Predictions and Observations of SEU Rates in Space 401 16.1 Results of Space Observations 402 16.2 Environmental Uncertainties 413 16.3 Examination of Outliers 417 16.4 Possible Reasons for Poor Upset Rate Predictions 418 16.5 Constituents of a Good Rate Comparison Paper 420 16.5.1 Reports on Laboratory and Space Measurements 421 16.5.2 Analysis of Ground Measurements 422 16.5.3 Environment for Space Predictions 422 16.5.4 Upset Rate Calculations 423 16.5.5 Characteristics of Space Experiment and Data 424 16.6 Summary and Conclusions 425 16.7 Recent Comparisons 427 16.8 Comparisons with Events During Solar Activity 427 17. Limitations of the IRPP Approach 429 17.1 The IRPP and Deep Devices 429 17.2 The RPP When Two Hits are Required 430 17.3 The RPP Approaches Neglect Track Size 430 17.4 The IRPP Calculates Number of Events not Total Number of Upsets 431 17.5 The RPP Approaches Neglect Effects that Arise Outside the Sensitive Volume 431 17.6 The IRPP Approaches Assume that the Effect of Different Particles with the Same LET is Equivalent 431 17.7 The IRPP Approaches Assume that the LET of the Particle is not Changing in the Sensitive Volume 432 17.8 The IRPP Approach Assumes that the Charge Collection Does Not Change with Device Orientation 433 17.9 The Status of Single Event Rate Analysis 433 Appendix A Useful Numbers 435 Appendix B Reference Equations 437 Appendix C Quick Estimates of Upset Rates Using the Figure of Merit 445 Appendix D Part Characteristics 448 Appendix E Sources of Device Data 452 References 455 Author Index 489 Subject Index 495

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe leading text in the field explains step by step how to write software that responds in real time From power plants to medicine to avionics, the world increasingly depends on computer systems that can compute and respond to various excitations in real time. The Fourth Edition of Real-Time Systems Design and Analysis gives software designers the knowledge and the tools needed to create real-time software using a holistic, systems-based approach. The text covers computer architecture and organization, operating systems, software engineering, programming languages, and compiler theory, all from the perspective of real-time systems design. The Fourth Edition of this renowned text brings it thoroughly up to date with the latest technological advances and applications. This fully updated edition includes coverage of the following concepts: Multidisciplinary design challenges Time-triggered architectures ATable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xxi 1 Fundamentals of Real-Time Systems 1 1.1 Concepts and Misconceptions, 2 1.1.1 Definitions for Real-Time Systems, 2 1.1.2 Usual Misconceptions, 14 1.2 Multidisciplinary Design Challenges, 15 1.2.1 Influencing Disciplines, 16 1.3 Birth and Evolution of Real-Time Systems, 16 1.3.1 Diversifying Applications, 17 1.3.2 Advancements behind Modern Real-Time Systems, 19 1.4 Summary, 21 1.5 Exercises, 24 References, 25 2 Hardware for Real-Time Systems 27 2.1 Basic Processor Architecture, 28 2.1.1 Von Neumann Architecture, 29 2.1.2 Instruction Processing, 30 2.1.3 Input/Output and Interrupt Considerations, 33 2.2 Memory Technologies, 36 2.2.1 Different Classes of Memory, 36 2.2.2 Memory Access and Layout Issues, 38 2.2.3 Hierarchical Memory Organization, 41 2.3 Architectural Advancements, 43 2.3.1 Pipelined Instruction Processing, 45 2.3.2 Superscalar and Very Long Instruction Word Architectures, 46 2.3.3 Multi-Core Processors, 48 2.3.4 Complex Instruction Set versus Reduced Instruction Set, 50 2.4 Peripheral Interfacing, 52 2.4.1 Interrupt-Driven Input/Output, 53 2.4.2 Direct Memory Access, 56 2.4.3 Analog and Digital Input/Output, 58 2.5 Microprocessor versus Microcontroller, 62 2.5.1 Microprocessors, 62 2.5.2 Standard Microcontrollers, 64 2.5.3 Custom Microcontrollers, 66 2.6 Distributed Real-Time Architectures, 68 2.6.1 Fieldbus Networks, 68 2.6.2 Time-Triggered Architectures, 71 2.7 Summary, 73 2.8 Exercises, 74 References, 76 3 Real-Time Operating Systems 79 3.1 From Pseudokernels to Operating Systems, 80 3.1.1 Miscellaneous Pseudokernels, 82 3.1.2 Interrupt-Only Systems, 87 3.1.3 Preemptive Priority Systems, 90 3.1.4 Hybrid Scheduling Systems, 90 3.1.5 The Task Control Block Model, 95 3.2 Theoretical Foundations of Scheduling, 97 3.2.1 Scheduling Framework, 98 3.2.2 Round-Robin Scheduling, 99 3.2.3 Cyclic Code Scheduling, 100 3.2.4 Fixed-Priority Scheduling: Rate-Monotonic Approach, 102 3.2.5 Dynamic Priority Scheduling: Earliest Deadline First Approach, 104 3.3 System Services for Application Programs, 106 3.3.1 Linear Buffers, 107 3.3.2 Ring Buffers, 109 3.3.3 Mailboxes, 110 3.3.4 Semaphores, 112 3.3.5 Deadlock and Starvation Problems, 114 3.3.6 Priority Inversion Problem, 118 3.3.7 Timer and Clock Services, 122 3.3.8 Application Study: A Real-Time Structure, 123 3.4 Memory Management Issues, 127 3.4.1 Stack and Task Control Block Management, 127 3.4.2 Multiple-Stack Arrangement, 128 3.4.3 Memory Management in the Task Control Block Model, 129 3.4.4 Swapping, Overlaying, and Paging, 130 3.5 Selecting Real-Time Operating Systems, 133 3.5.1 Buying versus Building, 134 3.5.2 Selection Criteria and a Metric for Commercial Real-Time Operating Systems, 135 3.5.3 Case Study: Selecting a Commercial Real-Time Operating System, 138 3.5.4 Supplementary Criteria for Multi-Core and Energy-Aware Support, 140 3.6 Summary, 142 3.7 Exercises, 143 References, 146 4 Programming Languages for Real-Time Systems 149 4.1 Coding of Real-Time Software, 150 4.1.1 Fitness of a Programming Language for Real-Time Applications, 151 4.1.2 Coding Standards for Real-Time Software, 152 4.2 Assembly Language, 154 4.3 Procedural Languages, 156 4.3.1 Modularity and Typing Issues, 156 4.3.2 Parameter Passing and Dynamic Memory Allocation, 157 4.3.3 Exception Handling, 159 4.3.4 Cardelli’s Metrics and Procedural Languages, 161 4.4 Object-Oriented Languages, 162 4.4.1 Synchronizing Objects and Garbage Collection, 162 4.4.2 Cardelli’s Metrics and Object-Oriented Languages, 164 4.4.3 Object-Oriented versus Procedural Languages, 165 4.5 Overview of Programming Languages, 167 4.5.1 Ada, 167 4.5.2 C, 169 4.5.3 C++, 170 4.5.4 C#, 171 4.5.5 Java, 172 4.5.6 Real-Time Java, 174 4.5.7 Special Real-Time Languages, 177 4.6 Automatic Code Generation, 178 4.6.1 Toward Production-Quality Code, 178 4.6.2 Remaining Challenges, 180 4.7 Compiler Optimizations of Code, 181 4.7.1 Standard Optimization Techniques, 182 4.7.2 Additional Optimization Considerations, 188 4.8 Summary, 192 4.9 Exercises, 193 References, 195 5 Requirements Engineering Methodologies 197 5.1 Requirements Engineering for Real-Time Systems, 198 5.1.1 Requirements Engineering as a Process, 198 5.1.2 Standard Requirement Classes, 199 5.1.3 Specifi cation of Real-Time Software, 201 5.2 Formal Methods in System Specification, 202 5.2.1 Limitations of Formal Methods, 205 5.2.2 Finite State Machines, 205 5.2.3 Statecharts, 210 5.2.4 Petri Nets, 213 5.3 Semiformal Methods in System Specification, 217 5.3.1 Structured Analysis and Structured Design, 218 5.3.2 Object-Oriented Analysis and the Unified Modeling Language, 221 5.3.3 Recommendations on Specification Approach, 224 5.4 The Requirements Document, 225 5.4.1 Structuring and Composing Requirements, 226 5.4.2 Requirements Validation, 228 5.5 Summary, 232 5.6 Exercises, 233 5.7 Appendix 1: Case Study in Software Requirements Specification, 235 5.7.1 Introduction, 235 5.7.2 Overall Description, 238 5.7.3 Specific Requirements, 245 References, 265 6 Software Design Approaches 267 6.1 Qualities of Real-Time Software, 268 6.1.1 Eight Qualities from Reliability to Verifiability, 269 6.2 Software Engineering Principles, 275 6.2.1 Seven Principles from Rigor and Formality to Traceability, 275 6.2.2 The Design Activity, 281 6.3 Procedural Design Approach, 284 6.3.1 Parnas Partitioning, 284 6.3.2 Structured Design, 286 6.3.3 Design in Procedural Form Using Finite State Machines, 292 6.4 Object-Oriented Design Approach, 293 6.4.1 Advantages of Object Orientation, 293 6.4.2 Design Patterns, 295 6.4.3 Design Using the Unified Modeling Language, 298 6.4.4 Object-Oriented versus Procedural Approaches, 301 6.5 Life Cycle Models, 302 6.5.1 Waterfall Model, 303 6.5.2 V-Model, 305 6.5.3 Spiral Model, 306 6.5.4 Agile Methodologies, 307 6.6 Summary, 311 6.7 Exercises, 312 6.8 Appendix 1: Case Study in Designing Real-Time Software, 314 6.8.1 Introduction, 314 6.8.2 Overall Description, 315 6.8.3 Design Decomposition, 316 6.8.4 Requirements Traceability, 371 References, 375 7 Performance Analysis Techniques 379 7.1 Real-Time Performance Analysis, 380 7.1.1 Theoretical Preliminaries, 380 7.1.2 Arguments Related to Parallelization, 382 7.1.3 Execution Time Estimation from Program Code, 385 7.1.4 Analysis of Polled-Loop and Coroutine Systems, 391 7.1.5 Analysis of Round-Robin Systems, 392 7.1.6 Analysis of Fixed-Period Systems, 394 7.1.7 Analysis of Nonperiodic Systems, 396 7.2 Applications of Queuing Theory, 398 7.2.1 Single-Server Queue Model, 398 7.2.2 Arrival and Processing Rates, 400 7.2.3 Buffer Size Calculation, 401 7.2.4 Response Time Modeling, 402 7.2.5 Other Results from Queuing Theory, 403 7.3 Input/Output Performance, 405 7.3.1 Buffer Size Calculation for Time-Invariant Bursts, 405 7.3.2 Buffer Size Calculation for Time-Variant Bursts, 406 7.4 Analysis of Memory Requirements, 408 7.4.1 Memory Utilization Analysis, 408 7.4.2 Optimizing Memory Usage, 410 7.5 Summary, 411 7.6 Exercises, 413 References, 415 8 Additional Considerations for the Practitioner 417 8.1 Metrics in Software Engineering, 418 8.1.1 Lines of Source Code, 419 8.1.2 Cyclomatic Complexity, 420 8.1.3 Halstead’s Metrics, 421 8.1.4 Function Points, 423 8.1.5 Feature Points, 427 8.1.6 Metrics for Object-Oriented Software, 428 8.1.7 Criticism against Software Metrics, 428 8.2 Predictive Cost Modeling, 429 8.2.1 Basic COCOMO 81, 429 8.2.2 Intermediate and Detailed COCOMO 81, 431 8.2.3 COCOMO II, 433 8.3 Uncertainty in Real-Time Systems, 433 8.3.1 The Three Dimensions of Uncertainty, 434 8.3.2 Sources of Uncertainty, 435 8.3.3 Identifying Uncertainty, 437 8.3.4 Dealing with Uncertainty, 438 8.4 Design for Fault Tolerance, 438 8.4.1 Spatial Fault-Tolerance, 440 8.4.2 Software Black Boxes, 443 8.4.3 N-Version Programming, 443 8.4.4 Built-in-Test Software, 444 8.4.5 Spurious and Missed Interrupts, 447 8.5 Software Testing and Systems Integration, 447 8.5.1 Testing Techniques, 448 8.5.2 Debugging Approaches, 454 8.5.3 System-Level Testing, 456 8.5.4 Systems Integration, 458 8.5.5 Testing Patterns and Exploratory Testing, 462 8.6 Performance Optimization Techniques, 465 8.6.1 Scaled Numbers for Faster Execution, 465 8.6.2 Look-Up Tables for Functions, 467 8.6.3 Real-Time Device Drivers, 468 8.7 Summary, 470 8.8 Exercises, 471 References, 473 9 Future Visions on Real-Time Systems 477 9.1 Vision: Real-Time Hardware, 479 9.1.1 Heterogeneous Soft Multi-Cores, 481 9.1.2 Architectural Issues with Individual Soft Cores, 483 9.1.3 More Advanced Fieldbus Networks and Simpler Distributed Nodes, 484 9.2 Vision: Real-Time Operating Systems, 485 9.2.1 One Coordinating System Task and Multiple Isolated Application Tasks, 486 9.2.2 Small, Platform Independent Virtual Machines, 487 9.3 Vision: Real-Time Programming Languages, 488 9.3.1 The UML++ as a Future “Programming Language”, 489 9.4 Vision: Real-Time Systems Engineering, 491 9.4.1 Automatic Verification of Software, 491 9.4.2 Conservative Requirements Engineering, 492 9.4.3 Distance Collaboration in Software Projects, 492 9.4.4 Drag-and-Drop Systems, 493 9.5 Vision: Real-Time Applications, 493 9.5.1 Local Networks of Collaborating Real-Time Systems, 494 9.5.2 Wide Networks of Collaborating Real-Time Systems, 495 9.5.3 Biometric Identification Device with Remote Access, 495 9.5.4 Are There Any Threats behind High-Speed Wireless Communications?, 497 9.6 Summary, 497 9.7 Exercises, 499 References, 500 Glossary 503 About the Authors 535 Index 537

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book will be focused on the modeling and control of the DFIM based wind turbines. In the first part of the book, the mathematical description of different basic dynamic models of the DFIM will be carried out. It will be accompanied by a detailed steady-state analysis of the machine. After that, a more sophisticated model of the machine that considers grid disturbances, such as voltage dips and unbalances will be also studied. The second part of the book surveys the most relevant control strategies used for the DFIM when it operates at the wind energy generation application. The control techniques studied, range from standard solutions used by wind turbine manufacturers, to the last developments oriented to improve the behavior of high power wind turbines, as well as control and hardware based solutions to address different faulty scenarios of the grid. In addition, the standalone DFIM generation system will be also analyzed.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction to A Wind Energy Generation System 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Basic Concepts of a Fixed Speed Wind Turbine (FSWT) 2 1.2.1 Basic Wind Turbine Description 2 1.2.2 Power Control of Wind Turbines 5 1.2.3 Wind Turbine Aerodynamics 7 1.2.4 Example of a Commercial Wind Turbine 9 1.3 Variable Speed Wind Turbines (VSWTs) 10 1.3.1 Modeling of Variable Speed Wind Turbine 11 1.3.2 Control of a Variable Speed Wind Turbine 15 1.3.3 Electrical System of a Variable Speed Wind Turbine 22 1.4 Wind Energy Generation System Based on DFIM VSWT 25 1.4.1 Electrical Configuration of a VSWT Based on the DFIM 25 1.4.2 Electrical Configuration of a Wind Farm 33 1.4.3 WEGS Control Structure 34 1.5 Grid Code Requirements 39 1.5.1 Frequency and Voltage Operating Range 40 1.5.2 Reactive Power and Voltage Control Capability 41 1.5.3 Power Control 43 1.5.4 Power System Stabilizer Function 45 1.5.5 Low Voltage Ride Through (LVRT) 46 1.6 Voltage Dips and LVRT 46 1.6.1 Electric Power System 47 1.6.2 Voltage Dips 50 1.6.3 Spanish Verification Procedure 55 1.7 VSWT Based on DFIM Manufacturers 57 1.7.1 Industrial Solutions: Wind Turbine Manufacturers 57 1.7.2 Modeling a 2.4 MW Wind Turbine 72 1.7.3 Steady State Generator and Power Converter Sizing 79 1.8 Introduction to the Next Chapters 83 Bibliography 85 2 Back-to-Back Power Electronic Converter 87 2.1 Introduction 87 2.2 Back-to-Back Converter based on Two-Level VSC Topology 88 2.2.1 Grid Side System 89 2.2.2 Rotor Side Converter and dv/dt Filter 96 2.2.3 DC Link 99 2.2.4 Pulse Generation of the Controlled Switches 101 2.3 Multilevel VSC Topologies 114 2.3.1 Three-Level Neutral Point Clamped VSC Topology (3L-NPC) 116 2.4 Control of Grid Side System 133 2.4.1 Steady State Model of the Grid Side System 133 2.4.2 Dynamic Modeling of the Grid Side System 139 2.4.3 Vector Control of the Grid Side System 143 2.5 Summary 152 References 153 3 Steady State of the Doubly Fed Induction Machine 155 3.1 Introduction 155 3.2 Equivalent Electric Circuit at Steady State 156 3.2.1 Basic Concepts on DFIM 156 3.2.2 Steady State Equivalent Circuit 158 3.2.3 Phasor Diagram 163 3.3 Operation Modes Attending to Speed and Power Flows 165 3.3.1 Basic Active Power Relations 165 3.3.2 Torque Expressions 168 3.3.3 Reactive Power Expressions 170 3.3.4 Approximated Relations Between Active Powers, Torque, and Speeds 170 3.3.5 Four Quadrant Modes of Operation 171 3.4 Per Unit Transformation 173 3.4.1 Base Values 175 3.4.2 Per Unit Transformation of Magnitudes and Parameters 176 3.4.3 Steady State Equations of the DFIM in p.u 177 3.4.4 Example 3.1: Parameters of a 2 MW DFIM 179 3.4.5 Example 3.2: Parameters of Different Power DFIM 180 3.4.6 Example 3.3: Phasor Diagram of a 2 MW DFIM and p.u. Analysis 181 3.5 Steady State Curves: Performance Evaluation 184 3.5.1 Rotor Voltage Variation: Frequency, Amplitude, and Phase Shift 185 3.5.2 Rotor Voltage Variation: Constant Voltage–Frequency (V-F) Ratio 192 3.5.3 Rotor Voltage Variation: Control of Stator Reactive Power and Torque 195 3.6 Design Requirements for the DFIM in Wind Energy Generation Applications 202 3.7 Summary 207 References 208 4 Dynamic Modeling of the Doubly Fed Induction Machine 209 4.1 Introduction 209 4.2 Dynamic Modeling of the DFIM 210 4.2.1 ab Model 212 4.2.2 dq Model 214 4.2.3 State-Space Representation of ab Model 216 4.2.4 State-Space Representation of dq Model 229 4.2.5 Relation Between the Steady State Model and the Dynamic Model 234 4.3 Summary 238 References 238 5 Testing the DFIM 241 5.1 Introduction 241 5.2 Off-Line Estimation of DFIM Model Parameters 242 5.2.1 Considerations About the Model Parameters of the DFIM 243 5.2.2 Stator and Rotor Resistances Estimation by VSC 245 5.2.3 Leakage Inductances Estimation by VSC 250 5.2.4 Magnetizing Inductance and Iron Losses Estimation with No-Load Test by VSC 256 5.3 Summary 262 References 262 6 Analysis of the DFIM Under Voltage Dips 265 6.1 Introduction 265 6.2 Electromagnetic Force Induced in the Rotor 266 6.3 Normal Operation 267 6.4 Three-Phase Voltage Dips 268 6.4.1 Total Voltage Dip, Rotor Open-Circuited 268 6.4.2 Partial Voltage Dip, Rotor Open-Circuited 273 6.5 Asymmetrical Voltage Dips 278 6.5.1 Fundamentals of the Symmetrical Component Method 278 6.5.2 Symmetrical Components Applied to the DFIM 281 6.5.3 Single-Phase Dip 283 6.5.4 Phase-to-Phase Dip 286 6.6 Influence of the Rotor Currents 290 6.6.1 Influence of the Rotor Current in a Total Three-Phase Voltage Dip 291 6.6.2 Rotor Voltage in a General Case 294 6.7 DFIM Equivalent Model During Voltage Dips 297 6.7.1 Equivalent Model in Case of Linearity 297 6.7.2 Equivalent Model in Case of Nonlinearity 299 6.7.3 Model of the Grid 300 6.8 Summary 300 References 301 7 Vector Control Strategies for Grid-Connected DFIM Wind Turbines 303 7.1 Introduction 303 7.2 Vector Control 304 7.2.1 Calculation of the Current References 305 7.2.2 Limitation of the Current References 307 7.2.3 Current Control Loops 308 7.2.4 Reference Frame Orientations 311 7.2.5 Complete Control System 313 7.3 Small Signal Stability of the Vector Control 314 7.3.1 Influence of the Reference Frame Orientation 314 7.3.2 Influence of the Tuning of the Regulators 320 7.4 Vector Control Behavior Under Unbalanced Conditions 327 7.4.1 Reference Frame Orientation 328 7.4.2 Saturation of the Rotor Converter 328 7.4.3 Oscillations in the Stator Current and in the Electromagnetic Torque 328 7.5 Vector Control Behavior Under Voltage Dips 331 7.5.1 Small Dips 333 7.5.2 Severe Dips 336 7.6 Control Solutions for Grid Disturbances 340 7.6.1 Demagnetizing Current 340 7.6.2 Dual Control Techniques 346 7.7 Summary 358 References 360 8 Direct Control of the Doubly Fed Induction Machine 363 8.1 Introduction 363 8.2 Direct Torque Control (DTC) of the Doubly Fed Induction Machine 364 8.2.1 Basic Control Principle 365 8.2.2 Control Block Diagram 371 8.2.3 Example 8.1: Direct Torque Control of a 2 MW DFIM 377 8.2.4 Study of Rotor Voltage Vector Effect in the DFIM 379 8.2.5 Example 8.2: Spectrum Analysis in Direct Torque Control of a 2 MW DFIM 384 8.2.6 Rotor Flux Amplitude Reference Generation 386 8.3 Direct Power Control (DPC) of the Doubly Fed Induction Machine 387 8.3.1 Basic Control Principle 387 8.3.2 Control Block Diagram 390 8.3.3 Example 8.3: Direct Power Control of a 2 MW DFIM 395 8.3.4 Study of Rotor Voltage Vector Effect in the DFIM 395 8.4 Predictive Direct Torque Control (P-DTC) of the Doubly Fed Induction Machine at Constant Switching Frequency 399 8.4.1 Basic Control Principle 399 8.4.2 Control Block Diagram 402 8.4.3 Example 8.4: Predictive Direct Torque Control of 15kW and 2 MW DFIMs at 800 Hz Constant Switching Frequency 411 8.4.4 Example 8.5: Predictive Direct Torque Control of a 15kW DFIM at 4 kHz Constant Switching Frequency 415 8.5 Predictive Direct Power Control (P-DPC) of the Doubly Fed Induction Machine at Constant Switching Frequency 416 8.5.1 Basic Control Principle 417 8.5.2 Control Block Diagram 419 8.5.3 Example 8.6: Predictive Direct Power Control of a 15 kW DFIM at 1 kHz Constant Switching Frequency 424 8.6 Multilevel Converter Based Predictive Direct Power and Direct Torque Control of the Doubly Fed Induction Machine at Constant Switching Frequency 425 8.6.1 Introduction 425 8.6.2 Three-Level NPC VSC Based DPC of the DFIM 428 8.6.3 Three-Level NPC VSC Based DTC of the DFIM 447 8.7 Control Solutions for Grid Voltage Disturbances, Based on Direct Control Techniques 451 8.7.1 Introduction 451 8.7.2 Control for Unbalanced Voltage Based on DPC 452 8.7.3 Control for Unbalanced Voltage Based on DTC 460 8.7.4 Control for Voltage Dips Based on DTC 467 8.8 Summary 473 References 474 9 Hardware Solutions for LVRT 479 9.1 Introduction 479 9.2 Grid Codes Related to LVRT 479 9.3 Crowbar 481 9.3.1 Design of an Active Crowbar 484 9.3.2 Behavior Under Three-Phase Dips 486 9.3.3 Behavior Under Asymmetrical Dips 488 9.3.4 Combination of Crowbar and Software Solutions 490 9.4 Braking Chopper 492 9.4.1 Performance of a Braking Chopper Installed Alone 492 9.4.2 Combination of Crowbar and Braking Chopper 493 9.5 Other Protection Techniques 495 9.5.1 Replacement Loads 495 9.5.2 Wind Farm Solutions 496 9.6 Summary 497 References 498 10 Complementary Control Issues: Estimator Structures and Start-Up of Grid-Connected DFIM 501 10.1 Introduction 501 10.2 Estimator and Observer Structures 502 10.2.1 General Considerations 502 10.2.2 Stator Active and Reactive Power Estimation for Rotor Side DPC 503 10.2.3 Stator Flux Estimator from Stator Voltage for Rotor Side Vector Control 503 10.2.4 Stator Flux Synchronization from Stator Voltage for Rotor Side Vector Control 506 10.2.5 Stator and Rotor Fluxes Estimation for Rotor Side DPC, DTC, and Vector Control 507 10.2.6 Stator and Rotor Flux Full Order Observer 508 10.3 Start-up of the Doubly Fed Induction Machine Based Wind Turbine 512 10.3.1 Encoder Calibration 514 10.3.2 Synchronization with the Grid 518 10.3.3 Sequential Start-up of the DFIM Based Wind Turbine 523 10.4 Summary 534 References 535 11 Stand-Alone DFIM Based Generation Systems 537 11.1 Introduction 537 11.1.1 Requirements of Stand-alone DFIM Based System 537 11.1.2 Characteristics of DFIM Supported by DC Coupled Storage 540 11.1.3 Selection of Filtering Capacitors 541 11.2 Mathematical Description of the Stand-Alone DFIM System 544 11.2.1 Model of Stand-alone DFIM 544 11.2.2 Model of Stand-alone DFIM Fed from Current Source 549 11.2.3 Polar Frame Model of Stand-alone DFIM 551 11.2.4 Polar Frame Model of Stand-alone DFIM Fed from Current Source 554 11.3 Stator Voltage Control 558 11.3.1 Amplitude and Frequency Control by the Use of PLL 558 11.3.2 Voltage Asymmetry Correction During Unbalanced Load Supply 567 11.3.3 Voltage Harmonics Reduction During Nonlinear Load Supply 569 11.4 Synchronization Before Grid Connection By Superior PLL 573 11.5 Summary 576 References 577 12 New Trends on Wind Energy Generation 579 12.1 Introduction 579 12.2 Future Challenges for Wind Energy Generation: What must be Innovated 580 12.2.1 Wind Farm Location 580 12.2.2 Power, Efficiency, and Reliability Increase 582 12.2.3 Electric Grid Integration 583 12.2.4 Environmental Concerns 583 12.3 Technological Trends: How They Can be Achieved 584 12.3.1 Mechanical Structure of the Wind Turbine 585 12.3.2 Power Train Technology 586 12.4 Summary 599 References 600 Appendix 603 A.1 Space Vector Representation 603 A.1.1 Space Vector Notation 603 A.1.2 Transformations to Different Reference Frames 606 A.1.3 Power Expressions 609 A.2 Dynamic Modeling of the DFIM Considering the Iron Losses 610 A.2.1 ab Model 611 A.2.2 dq Model 614 A.2.3 State-Space Representation of ab Model 616 References 618 Index 619 The IEEE Press Series on Power Engineering

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe straightforward guide to the new Canon EOS Rebel T2i/550D Popular tech blog Gizmodo.com called the Canon EOS Rebel T2i/550D an incredible camera everything a first DSLR should be. With 1080p digital video capability andan 18 megapixel sensor that improves low-light shooting all for under $900, the accolades are well-earned. And for less than $30, you can learn how to maximize your digital photography experience! Packed with more than 300 color photos and 100 color screen captures throughout, this beginner book walks you through the camera's controls, features, and shooting modes. If you''re new to the Canon EOS Rebel T2i/550D, this fun and friendly guide shifts you out of automatic mode and helps you shoot memorable digital photos. Aimed at first-time dSLR users looking for a guide that clearly and patiently explains the features and controls of the Canon EOS Rebel T2i/550D Explores the on-board controls and situational shooting Addresses Table of ContentsIntroduction 1 A Quick Look at What’s Ahead 2 Part I: Fast Track to Super Snaps 2 Part II: Taking Creative Control 2 Part III: Working with Picture Files 3 Part IV: The Part of Tens 3 Icons and Other Stuff to Note 4 About the Software Shown in This Book 5 eCheat Sheet 5 Practice, Be Patient, and Have Fun! 6 Part I: Fast Track to Super Snaps 7 Chapter 1: Getting the Lay of the Land 9 Getting Comfortable with Your Lens 10 Attaching a lens 10 Removing a lens 12 Using an IS (image stabilizer) lens 13 Shifting from autofocus to manual focus 14 Zooming in and out 15 Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus 15 Working with Memory Cards 17 Exploring External Camera Controls 18 Topside controls 18 Back-of-the-body controls 20 Front-left buttons 23 Viewing and Adjusting Camera Settings 24 Ordering from menus 25 Using the Shooting Settings display 27 Taking advantage of the Quick Control screen 29 Decoding viewfinder data 30 Checking the Camera Settings display 32 Reviewing Basic Setup Options 33 Setup Menu 1 33 Setup Menu 2 35 Setup Menu 3 37 Three more customization options 38 Chapter 2: Taking Great Pictures, Automatically 41 Getting Good Point-and-Shoot Results 42 Exploring Basic Flash Options 47 Using Red-Eye Reduction Flash 48 Shooting in the Fully Automatic Modes 49 Full Auto mode 50 Automatic scene modes ( Image Zone modes) 51 Gaining More Control with Creative Auto 58 Changing the Drive Mode 62 Chapter 3: Controlling Picture Quality 65 Diagnosing Quality Problems 66 Decoding the Quality Options 68 Considering Resolution: Large, Medium, or Small? 70 Pixels and print quality 71 Pixels and screen display size 72 Pixels and fi le size 73 Resolution recommendations 74 Understanding File Type (JPEG or Raw) 76 JPEG: The imaging (and Web) standard 76 Raw (CR2): The purist’s choice 79 Our take: Choose Fine or Raw 81 Chapter 4: Monitor Matters: Picture Playback, Live View, and Movie Mode 83 Disabling and Adjusting Instant Review 84 Viewing Images in Playback Mode 84 Viewing multiple images at a time 85 Jumping through images 86 Rotating vertical pictures 88 Zooming in for a closer view 90 Viewing Picture Data 91 Image Only display mode 92 Detailed Information display 93 Understanding Histogram display mode 96 Deleting Photos 100 Erasing single images 100 Erasing all images on your memory card 100 Erasing selected images 102 Protecting Photos 103 Using Your Monitor As a Viewfinder 105 Enabling Live View 108 Taking a shot in Live View mode 109 Customizing Live View shooting data 111 Using the Quick Control screen in Live View mode 113 Displaying an alignment grid 114 Recording Movies 115 Changing the information display 120 Setting basic recording options 121 Shooting your first movie 124 Playing movies 127 Editing movies 129 Part II: Taking Creative Control 133 Chapter 5: Getting Creative with Exposure and Lighting 135 Kicking Your Camera into Advanced Gear 136 Introducing the Exposure Trio: Aperture, Shutter Speed, and ISO 137 Understanding exposure-setting side effects 140 Doing the exposure balancing act 145 Monitoring Exposure Settings 146 Choosing an Exposure Metering Mode 149 Setting ISO, f-stop, and Shutter Speed 153 Controlling ISO 153 Adjusting aperture and shutter speed 157 Sorting through Your Camera’s Exposure-Correction Tools 160 Overriding autoexposure results with Exposure Compensation 160 Improving high-contrast shots with Highlight Tone Priority 164 Experimenting with Auto Lighting Optimization 166 Correcting lens vignetting with Peripheral Illumination Correction 169 Locking Autoexposure Settings 172 Bracketing Exposures Automatically 174 Enabling AEB 174 Putting AEB to work in HDR imaging 177 Using Flash in Advanced Exposure Modes 179 Understanding your camera’s approach to flash 180 Adjusting flash power with Flash Exposure Compensation 184 Locking the flash exposure 187 Exploring more flash options 188 Using an external flash unit 191 Chapter 6: Manipulating Focus and Color 193 Reviewing Focus Basics 193 Adjusting Autofocus Performance 196 Selecting an autofocus point 196 Changing the AF (autofocus) mode 198 Autofocusing in Live View and Movie Modes 200 Choosing the Live View or Movie mode autofocusing method 201 Quick mode autofocusing 202 Using Live mode autofocusing 205 Using Live mode autofocus with face detection 206 Manipulating Depth of Field 207 Using A-DEP mode 212 Checking depth of field 213 Controlling Color 214 Correcting colors with white balance 215 Changing the White Balance setting 217 Creating a custom White Balance setting 218 Fine-tuning White Balance settings 220 Bracketing shots with white balance 223 Choosing a Color Space: sRGB versus Adobe RGB 225 Taking a Quick Look at Picture Styles 227 Chapter 7: Putting It All Together 233 Recapping Basic Picture Settings 234 Setting Up for Specific Scenes 234 Shooting still portraits 235 Capturing action 240 Capturing scenic vistas 244 Capturing dynamic close-ups 248 Part III: Working with Picture Files 251 Chapter 8: Downloading, Organizing, and Archiving Your Photos 253 Sending Pictures to the Computer 254 Connecting your camera and computer 255 Starting the transfer process 257 Downloading images with Canon tools 258 Using ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser 265 Getting acquainted with the program 266 Viewing photos in full-screen mode 268 Organizing your photos 271 Processing Raw (CR2) Files 273 Chapter 9: Printing and Sharing Your Photos 279 Avoiding Printing Problems 280 Check the pixel count before you print 280 Allow for different print proportions 282 Get print and monitor colors in sync 284 Printing Online or In-Store 287 Printing from ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser 288 Preparing Pictures for E-Mail and Online Sharing 293 Creating an In-Camera Slide Show 299 Viewing Your Photos on a Television 302 Part IV: The Part of Tens 305 Chapter 10: Ten Fast Photo-Editing Tricks 307 Removing Red-Eye 308 Cropping Your Photo 312 Adjusting Color Saturation 315 Tweaking Color Balance 318 Adjusting Exposure 320 Three-point exposure control with the Level Adjustment filter 321 Gaining more control with the Tone Curve Adjustment filter 323 Sharpening Focus (Sort Of) 326 Shifting to AutoPilot 330 Adding Text 330 Saving Your Edited Files 332 Chapter 11: Ten Special-Purpose Features to Explore on a Rainy Day 333 Changing the Function of the Set Button 333 Customizing Exposure and Focus Lock Options 336 Disabling the AF-Assist Beam 337 Enabling Mirror Lockup 339 Adding Cleaning Instructions to Images 340 Turning Off the Shooting Settings Screen 342 Adding Original Decision Data 344 Creating Your Very Own Camera Menu 344 Tagging Files with Your Copyright Claim 347 Getting Free Help and Creative Ideas 349 Index 351

Read more less

Book SynopsisCalling all mamarazzis! Every camera-toting mom will want this guide! Moms, if you can't seem to take enough great photos of the children in your life, this is the book for you. Now you can learn how to photograph children with the style, clarity, color, and beauty you see in professional photographs.Table of ContentsIntroduction. Take One: Roll Out the Red Carpet! Chapter 1: Get Ready Get Set. The Star. The Lights! The Set. The Show. Inside Scoop from Photography Superstars (Rebecca Worple). Chapter 2: Get the Picture. Fill the Frame. Get Down, Get Down. Remember the Rule … of Thirds. Find your Focus. Shoot 'Em Up. Consider the Color. Decent Exposure. Inside Scoop from Photography Superstars (Joyce Smith). Take Two: Lights! Chapter 3: Natural Beauty. Catchlight Clues. Watch Your Back. Shed Some Light on It. Find Direction. Silhouettes. Top/ Bottom Lighting. Inside Scoop from Photography Superstars (Marla Carter). Chapter 4: Control Freak. Bounce Back. Spread the Love. Flash Mob. You've Got It. Inside Scoop from Photography Superstars (Tara Whitney). Take Three: Camera! Chapter 5: Shopping Spree. The Mega Misunderstanding. Steady Does It. Find Junior with Face Finder. On the Move. Wait for It. The Little Guys. The Big Guns. Choose your Weapon. The Canon vs. Nikon Rivalry. Inside Scoop from Photography Superstars (Lena Hyde). Chapter 6: Camera Crew. Need for (Shutter) Speed. Aper-what? ISO. The Triangle. Get out of the (Little Green) Box. Feed the Meter. Cheat Sheet. Quality Control. Best Bling (Stacy Wasmuth). Chapter 7: Compose and Create. Composition. Creativity. Inside Scoop from Photography Superstars (Audrey Woulard). Take Four: (Inter)Action! Chapter 8: Ages and Stages. Ready-to-Pop Culture. A Star is Born. Tot-arazzi. The Backpack Set. Tweeny Boppers. Inside Scoop from Photography Superstars (Carrie Sandoval). Chapter 9: What to Wear. Style Basics. Clothing Guidelines. Go Easy on Dad. Keep your Eye on the Prize. Inside Scoop from Photography Superstars (Laura Siebert). Chapter 10: No Cheese Please. The Thing on My Head. No Peeking. The Silly Song. The Competition. The Group Effort. The Last Resort(s). Inside Scoop from Photography Superstars (Rebecca Mudrick). Inside Scoop from Photography Superstars (Gillian Gauthier). Chapter 11: Milestones and Memories. Vacation Photos. Special Events. Momentous Milestones. Pet-ography. Inside Scoop from Photography Superstars (Amy Smith). Wrap: The After Party! Chapter 12: Finishing Touches. Choices, choices. Calibration. Work It Out. Color Blind. Proceed with Caution. Inside Scoop from Photography Superstars (Sherry Petersik). Chapter 13: Show It Off. The Fine Print. A World Wide Wonder. Wall Flower. Décor Diva. Inside Scoop from Photography Superstars(Kelle Hampton). Chapter 14: Hired Help. Step Away from the Camera, Ma'am. Be Choosey. Find a Keeper. Invest in Quality Memories. Go for It. A Note on US Copyright. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe availability of position information will play an increasingly important role in today's communication society. Providing a common overview of positioning in wireless networks for the first time, this innovative guide demonstrates the principal differences and similarities of wireless communications systems and navigation systems.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors ix Preface xi Acknowledgements xiii List of Abbreviations xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Ground Based Positioning Systems 4 1.1.1 DECCA 4 1.1.2 LORAN 5 1.1.3 OMEGA 6 1.2 Satellite Based Positioning Systems 6 1.2.1 GPS 8 1.2.2 GLONASS 11 1.2.3 Galileo 11 1.3 GNSS Augmentation Systems 13 1.3.1 Differential GNSS – DGNSS 14 1.3.2 Wide Area Augmentation System – WAAS 15 1.3.3 European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service – EGNOS 16 1.3.4 Multi-Functional Satellite Augmentation System – MSAS 17 1.3.5 GPS Aided Geo Augmented Navigation – GAGAN 17 1.4 Critical Environments 17 2 Positioning Principles 21 2.1 Propagation Time 22 2.1.1 Time of Arrival – TOA 23 2.1.2 Time Difference of Arrival – TDOA 26 2.1.3 Round-Trip Time of Arrival – RTTOA 28 2.1.4 Comparison of Circular and Hyperbolic Positioning 30 2.2 Angle of Arrival – AOA 32 2.2.1 Two-Dimensional 32 2.2.2 Three-Dimensional 33 2.2.3 AOA in the Uplink 35 2.2.4 The Problem of Non-Line-of-Sight Propagation 35 2.3 Fingerprinting 35 2.3.1 Cell-ID 36 2.3.2 Received Signal Strength – RSS 37 2.3.3 Power Delay Profile – PDP 38 3 Measurements and Parameter Extraction 41 3.1 Parameter Estimation 41 3.1.1 The Estimation Problem 41 3.1.2 Cramér – Rao Lower Bound – CRLB 43 3.2 Propagation Time 46 3.2.1 Cramér – Rao Lower Bound for Time Estimation 47 3.2.2 Timing Estimation in White Gaussian Noise 51 3.3 Angle of Arrival – AOA 59 3.3.1 Uniform Linear Array Antenna 59 3.3.2 AOA Estimation in Additive White Gaussian Noise 63 3.3.3 Cramér – Rao Lower Bound for AOA Estimation 65 4 Position Estimation 69 4.1 Triangulation 69 4.1.1 Triangulation with Ideal Measurements 70 4.1.2 Triangulation with Erroneous Measurements 79 4.2 Trilateration 82 4.2.1 Trilateration with Ideal Measurements 83 4.2.2 Trilateration with Erroneous Measurements 84 4.3 Multilateration 88 4.3.1 Multilateration with Ideal Measurements 88 4.3.2 Multilateration with Erroneous Measurements 91 4.4 Fingerprinting 93 4.5 Performance Bounds and Measures 94 4.5.1 Root Mean Square Error – RMSE 94 4.5.2 Cumulative Distribution Function – CDF 94 4.5.3 Circular Error Probability – CEP 94 4.5.4 Positioning Cramér – Rao Lower Bound – CRLB 95 4.5.5 Dilution of Precision – DOP 96 4.5.6 Complexity 99 5 Position Tracking 101 5.1 Kalman Filter 104 5.2 Extended Kalman Filter 108 5.3 Particle Filter 111 5.4 Further Approaches 115 5.4.1 Grid-Based Methods 115 5.4.2 Second Order Extended Kalman Filter 117 5.4.3 Unscented Kalman Filter 117 5.4.4 Gaussian Mixture Filter 117 5.4.5 Rao – Blackwellization 118 5.4.6 Map Matching 118 6 Scenarios and Models 119 6.1 Scenarios 119 6.1.1 Rural Environment 120 6.1.2 Urban Environment 121 6.1.3 Transition from Outdoor to Indoor 126 6.1.4 Indoor Environment 126 6.2 Channel Characterization 127 6.2.1 Channel Measurements 127 6.2.2 Ray Tracing 127 6.3 Channel Models 127 6.4 Mobility Models 129 7 Advanced Positioning Algorithms 135 7.1 Hybrid Data Fusion 135 7.1.1 General Hybrid Data Fusion Aspects 135 7.1.2 Extension of Derived Algorithms to More Sources 135 7.1.3 Simulation Results 137 7.2 Cooperative Positioning 139 7.2.1 General Cooperative Positioning Aspects 139 7.2.2 Example for Centralized Cooperative Positioning 141 7.2.3 Simulation Results 144 7.3 Multipath and Non-Line-of-Sight Mitigation 144 8 Systems 147 8.1 GSM 147 8.1.1 System Parameters 148 8.1.2 Measurements 151 8.1.3 Timing Advance – TA 151 8.1.4 Enhanced Observed Time Difference – EOTD 152 8.1.5 Uplink Time of Arrival – UTOA 154 8.1.6 Assisted GNSS – AGNSS 155 8.1.7 Cramér – Rao Lower Bounds 156 8.2 UMTS 158 8.2.1 System Parameters 159 8.2.2 Measurements 160 8.2.3 Cell-ID and Enhanced Cell-ID Based 162 8.2.4 Observed Time Difference of Arrival – OTDOA 163 8.2.5 Comparison of UMTS and GSM 165 8.2.6 Cramér – Rao Lower Bounds 165 8.3 3GPP-LTE 167 8.3.1 System Parameters 168 8.3.2 Measurements 171 8.3.3 Synchronization 173 8.3.4 Cramér – Rao Lower Bounds 173 8.3.5 Performance Results 179 8.4 Other Wide and Medium Range Systems 182 8.4.1 WiMAX 182 8.4.2 WLAN 183 8.5 Short Range 186 8.5.1 Bluetooth 186 8.5.2 ZigBee 188 8.5.3 Ultra-Wideband – UWB 189 8.5.4 Radio-Frequency Identification and Near Feld Communication – RFID and NFC 191 8.6 Standardization 193 9 Applications 197 9.1 Macro Diversity 197 9.1.1 Cellular Diversity 197 9.1.2 Location-Based Synchronization for Cellular OFDM 203 9.1.3 Position Aware Adaptive Communications Systems 209 9.2 Radio Resource Management – RRM 216 9.2.1 Location-Based Inter-Cell Interference Coordination – ICIC 216 9.2.2 Location-Aided Relay Selection 219 9.3 Mobility Management 223 9.3.1 Location Assisted Handover Prediction for WiFi and LTE – Algorithm 224 9.3.2 Scenario 225 9.3.3 Summary of Results 225 9.4 Emergency Calls 226 9.5 Location-Based Services – LBS 227 9.5.1 Mobile and Location Aware Advertising 228 9.5.2 Social Networks 228 9.5.3 Navigation and Route Planning 229 9.5.4 Mobile Gaming 229 9.5.5 Disruptive Applications 229 9.5.6 Future Applications 230 References 233 Index 245

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive presentation of the video communication techniques and systems, this book examines 4G wireless systems which are set to revolutionise ubiquitous multimedia communication. 4G Wireless Video Communications covers the fundamental theory and looks at systems' descriptions with a focus on digital video.Table of ContentsForward xiii Preface xv About the Authors xxi About the Series Editors xxv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Why 4G? 1 1.2 4G Status and Key Technologies 3 1.2.1 3GPP LTE 3 1.2.2 Mobile WiMAX 4 1.3 Video Over Wireless 5 1.3.1 Video Compression Basics 5 1.3.2 Video Coding Standards 9 1.3.3 Error Resilience 10 1.3.4 Network Integration 12 1.3.5 Cross-Layer Design for Wireless Video Delivery 14 1.4 Challenges and Opportunities for 4G Wireless Video 15 References 17 2 Wireless Communications and Networking 19 2.1 Characteristics and Modeling of Wireless Channels 19 2.1.1 Degradation in Radio Propagation 19 2.1.2 Rayleigh Fading Channel 20 2.2 Adaptive Modulation and Coding 23 2.2.1 Basics of Modulation Schemes 23 2.2.2 System Model of AMC 25 2.2.3 Channel Quality Estimation and Prediction 26 2.2.4 Modulation and Coding Parameter Adaptation 28 2.2.5 Estimation Error and Delay in AMC 30 2.2.6 Selection of Adaptation Interval 30 2.3 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 31 2.3.1 Background 31 2.3.2 System Model and Implementation 31 2.3.3 Pros and Cons 33 2.4 Multiple-Input Multiple-Output Systems 34 2.4.1 MIMO System Model 34 2.4.2 MIMO Capacity Gain: Multiplexing 35 2.4.3 MIMO Diversity Gain: Beamforming 35 2.4.4 Diversity-Multiplexing Trade-offs 35 2.4.5 Space-Time Coding 36 2.5 Cross-Layer Design of AMC and HARQ 37 2.5.1 Background 38 2.5.2 System Modeling 39 2.5.3 Cross-Layer Design 41 2.5.4 Performance Analysis 44 2.5.5 Performance 45 2.6 Wireless Networking 47 2.6.1 Layering Network Architectures 48 2.6.2 Network Service Models 50 2.6.3 Multiplexing Methods 51 2.6.4 Connection Management in IP-Based Data Networks 53 2.6.5 QoS Handoff 54 2.7 Summary 55 References 56 3 Video Coding and Communications 59 3.1 Digital Video Compression – Why and How Much? 59 3.2 Basics 60 3.2.1 Video Formats 60 3.3 Information Theory 64 3.3.1 Entropy and Mutual Information 65 3.3.2 Encoding of an Information Source 66 3.3.3 Variable Length Coding 68 3.3.4 Quantization 71 3.4 Encoder Architectures 73 3.4.1 DPCM 73 3.4.2 Hybrid Transform-DPCM Architecture 77 3.4.3 A Typical Hybrid Transform DPCM-based Video Codec 79 3.4.4 Motion Compensation 82 3.4.5 DCT and Quantization 83 3.4.6 Procedures Performed at the Decoder 84 3.5 Wavelet-Based Video Compression 86 3.5.1 Motion-Compensated Temporal Wavelet Transform Using Lifting 90 References 94 4 4G Wireless Communications and Networking 97 4.1 IMT-Advanced and 4G 97 4.2 LTE 99 4.2.1 Introduction 101 4.2.2 Protocol Architecture 102 4.2.3 LTE Layer 2 107 4.2.4 The Evolution of Architecture 110 4.2.5 LTE Standardization 110 4.3 WIMAX-IEEE 802.16m 112 4.3.1 Network Architecture 113 4.3.2 System Reference Model 114 4.3.3 Protocol Structure 114 4.3.4 Other Functions Supported by IEEE 802.16m for Further Study 125 4.4 3GPP2 UMB 125 4.4.1 Architecture Reference Model 126 4.4.2 Layering Architecture and Protocols 127 Acknowledgements 133 References 133 5 Advanced Video Coding (AVC)/H.264 Standard 135 5.1 Digital Video Compression Standards 135 5.2 AVC/H.264 Coding Algorithm 138 5.2.1 Temporal Prediction 139 5.2.2 Spatial Prediction 147 5.2.3 The Transform 148 5.2.4 Quantization and Scaling 151 5.2.5 Scanning 151 5.2.6 Variable Length Lossless Codecs 152 5.2.7 Deblocking Filter 155 5.2.8 Hierarchy in the Coded Video 156 5.2.9 Buffers 158 5.2.10 Encapsulation/Packetization 159 5.2.11 Profiles 160 5.2.12 Levels 163 5.2.13 Parameter Sets 167 5.2.14 Supplemental Enhancement Information (SEI) 167 5.2.15 Subjective Tests 168 References 168 6 Content Analysis for Communications 171 6.1 Introduction 171 6.2 Content Analysis 173 6.2.1 Low-Level Feature Extraction 174 6.2.2 Image Segmentation 179 6.2.3 Video Object Segmentation 185 6.2.4 Video Structure Understanding 200 6.2.5 Analysis Methods in Compressed Domain 208 6.3 Content-Based Video Representation 209 6.4 Content-Based Video Coding and Communications 212 6.4.1 Object-Based Video Coding 212 6.4.2 Error Resilience for Object-Based Video 215 6.5 Content Description and Management 217 6.5.1 MPEG-7 217 6.5.2 MPEG-21 219 References 219 7 Video Error Resilience and Error Concealment 223 7.1 Introduction 223 7.2 Error Resilience 224 7.2.1 Resynchronization Markers 224 7.2.2 Reversible Variable Length Coding (RVLC) 225 7.2.3 Error-Resilient Entropy Coding (EREC) 226 7.2.4 Independent Segment Decoding 228 7.2.5 Insertion of Intra Blocks or Frames 228 7.2.6 Scalable Coding 229 7.2.7 Multiple Description Coding 230 7.3 Channel Coding 232 7.4 Error Concealment 234 7.4.1 Intra Error Concealment Techniques 234 7.4.2 Inter Error Concealment Techniques 234 7.5 Error Resilience Features of H.264/AVC 236 7.5.1 Picture Segmentation 236 7.5.2 Intra Placement 236 7.5.3 Reference Picture Selection 237 7.5.4 Data Partitioning 237 7.5.5 Parameter Sets 237 7.5.6 Flexible Macroblock Ordering 238 7.5.7 Redundant Slices (RSs) 239 References 239 8 Cross-Layer Optimized Video Delivery over 4G Wireless Networks 241 8.1 Why Cross-Layer Design? 241 8.2 Quality-Driven Cross-Layer Framework 242 8.3 Application Layer 244 8.4 Rate Control at the Transport Layer 244 8.4.1 Background 244 8.4.2 System Model 246 8.4.3 Network Setting 246 8.4.4 Problem Formulation 248 8.4.5 Problem Solution 248 8.4.6 Performance Evaluation 249 8.5 Routing at the Network Layer 252 8.5.1 Background 252 8.5.2 System Model 254 8.5.3 Routing Metric 255 8.5.4 Problem Formulation 257 8.5.5 Problem Solution 258 8.5.6 Implementation Considerations 262 8.5.7 Performance Evaluation 263 8.6 Content-Aware Real-Time Video Streaming 265 8.6.1 Background 265 8.6.2 Background 265 8.6.3 Problem Formulation 266 8.6.4 Routing Based on Priority Queuing 267 8.6.5 Problem Solution 269 8.6.6 Performance Evaluation 270 8.7 Cross-Layer Optimization for Video Summary Transmission 272 8.7.1 Background 272 8.7.2 Problem Formulation 274 8.7.3 System Model 276 8.7.4 Link Adaptation for Good Content Coverage 278 8.7.5 Problem Solution 280 8.7.6 Performance Evaluation 283 8.8 Conclusions 287 References 287 9 Content-based Video Communications 291 9.1 Network-Adaptive Video Object Encoding 291 9.2 Joint Source Coding and Unequal Error Protection 294 9.2.1 Problem Formulation 295 9.2.2 Solution and Implementation Details 299 9.2.3 Application on Energy-Efficient Wireless Network 301 9.2.4 Application on Differentiated Services Networks 303 9.3 Joint Source-Channel Coding with Utilization of Data Hiding 305 9.3.1 Hiding Shape in Texture 308 9.3.2 Joint Source-Channel Coding 309 9.3.3 Joint Source-Channel Coding and Data Hiding 311 9.3.4 Experimental Results 315 References 322 10 AVC/H.264 Application – Digital TV 325 10.1 Introduction 325 10.1.1 Encoder Flexibility 326 10.2 Random Access 326 10.2.1 GOP Bazaar 327 10.2.2 Buffers, Before and After 332 10.3 Bitstream Splicing 335 10.4 Trick Modes 337 10.4.1 Fast Forward 338 10.4.2 Reverse 338 10.4.3 Pause 338 10.5 Carriage of AVC/H.264 Over MPEG-2 Systems 338 10.5.1 Packetization 339 10.5.2 Audio Video Synchronization 344 10.5.3 Transmitter and Receiver Clock Synchronization 344 10.5.4 System Target Decoder and Timing Model 344 References 345 11 Interactive Video Communications 347 11.1 Video Conferencing and Telephony 347 11.1.1 IP and Broadband Video Telephony 347 11.1.2 Wireless Video Telephony 348 11.1.3 3G-324M Protocol 348 11.2 Region-of-Interest Video Communications 351 11.2.1 ROI based Bit Allocation 351 11.2.2 Content Adaptive Background Skipping 356 References 366 12 Wireless Video Streaming 369 12.1 Introduction 369 12.2 Streaming System Architecture 370 12.2.1 Video Compression 370 12.2.2 Application Layer QoS Control 372 12.2.3 Protocols 374 12.2.4 Video/Audio Synchronization 376 12.3 Delay-Constrained Retransmission 377 12.3.1 Receiver-Based Control 378 12.3.2 Sender-Based Control 378 12.3.3 Hybrid Control 379 12.3.4 Rate-Distortion Optimal Retransmission 379 12.4 Considerations for Wireless Video Streaming 382 12.4.1 Cross-Layer Optimization and Physical Layer Consideration 383 12.5 P2P Video Streaming 384 References 385 Index 389

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a complete and comprehensive overview of 3G UMTS charging services Evolving from offline billing of traditional telecommunications, charging for IP services in mobile networks is challenging; charging convergence is one of the major trends in the telecom industry.Table of ContentsPreface. Chapter 1: Introduction. 1.1 Charging for Mobile All-IP Networks. 1.2 Online Charging. 1.3 Concluding Remarks. 1.4 Review Questions. 1.5 References. Chapter 2: Telecommunications Networks. 2.1 Public Switched Telephone Network. 2.2 Global System for Mobile Communications. 2.3 Universal Mobile Telecommunications System. 2.4 IP Multimedia Core Network Subsystem. 2.5 WLAN and Cellular Interworking. 2.6 Concluding Remarks. 2.7 Review Questions. 2.8 References. Chapter 3: Telecommunications Services. 3.1 Automated Attendant. 3.2 Charging Services. 3.3 Routing Services. 3.4 Dialing Services. 3.5 Screening Services. 3.6 Interrupt Services. 3.7 Mass Call. 3.8 Universal Personal Telecommunications Number. 3.9 Interactive Voice Response Techniques. 3.10 Other Telephone Services. 3.11 Mobile Telecommunications Services. 3.12 Concluding Remarks. 3.13 Review Questions. 3.14 References. Chapter 4: GPRS Tunneling Protocol Extension. 4.1 The GTP' Protocol. 4.2 Connection Setup Procedure. 4.3 CDR Transfer Procedure. 4.4 Prepaid Quota Management. 4.5 Prepaid Quota Management Procedure. 4.6 Concluding Remarks. 4.7 Review Questions. 4.8 References. Chapter 5: Mobile Charging Protocols. 5.1 Customized Application for the Mobile Network Enhanced Logic (CAMEL). 5.2 Remote Access Dial In User Service (RADIUS). 5.3 Diameter. 5.4 Diameter-based Offline Charging. 5.5 Diameter-based Online Charging. 5.6 Session Initiation Protocol: IMS Charging Headers. 5.7 Concluding Remarks. 5.8 Review Questions. 5.9 References. Chapter 6: UMTS CS/PS Charging Management. 6.1 Circuit Switched Service Domain. 6.2 Packet Switched Service Domain. 6.3 Concluding Remarks. 6.4 Review Questions . 6.5 References. Chapter 7: IMS and MMS Offline Charging Management. 7.1 Offline Charging for IMS. 7.2 IMS Charging Correlation. 7.3 Multimedia Messaging Service Domain. 7.4 Mediation Device. 7.5 Concluding Remarks. 7.6 Review Questions. 7.7 References. Chapter 8: UMTS Online Charging. 8.1 UMTS Charging Architecture (Release 6). 8.2 Online Charging Scenarios. 8.3 Concluding Remarks. 8.4 Review Questions. 8.5 References. Chapter 9: Service Data Flow-based Charging. 9.1 Online Flow Based Charging Architecture. 9.2 Content-based Service for Online TPF/GPRS. 9.3 Online IMS Flow-based Charging. 9.4 Policy and Charging Control Integration. 9.5 Concluding Remarks. 9.6 Review Questions. 9.7 References. Chapter 10: Billing for VoIP Services. 10.1 A VoIP Network Architecture. 10.2 Call Detail Record Generation. 10.3 Deriving Call Holding Time Distributions. 10.4 Observations form the Call Holding Time Statistics. 10.5 Concluding Remarks. 10.6 Review Questions. 10.7 References. Appendix A. Connection Failure Detection for GTP'. A.1 GTP' Failure Detection. A.2 Numerical Examples. A.3 Concluding Remarks. A.4 Notation. A.5 References. Appendix B. Charging for Integrated Prepaid VoIP and Messaging Services. B.1 Prepaid Application Server of SIP-based Services. B.2 Charging Integration for Prepaid Calls and Instant Messaging. B.2.1 Prepaid IMS-to-PSTN Call Setup and Release. B.2.2 Prepaid Instant Messaging Delivery. B.2.3 Charging Policy of the Prepaid Application Server. B.3 Performance for the PAS Charging Policy. B.4 Concluding Remarks. B.5 Notation. B.6 References. Appendix C. Modeling Credit Reservation for OCS. C.1 Recharge Threshold-based Credit Reservation. C.2 Numerical Examples and Conclusions. C.3 Notation. C.4 References. Appendix D. Reducing Credit Re-authorization Cost. D.1 Credit Re-authorization Procedure. D.2 The Threshold-based Scheme. D.3 Numerical Examples. D.4 Concluding Remarks. D.5 Notation. D.6 References. Appendix E. Credit Redistribution for UMTS Prepaid Service through CAMEL. E.1 The IN Approach for the UMTS Prepaid Service. E.2 The Prepaid Charging Message Flow . E.3 The Prepaid Credit Reclaim (PCR) Mechanism. E.4 Concluding Remarks. E.5 Notation. E.6 References. Appendix F. An Example of IMS Charging Application Server. F.1 Rf/Ro Interface and Session Initialization. F.2 Creating Rf/Ro Requests. F.3 Receiving Answers. F.4 Error/Timeout Handling and Debugging. F.5 References. Appendix G. Non-IP-Based Prepaid Phone Service. G.1 Non-IP-based Mobile Prepaid Services. G.2 Wireless Intelligent Network Approach. G.2.1 WIN Call Origination. G.2.2 WIN Call Termination. G.2.3 WIN Prepaid Recharging. G.3 Service Node Approach. G.4 Hot Billing Approach. G.4.1 Hot Billing Initialization and Call Origination. G.4.2 Hot Billing Customer Query and Recharging. G.5 Handset-Based Approach. G.5.1 SIM Card Issues. G.5.2 Handset-Based Call Origination. G.5.3 Handset-Based Prepaid Recharging. G.6 Comparison of the Prepaid Solutions. G.6.1 Roaming to other networks. G.6.2 Scalability. G.6.3 Fraud Risk. G.6.4 Initial System Setup. G.6.5 Service Features. G.6.6 Real-Time Rating. G.7 Business Issues. G.8 Concluding Remarks. G.9. Review Questions. G.10. References. Appendix H. Performance of Service Node Based Mobile Prepaid Service. H.1 The Service Node Approach. H.2 Numeric Examples. H.2.1 Effects of the Variation of Call Charges. H.2.2 Effect of I on E[BL*]/I. H.2.3 The Cost Function. H.3 Concluding Remarks. H.4 Notation. H.5 References.

Read more less

Book SynopsisComprehensive textbook covering the essentials in circuit analysis, laws, design and behaviour, offering worked problems and solutions. Contains only the basic and most important information on electrical engineering for 'non-EE' students Includes phasor diagrams and a clear description of complex currents and voltages.Trade Review"This relatively short, exceptionally well-written book introduces non-electrical engineering students to the world of circuits." (Choice Reviews, June 2009)Table of ContentsAbout the Author. 1 The Design Process. 2 Electronic circuits. Overview: DC Circuits. 3 Circuit Laws and Equivalences. 4 Circuit analysis. 5 Controlled Sources and Nonlinear components. Overview:Operational Amplifiers. 6 The Operational Amplifier. 7 Linear operation of the opamp. 8 Mixed and dynamic opamp circuits. Overview: AC Circuits. 9 AC Circuits and Phasor diagrams. 10 Complex currents and voltages. 11 Frequency domain behaviour. Overview: The analysis of change. 12 Change behaviour. 13 Small signal analysis. Appendix.

Read more less

Book SynopsisCommunications technologies increasingly pervade our everyday lives, yet the underlying principles are a mystery to most. Even among engineers and technicians, understanding of this complex subject remains limited. However, there is undeniably a growing need for all technology disciplines to gain intimate awareness of how their fields are affected by a more densely networked world. The computer science field in particular is profoundly affected by the growing dominance of communications, and computer scientists must increasingly engage with electrical engineering concepts. Yet communications technology is often perceived as a challenging subject with a steep learning curve. To address this need, the authors have transformed classroom-tested materials into this accessible textbook to give readers an intimate understanding of fundamental communications concepts. Readers are introduced to the key essentials, and each selected topic is discussed in detail to promote mastery. EngTable of ContentsPreface. 1 An Overview of Computer Communications. Further Reading. 2 Signal Space Representation. 2.1 The Vector Space. 2.2 The Signal Space. 2.3 Summary. Further Reading. Exercises. 3 Fourier Representations of Signals. 3.1 The Fourier Series. 3.2 Cosine-only Expansion of Fourier Series. 3.3 Fourier Series in Complex Exponentials. 3.4 The Fourier Transform. 3.5 Physical Meaning of Fourier Transform. 3.6 Properties of the Fourier Transform. 3.7 Fourier Transform Representations for Periodic Signals. 3.8 The Discrete Fourier Transform. 3.9 The Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform. 3.10 Physical Meaning of the Discrete Fourier Transform. Further Reading. Exercises. 4 Analog Modulation Techniques. 4.1 Amplitude Modulation. 4.2 Double-sideband Suppressed Carrier (DSB-SC). 4.3 Single-sideband (SSB) Modulation. 4.4 Frequency Modulation (FM). 4.5 Superheterodyne AM and FM Receivers. 4.6 Analog Modulation with Frequency Division Multiplexing. 4.7 Concluding Remarks. Further Reading. Exercises. 5 Digital Modulation Techniques. 5.1 Baseband Pulse Transmission. 5.2 Amplitude-shift Keying (ASK). 5.3 Binary Phase-shift Keying (BPSK). 5.4 Binary Frequency-shift Keying (FSK). 5.5 Quadriphase-shift Keying (QPSK). 5.6 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation. 5.7 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM). 5.8 OFDM in Wireless Local Area Networks. 5.9 Digital Audio Broadcast Using OFDM and TDMA. 5.10 The Role of Inner Product in Digital Modulation. 5.11 Review of Digital Modulation Techniques. Further Reading. Exercises. 6 Multiple-access Communications. 6.1 Frequency-division Multiple Access (FDMA). 6.2 Time-division Multiple Access (TDMA). 6.3 Code-division Multiple Access (CDMA). 6.4 Carrier-sense Multiple Access (CSMA). 6.5 The Multiplexing Transmission Problem. Further Reading. Exercises. 7 Spread-spectrum Communications. 7.1 The Basic Concept of Spread-spectrum. 7.2 Baseband Transmission for Direct-sequence Spread-spectrum (DSSS) Communications. 7.3 BPSK Modulation for DSSS. 7.4 Pseudo-random Binary Sequence. 7.5 Frequency-hopping Spread-spectrum. 7.6 Application of Spread-spectrum Techniques to Multiple-access Systems. Further Reading. Exercises. 8 Source Coding and Channel Coding. 8.1 Average Codeword Length of Source Coding. 8.2 Prefix Codes. 8.3 Huffman Coding. 8.4 Channel Coding. 8.5 Error-correcting Capability and Hamming Distance. 8.6 Hamming Codes. 8.7 Convolutional Codes. Further Reading. Exercises. Appendix. Bibliography. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisHVDC is a critical solution to several major problems encountered when trying to maintain systemic links and quality in large-scale renewable energy environments. HDVC can resolve a number of issues, including voltage stability of AC power networks, reducing fault current, and optimal management of electric power, ensuring the technology will play an increasingly important role in the electric power industry. To address the pressing need for an up-to-date and comprehensive treatment of the subject, Kim, Sood, Jang, Lim and Lee have collaborated to produce this key text and reference. Combining classroom-tested materials from North America and Asia, HVDC Transmission compactly summarizes the latest research results, and includes the insights of experts from power systems, power electronics, and simulation backgrounds. The authors walk readers through basic theory and practical applications, while also providing the broader historical context and future development of HVDC tecTrade Review?This book succeeds in providing a comprehensive textbook on HVDC system design, planning, and application issues. A wide range of subjects including power electronics, power systems. substation design, and control system design are covered.? IEEE Power & Energy Magazine, Jan/Feb 2010)Table of ContentsForeword. Preface. Acknowledgments. Author Biographies. List of Symbols. 1 Development of HVDC Technology. 1.1 Introduction. 1.2 Advantages of HVDC Systems. 1.3 HVDC System Costs. 1.4 Overview and Organization of HVDC Systems. 1.5 Review of the HVDC System Reliability. 1.6 HVDC Characteristics and Economic Aspects. References. 2 Power Conversion. 2.1 Thyristor. 2.2 3-Phase Converter. 2.3 3-Phase Full Bridge Converter. 2.4 12-Pulse Converter. References. 3 Harmonics of HVDC and Removal. 3.1 Introduction. 3.2 Determination of Resulting Harmonic Impedance. 3.3 Active Power Filter. References. 4 Control of HVDC Converter and System. 4.1 Converter Control for an HVDC System. 4.2 Commutation Failure. 4.3 HVDC Control and Design. 4.4 HVDC Control Functions. 4.5 Reactive Power and Voltage Stability. 4.6 Summary. References. 5 Interactions between AC and DC Systems. 5.1 Definition of Short Circuit Ratio and Effective Short Circuit Ratio. 5.2 Interaction between HVDC and AC Power System. References. 6 Main Circuit Design. 6.1 Converter Circuit and Components. 6.2 Converter Transformer. 6.3 Cooling System. 6.4 HVDC Overhead Line. 6.5 HVDC Earth Electrodes. 6.6 HVDC Cable. 6.7 HVDC Telecommunications. 6.8 Current Sensors. 6.9 HVDC Noise and Vibration. References. 7 Fault Behavior and Protection of HVDC System. 7.1 Valve Protection Functions. 7.2 Protective Action of an HVDC System. 7.3 Protection by Control Actions. 7.4 Fault Analysis. References. 8 Insulation Coordination of HVDC. 8.1 Surge Arrester. 8.2 Functions of the Arresters in an HVDC Station. 8.3 Insulation Coordination of Cheju HVDC System. References. 9 A Practical Example of an HVDC System. 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 System Description. 9.3 Phase Control. References. 10 Other Converter Configurations for HVDC Transmission. 10.1 Introduction. 10.2 Voltage Source Converter (VSC). 10.3 CCC and CSCC HVDC System. 10.4 Multi-Terminal DC Transmission. References. 11 Modeling and Simulation of HVDC Systems. 11.1 Simulation Scope and Range. 11.2 Fast Methods for Accurate Simulation. 11.3 HVDC Modeling and Simulation. 11.4 Cheju?Haenam HVDC Real-Time Digital Simulator. References. 12 Present and Proposed Future Installations of HVDC Systems. 12.1 USA. 12.2 Japan. 12.3 Europe. 12.4 China. 12.5 India. 12.6 Malaysia/Philippines. 12.7 Australia/New Zealand. 12.8 Brazil. 12.9 Africa. 13 Trends for HVDC Applications. 13.1 Wind Farm Technology. 13.2 Modern Voltage Source Converter (VSC) HVDC Systems. 13.3 800 kV HVDC System. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisInduction motors are the most important workhorses in industry. They are mostly used as constant-speed drives when fed from a voltage source of fixed frequency. Advent of advanced power electronic converters and powerful digital signal processors, however, has made possible the development of high performance, adjustable speed AC motor drives.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xvii About the Authors xxi List of Symbols xxiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Induction Motor 1 1.2 Induction Motor Control 2 1.3 Review of Previous Work 2 1.3.1 Scalar Control 3 1.3.2 Vector Control 3 1.3.3 Speed Sensorless Control 4 1.3.4 Intelligent Control of Induction Motor 4 1.3.5 Application Status and Research Trends of Induction Motor Control 4 1.4 Present Study 4 2 Philosophy of Induction Motor Control 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Induction Motor Control Theory 10 2.2.1 Nonlinear Feedback Control 10 2.2.2 Induction Motor Models 11 2.2.3 Field-Oriented Control 13 2.2.4 Direct Self Control 14 2.2.5 Acceleration Control Proposed 15 2.2.6 Need for Intelligent Control 16 2.2.7 Intelligent Induction Motor Control Schemes 17 2.3 Induction Motor Control Algorithms 19 2.4 Speed Estimation Algorithms 23 2.5 Hardware 25 3 Modeling and Simulation of Induction Motor 31 3.1 Introduction 31 3.2 Modeling of Induction Motor 32 3.3 Current-Input Model of Induction Motor 34 3.3.1 Current (3/2) Rotating Transformation Sub-Model 35 3.3.2 Electrical Sub-Model 35 3.3.3 Mechanical Sub-Model 37 3.3.4 Simulation of Current-Input Model of Induction Motor 37 3.4 Voltage-Input Model of Induction Motor 40 3.4.1 Simulation Results of ‘Motor 1’ 43 3.4.2 Simulation Results of ‘Motor 2’ 43 3.4.3 Simulation Results of ‘Motor 3’ 44 3.5 Discrete-State Model of Induction Motor 45 3.6 Modeling and Simulation of Sinusoidal PWM 49 3.7 Modeling and Simulation of Encoder 51 3.8 Modeling of Decoder 54 3.9 Simulation of Induction Motor with PWM Inverter and Encoder/Decoder 54 3.10 MATLAB/Simulink Programming Examples 55 3.11 Summary 73 4 Fundamentals of Intelligent Control Simulation 75 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 Getting Started with Fuzzy Logical Simulation 75 4.2.1 Fuzzy Logic Control 75 4.2.2 Example: Fuzzy PI Controller 77 4.3 Getting Started with Neural-Network Simulation 83 4.3.1 Artificial Neural Network 83 4.3.2 Example: Implementing Park’s Transformation Using ANN 85 4.4 Getting Started with Kalman Filter Simulation 90 4.4.1 Kalman Filter 92 4.4.2 Example: Signal Estimation in the Presence of Noise by Kalman Filter 94 4.5 Getting Started with Genetic Algorithm Simulation 98 4.5.1 Genetic Algorithm 98 4.5.2 Example: Optimizing a Simulink Model by Genetic Algorithm 100 4.6 Summary 107 5 Expert-System-based Acceleration Control 109 5.1 Introduction 109 5.2 Relationship between the Stator Voltage Vector and Rotor Acceleration 110 5.3 Analysis of Motor Acceleration of the Rotor 113 5.4 Control Strategy of Voltage Vector Comparison and Voltage Vector Retaining 114 5.5 Expert-System Control for Induction Motor 118 5.6 Computer Simulation and Comparison 122 5.6.1 The First Simulation Example 123 5.6.2 The Second Simulation Example 125 5.6.3 The Third Simulation Example 126 5.6.4 The Fourth Simulation Example 127 5.6.5 The Fifth Simulation Example 129 5.7 Summary 131 6 Hybrid Fuzzy/PI Two-Stage Control 133 6.1 Introduction 133 6.2 Two-Stage Control Strategy for an Induction Motor 135 6.3 Fuzzy Frequency Control 136 6.3.1 Fuzzy Database 138 6.3.2 Fuzzy Rulebase 139 6.3.3 Fuzzy Inference 141 6.3.4 Defuzzification 142 6.3.5 Fuzzy Frequency Controller 142 6.4 Current Magnitude PI Control 143 6.5 Hybrid Fuzzy/PI Two-Stage Controller for an Induction Motor 145 6.6 Simulation Study on a 7.5 kW Induction Motor 145 6.6.1 Comparison with Field-Oriented Control 146 6.6.2 Effects of Parameter Variation 148 6.6.3 Effects of Noise in the Measured Speed and Input Current 149 6.6.4 Effects of Magnetic Saturation 149 6.6.5 Effects of Load Torque Variation 150 6.7 Simulation Study on a 0.147 kW Induction Motor 152 6.8 MATLAB/Simulink Programming Examples 158 6.8.1 Programming Example 1: Voltage-Input Model of an Induction Motor 158 6.8.2 Programming Example 2: Fuzzy/PI Two-Stage Controller 163 6.9 Summary 165 7 Neural-Network-based Direct Self Control 167 7.1 Introduction 167 7.2 Neural Networks 168 7.3 Neural-Network Controller of DSC 170 7.3.1 Flux Estimation Sub-Net 170 7.3.2 Torque Calculation Sub-Net 171 7.3.3 Flux Angle Encoder and Flux Magnitude Calculation Sub-Net 173 7.3.4 Hysteresis Comparator Sub-Net 178 7.3.5 Optimum Switching Table Sub-Net 180 7.3.6 Linking of Neural Networks 183 7.4 Simulation of Neural-Network-based DSC 184 7.5 MATLAB/Simulink Programming Examples 187 7.5.1 Programming Example 1: Direct Self Controller 187 7.5.2 Programming Example 2: Neural-Network-based Optimum Switching Table 192 7.6 Summary 196 8 Parameter Estimation Using Neural Networks 199 8.1 Introduction 199 8.2 Integral Equations Based on the ‘T’ Equivalent Circuit 200 8.3 Integral Equations based on the ‘G’ Equivalent Circuit 203 8.4 Parameter Estimation of Induction Motor Using ANN 205 8.4.1 Estimation of Electrical Parameters 206 8.4.2 ANN-based Mechanical Model 208 8.4.3 Simulation Studies 210 8.5 ANN-based Induction Motor Models 214 8.6 Effect of Noise in Training Data on Estimated Parameters 217 8.7 Estimation of Load, Flux and Speed 218 8.7.1 Estimation of Load 218 8.7.2 Estimation of Stator Flux 222 8.7.3 Estimation of Rotor Speed 226 8.8 MATLAB/Simulink Programming Examples 231 8.8.1 Programming Example 1: Field-Oriented Control (FOC) System 231 8.8.2 Programming Example 2: Sensorless Control of Induction Motor 234 8.9 Summary 240 9 GA-Optimized Extended Kalman Filter for Speed Estimation 243 9.1 Introduction 243 9.2 Extended State Model of Induction Motor 244 9.3 Extended Kalman Filter Algorithm for Rotor Speed Estimation 245 9.3.1 Prediction of State 245 9.3.2 Estimation of Error Covariance Matrix 245 9.3.3 Computation of Kalman Filter Gain 245 9.3.4 State Estimation 246 9.3.5 Update of the Error Covariance Matrix 246 9.4 Optimized Extended Kalman Filter 247 9.5 Optimizing the Noise Matrices of EKF Using GA 250 9.6 Speed Estimation for a Sensorless Direct Self Controller 253 9.7 Speed Estimation for a Field-Oriented Controller 255 9.8 MATLAB/Simulink Programming Examples 260 9.8.1 Programming Example 1: Voltage-Frequency Controlled (VFC) Drive 260 9.8.2 Programming Example 2: GA-Optimized EKF for Speed Estimation 264 9.8.3 Programming Example 3: GA-based EKF Sensorless Voltage-Frequency Controlled Drive 268 9.8.4 Programming Example 4: GA-based EKF Sensorless FOC Induction Motor Drive 269 9.9 Summary 270 10 Optimized Random PWM Strategies Based On Genetic Algorithms 273 10.1 Introduction 273 10.2 PWM Performance Evaluation 274 10.2.1 Fourier Analysis of PWM Waveform 276 10.2.2 Harmonic Evaluation of Typical Waveforms 277 10.3 Random PWM Methods 283 10.3.1 Random Carrier-Frequency PWM 283 10.3.2 Random Pulse-Position PWM 285 10.3.3 Random Pulse-Width PWM 285 10.3.4 Hybrid Random Pulse-Position and Pulse-Width PWM 286 10.3.5 Harmonic Evaluation Results 287 10.4 Optimized Random PWM Based on Genetic Algorithm 288 10.4.1 GA-Optimized Random Carrier-Frequency PWM 289 10.4.2 GA-Optimized Random-Pulse-Position PWM 290 10.4.3 GA-Optimized Random-Pulse-Width PWM 292 10.4.4 GA-Optimized Hybrid Random Pulse-Position and Pulse-Width PWM 293 10.4.5 Evaluation of Various GA-Optimized Random PWM Inverters 295 10.4.6 Switching Loss of GA-Optimized Random Single-Phase PWM Inverters 296 10.4.7 Linear Modulation Range of GA-Optimized Random Single-Phase PWM Inverters 297 10.4.8 Implementation of GA-Optimized Random Single-Phase PWM Inverter 298 10.4.9 Limitations of Reference Sinusoidal Frequency of GA-Optimized Random PWM Inverters 298 10.5 MATLAB/Simulink Programming Examples 299 10.5.1 Programming Example 1: A Single-Phase Sinusoidal PWM 299 10.5.2 Programming Example 2: Evaluation of a Four-Pulse Wave 302 10.5.3 Programming Example 3: Random Carrier-Frequency 10.6 Experiments on Various PWM Strategies 305 10.6.1 Implementation of PWM Methods Using DSP 305 10.6.2 Experimental Results 307 10.7 Summary 310 11 Experimental Investigations 313 11.1 Introduction 313 11.2 Experimental Hardware Design for Induction Motor Control 314 11.2.1 Hardware Description 314 11.3 Software Development Method 320 11.4 Experiment 1: Determination of Motor Parameters 321 11.5 Experiment 2: Induction Motor Run Up 321 11.5.1 Program Design 322 11.5.2 Program Debug 324 11.5.3 Experimental Investigations 327 11.6 Experiment 3: Implementation of Fuzzy/PI Two-Stage Controller 330 11.6.1 Program Design 330 11.6.2 Program Debug 338 11.6.3 Performance Tests 339 11.7 Experiment 4: Speed Estimation Using a GA-Optimized Extended Kalman Filter 344 11.7.1 Program Design 345 11.7.2 GA-EKF Experimental Method 345 11.7.3 GA-EKF Experiments 346 11.7.4 Limitations of GA-EKF 349 11.8 DSP Programming Examples 352 11.8.1 Generation of 3-Phase Sinusoidal PWM 354 11.8.2 RTDX Programming 359 11.8.3 ADC Programming 361 11.8.4 CAP Programming 364 11.9 Summary 370 12 Conclusions and Future Developments 373 12.1 Main Contributions of the Book 374 12.2 Industrial Applications of New Induction Motor Drives 375 12.3 Future Developments 377 12.3.1 Expert-System-based Acceleration Control 378 12.3.2 Hybrid Fuzzy/PI Two-Stage Control 378 12.3.3 Neural-Network-based Direct Self Control 378 12.3.4 Genetic Algorithm for an Extended Kalman Filter 378 12.3.5 Parameter Estimation Using Neural Networks 378 12.3.6 Optimized Random PWM Strategies Based on Genetic Algorithms 378 12.3.7 AI-Integrated Algorithm and Hardware 379 Appendix A Equivalent Circuits of an Induction Motor 381 Appendix B Parameters of Induction Motors 383 Appendix C M-File of Discrete-State Induction Motor Model 385 Appendix D Expert-System Acceleration Control Algorithm 387 Appendix E Activation Functions of Neural Network 391 Appendix F M-File of Extended Kalman Filter 393 Appendix G ADMC331-based Experimental System 395 Appendix H Experiment 1: Measuring the Electrical Parameters of Motor 3 397 Appendix I DSP Source Code for the Main Program of Experiment 2 403 Appendix J DSP Source Code for the Main Program of Experiment 3 407 Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisSince the first light-emitting diode (LED) was invented by Holonyak and Bevacqua in 1962, LEDs have made remarkable progress in the past few decades with the rapid development of epitaxy growth, chip design and manufacture, packaging structure, processes, and packaging materials. LEDs have superior characteristics such as high efficiency, small size, long life, low power consumption, and high reliability. The market for white LED is growing rapidly in various applications. It has been widely accepted that white LEDs will be the fourth illumination source to substitute the incandescent, fluorescent, and high-pressure sodium lamps. With the development of LED chip and packaging technologies, the efficiency of high power white LED will broaden the application markets of LEDs while changing the lighting concepts of our lives. In LED Packaging for Lighting Applications, Professors Liu and Luo cover the full spectrum of design, manufacturing, and testing. Many concepts are proposeTrade Review"The book will be useful as a resource for engineers in LED design or packaging, and as an introduction to the field for advanced students, researchers, lighting designers, and product managers." (Book News, 1 October 2011) Table of ContentsForeword (Magnus George Craford). Foreword (C. P. Wong). Foreword (B. J. Lee). Preface. Acknowledgments. About the Authors. 1 Introduction. 1.1 Historical Evolution of Lighting Technology. 1.2 Development of LEDs. 1.3 Basic Physics of LEDs. 1.3.1 Materials. 1.3.2 Electrical and Optical Properties. 1.3.3 Mechanical and Thermal Properties. 1.4 Industrial Chain of LED. 1.4.1 LED Upstream Industry. 1.4.2 LED Midstream Industry. 1.4.3 LED Downstream Industry. 1.5 Summary. References. 2 Fundamentals and Development Trends of High Power LED Packaging. 2.1 Brief Introduction to Electronic Packaging. 2.1.1 About Electronic Packaging and Its Evolution. 2.1.2 Wafer Level Packaging, More than Moore, and SiP. 2.2 LED Chips. 2.2.1 Current Spreading Efficiency. 2.2.2 Internal Quantum Efficiency. 2.2.3 High Light Extraction Efficiency. 2.3 Types and Functions of LED Packaging. 2.3.1 Low Power LED Packaging. 2.3.2 High Power LED Packaging. 2.4 Key Factors and System Design of High Power LED Packaging. 2.5 Development Trends and Roadmap. 2.5.1 Technology Needs. 2.5.2 Packaging Types. 2.6 Summary. References. 3 Optical Design of High Power LED Packaging Module. 3.1 Properties of LED Light. 3.1.1 Light Frequency and Wavelength. 3.1.2 Spectral Distribution. 3.1.3 Flux of Light. 3.1.4 Lumen Efficiency. 3.1.5 Luminous Intensity, Illuminance and Luminance. 3.1.6 Color Temperature, Correlated Color Temperature and Color Rendering Index. 3.1.7 White Light LED. 3.2 Key Components and Packaging Processes for Optical Design. 3.2.1 Chip Types and Bonding Process. 3.2.2 Phosphor Materials and Phosphor Coating Processes. 3.2.3 Lens and Molding Process. 3.3 Light Extraction. 3.4 Optical Modeling and Simulation. 3.4.1 Chip Modeling. 3.4.2 Phosphor Modeling. 3.5 Phosphor for White LED Packaging. 3.5.1 Phosphor Location for White LED Packaging. 3.5.2 Phosphor Thickness and Concentration for White LED Packaging. 3.5.3 Phosphor for Spatial Color Distribution. 3.6 Collaborative Design. 3.6.1 Co-design of Surface Micro-Structures of LED Chips and Packages. 3.6.2 Application Specific LED Packages. 3.7 Summary. References. 4 Thermal Management of High Power LED Packaging Module. 4.1 Basic Concepts of Heat Transfer. 4.1.1 Conduction Heat Transfer. 4.1.2 Convection Heat Transfer. 4.1.3 Thermal Radiation. 4.1.4 Thermal Resistance. 4.2 Thermal Resistance Analysis of Typical LED Packaging. 4.3 Various LED Packages for Decreasing Thermal Resistance. 4.3.1 Development of LED Packaging. 4.3.2 Thermal Resistance Decrease for LED Packaging. 4.3.3 SiP/COB LED Chip Packaging Process. 4.4 Summary. References. 5 Reliability Engineering of High Power LED Packaging. 5.1 Concept of Design for Reliability (DfR) and Reliability Engineering. 5.1.1 Fundamentals of Reliability. 5.1.2 Life Distribution. 5.1.3 Accelerated Models. 5.1.4 Applied Mechanics. 5.2 High Power LED Packaging Reliability Test. 5.2.1 Traditional Testing Standards, Methods, and Evaluation. 5.2.2 Methods for Failure Mechanism Analysis. 5.2.3 Failure Mechanisms Analysis. 5.3 Rapid Reliability Evaluation. 5.3.1 Material Property Database. 5.3.2 Numerical Modeling and Simulation. 5.4 Summary. References. 6 Design of LED Packaging Applications. 6.1 Optical Design. 6.1.1 Introduction of Light Control. 6.1.2 Reflectors. 6.1.3 Lenses. 6.1.4 Diffuser. 6.1.5 Color Design and Control in LED Applications. 6.2 Thermal Management. 6.2.1 Analysis of System Thermal Resistance. 6.2.2 Types of Heat Dissipation to Environment. 6.2.3 Design and Optimization of Fin Heat Sink. 6.2.4 Design Examples of Thermal Management of Typical LED Lighting Systems. 6.3 Drive Circuit and Intelligent Control Design. 6.3.1 Typical LED Wireless Intelligent Control System. 6.3.2 Working Principles of Wireless Intelligent Control System. 6.4 Summary. References. 7 LED Measurement and Standards. 7.1 Review of Measurement for LED Light Source. 7.2 Luminous Flux and Radiant Flux. 7.3 Measurement for Luminous Intensity. 7.4 LED Chromaticity Coordinate. 7.5 Dominant Wavelength Determination Algorithm. 7.5.1 Curve Fitting Method. 7.6 LED Color Purity. 7.7 Color Temperature and Correlated Color Temperature of Light Source. 7.8 Automatic Sorting for LEDs. 7.9 Measurement for LED Road Lights. 7.9.1 Electrical Characteristics. 7.9.2 Color Characteristics. 7.9.3 Light Distribution Characteristics. 7.9.4 Dynamic Characteristics. 7.9.5 Test of Reliability. 7.10 Summary. References. Appendix: Measurement Method for Integral LED Road Lights Approved by China Solid State Lighting Alliance. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents a material on computerized optical processes, computerized ray tracing, and the Fourier transform, Bibre-Bragg sensors, and temporal phase unwrapping. This book provides discussion on lasers and laser principles, including an introduction to radiometry and photometry. It offers coverage of the CCD camera.Table of ContentsPreface to the Third Edition Basics Gaussian Optics Interference Diffraction Light Sources and Detectors Holography Moire Methods, Triangulation Speckle Methods Photoelasticity and Polarized Light Digital Image Processing Fringe Analysis Computerized Optical Processes Fibre Optics Metrology Appendix: Complex Numbers Appendix: Fourier Optics Appendix Fourier Series Appendix The Least Squares Error Method Appendix Semiconductor Devices

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe compression schemes applied for the storage and transmission of digital video data leave content sensitive to transmission errors, information loss and quality degradation. Recent developments in error resilience techniques allow improved quality of service of video communication over a range of network platforms. Digital video communications, supported by the Internet, ATM networks and Broadband ISDN, have undergone significant development over the past few years. Emerging applications include videoconferencing, tele-medicine and distance learning. This leading edge text addresses the problems associated with the delivery and design of video communication services. * Presents a comprehensive overview of the principles and techniques employed in the improvement of the performance of video codecs in error prone environments * Provides a performance evaluation and comparison of video coding standards, MPEG-4, H.261 and H.263 * Outlines methods of video communication oTrade Review"...offers an overview of the basic technologies and applications of digital video compression." (SciTech Book News, Vol. 26, No. 2, June 2002)Table of ContentsPreface. Acknowledgements. About the Author. Introduction. Overview of Digital Video Compression Algorithms. Flow Control in Compressed Video Communications. Error Resilience in Compressed Video Communications. Video Communications Over Mobile IP Networks. Video Transcoding for Inter-network Communications. Appendix A: Layering syntax of ITU-T H.263 Video Coding Standard. Appendix B: Description of the Video Clips on the Supplementary CD. Glossary of Terms. Index.

Read more less